WO2016031248A1 - Paper sheet processing device - Google Patents

Paper sheet processing device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016031248A1
WO2016031248A1 PCT/JP2015/004301 JP2015004301W WO2016031248A1 WO 2016031248 A1 WO2016031248 A1 WO 2016031248A1 JP 2015004301 W JP2015004301 W JP 2015004301W WO 2016031248 A1 WO2016031248 A1 WO 2016031248A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
unit
banknote
stacker
bill
tape
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2015/004301
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
小林 斉
慶克 水島
拓也 香川
文章 古賀
善和 光定
清晃 小林
明 日比野
Original Assignee
グローリー株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by グローリー株式会社 filed Critical グローリー株式会社
Priority to CN201580045690.5A priority Critical patent/CN106796742B/en
Priority to EP15835893.7A priority patent/EP3188139B1/en
Publication of WO2016031248A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016031248A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H31/00Pile receivers
    • B65H31/20Pile receivers adjustable for different article sizes
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65BMACHINES, APPARATUS OR DEVICES FOR, OR METHODS OF, PACKAGING ARTICLES OR MATERIALS; UNPACKING
    • B65B27/00Bundling particular articles presenting special problems using string, wire, or narrow tape or band; Baling fibrous material, e.g. peat, not otherwise provided for
    • B65B27/08Bundling paper sheets, envelopes, bags, newspapers, or other thin flat articles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H31/00Pile receivers
    • B65H31/04Pile receivers with movable end support arranged to recede as pile accumulates
    • B65H31/08Pile receivers with movable end support arranged to recede as pile accumulates the articles being piled one above another
    • B65H31/10Pile receivers with movable end support arranged to recede as pile accumulates the articles being piled one above another and applied at the top of the pile
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H31/00Pile receivers
    • B65H31/30Arrangements for removing completed piles
    • B65H31/3036Arrangements for removing completed piles by gripping the pile
    • B65H31/3045Arrangements for removing completed piles by gripping the pile on the outermost articles of the pile for clamping the pile
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H31/00Pile receivers
    • B65H31/30Arrangements for removing completed piles
    • B65H31/3054Arrangements for removing completed piles by moving the surface supporting the lowermost article of the pile, e.g. by using belts or rollers
    • B65H31/3063Arrangements for removing completed piles by moving the surface supporting the lowermost article of the pile, e.g. by using belts or rollers by special supports like carriages, containers, trays, compartments, plates or bars, e.g. moved in a closed loop
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H31/00Pile receivers
    • B65H31/30Arrangements for removing completed piles
    • B65H31/3081Arrangements for removing completed piles by acting on edge of the pile for moving it along a surface, e.g. by pushing
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H31/00Pile receivers
    • B65H31/34Apparatus for squaring-up piled articles
    • B65H31/38Apparatus for vibrating or knocking the pile during piling
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2220/00Function indicators
    • B65H2220/01Function indicators indicating an entity as a function of which control, adjustment or change is performed, i.e. input
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2402/00Constructional details of the handling apparatus
    • B65H2402/40Details of frames, housings or mountings of the whole handling apparatus
    • B65H2402/45Doors
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2511/00Dimensions; Position; Numbers; Identification; Occurrences
    • B65H2511/10Size; Dimensions
    • B65H2511/11Length
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2511/00Dimensions; Position; Numbers; Identification; Occurrences
    • B65H2511/20Location in space
    • B65H2511/21Angle
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2601/00Problem to be solved or advantage achieved
    • B65H2601/30Facilitating or easing
    • B65H2601/32Facilitating or easing entities relating to handling machine
    • B65H2601/324Removability or inter-changeability of machine parts, e.g. for maintenance
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2701/00Handled material; Storage means
    • B65H2701/10Handled articles or webs
    • B65H2701/19Specific article or web
    • B65H2701/1912Banknotes, bills and cheques or the like

Definitions

  • the technology disclosed here relates to a paper sheet processing apparatus.
  • a paper sheet processing apparatus having a stacking unit for stacking paper sheets is known.
  • a paper sheet processing apparatus according to Patent Document 1 counts paper sheets, temporarily accumulates the counted paper sheets in a stacking unit, and binds the stacked paper sheets every predetermined number. is there.
  • each side of the stacked paper sheets is aligned.
  • the sheets are neatly aligned by aligning the sides of the paper sheets in the stacking unit. Paper sheets can be bundled, and the quality of the bundled paper sheets can be improved.
  • various types of paper sheets can be arranged neatly.
  • the technology disclosed herein has been made in view of such a point, and its purpose is to neatly arrange various types of paper sheets in the stacking unit.
  • the technology disclosed herein is a paper sheet processing apparatus including a stacking unit that stacks and stacks paper sheets, and the stacking unit faces a first side that is one side of the stacked paper sheets. And pressing a positioning part that positions the first side at a predetermined position and a third side that is one side of the paper sheet that faces the first side, so that the first side contacts the positioning part.
  • the positioning unit is configured to be replaceable, and changes the predetermined position by being replaced.
  • the banknotes carried into the stacking unit have the third side pressed by the pressing unit, whereby the first side of the paper sheet contacts the regulating unit, and at least the first side is at a predetermined position. To be aligned. As a result, the sheets stacked on the stacking unit are in a state where at least the first sides are aligned.
  • the length of the paper sheet from the first side to the third side (hereinafter simply referred to as “dimension” means the length from the first side to the third side) of the paper sheet. It depends on the type. A paper sheet having a short dimension is pushed by the pressing unit after being carried into the stacking unit, and the amount of movement of the paper sheet until the first side comes into contact with the regulating unit becomes long. The longer the movement amount, the higher the possibility that the paper sheets will flutter before the first side comes into contact with the restricting portion. For this reason, it is preferable that the amount of movement is short in order to accumulate paper sheets in an orderly manner. According to the said structure, it can change where a 1st edge
  • the sheet is replaced with a positioning unit in which the first side is positioned at a position closer to the pressing unit.
  • the paper sheets can be neatly aligned with respect to the paper sheets of various sizes.
  • the dimensions of the banknote vary greatly from country to country.
  • paper sheet processing apparatuses for countries with long banknote dimensions and countries with short banknote dimensions, the types of apparatuses increase, and manufacturing and management become complicated.
  • paper sheet processing apparatus itself can be made common, and it can respond to both a country with a long dimension of a banknote, and a short country by replacing
  • the positioning is not limited to the case where the positioning unit is replaced at the time of shipment, as in the case of dealing with countries with different banknote dimensions, and is positioned each time the size of the target paper sheet changes after shipment and when the device is used. Parts may be replaced.
  • the amount of movement of the pressing portion when the third side of the paper sheet is pressed may be adjusted according to the type of the positioning portion and the size of the paper sheet.
  • the amount of movement of the paper sheet depends on the position (ie, type) of the positioning unit and the size of the paper sheet. Therefore, the amount of movement of the pressing portion is adjusted according to the type of the positioning portion and the size of the paper sheet. Thereby, in addition to the replacement of the positioning portion, the first sides of the paper sheets having various dimensions can be aligned by adjusting the moving amount of the pressing portion.
  • the positioning unit includes at least a first positioning unit and a second positioning unit having different predetermined positions, and the sheet between the first side and the third side has a predetermined first range. Then, the first positioning part is used, the amount of movement of the pressing part is adjusted according to the dimension, and the dimension between the first side and the third side is different from the first range. For the paper sheets in the range, the second positioning portion may be used, and the movement amount of the pressing portion may be adjusted according to the dimensions.
  • the first regulating portion is used for the paper sheets whose dimensions are within the first range, and the paper sheets having the dimensions within the first range are adjusted by adjusting the amount of movement of the pressing portion.
  • the first restricting portion is replaced with the second restricting portion for paper sheets in the second range whose dimensions are different from the first range. And it corresponds to the paper sheet of the dimension within a 2nd range by adjusting the movement amount of a pressing part in the state in which the 2nd control part was attached.
  • the restricting portion is commonly used for paper sheets having a size within a predetermined range, and by adjusting the amount of movement of the pressing portion with respect to a change in the size within the range. Correspond. And when stacking paper sheets with dimensions outside this range, the restricting portion is replaced. In this way, the types of restriction parts can be reduced, and paper sheets of various sizes can be handled flexibly as compared with the case of dealing with paper sheets of different dimensions only by replacing the restriction part. Can do.
  • the stacking unit may have a door that opens and closes the stacking unit, and the positioning unit may be provided on the door.
  • the accumulation part is provided with a door, and the positioning part is provided on the door.
  • the door is configured to open and close the accumulation portion by rotating around a predetermined axis, and the positioning portion is formed on an outer side of the accumulation portion when the door opens the accumulation portion. You may make it expose to.
  • the positioning part is exposed to the outside of the stacking part when the door is opened, so that the positioning part can be easily replaced.
  • various types of paper sheets can be neatly aligned in the stacking unit.
  • FIG. 1 is an external view of a banknote handling apparatus.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic configuration diagram of the banknote handling apparatus.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic enlarged view of the gripping unit.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic enlarged view of the third transport unit.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic configuration diagram of the binding stacker and the binding unit.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of the banknote handling apparatus.
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the main part of the binding stacker.
  • FIG. 8 is a perspective view in which a part of the binding stacker is omitted from a direction different from FIG.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic plan view in which a part of the binding stacker is omitted.
  • FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the tape ring creating unit.
  • FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the lower part of the tape ring creating section as viewed obliquely from above.
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the upper part of the tape ring creating unit as viewed obliquely from below.
  • FIG. 13A is an operation explanatory diagram of each part from when the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping part when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and the banknote is extracted from the binding stacker. Indicates the previous state.
  • FIG. 13B is an operation explanatory diagram of each part from when the banknote is transported to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping portion when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and the banknote is transported to the large tape ring.
  • FIG. 13C is an operation explanatory diagram of each part from when the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping part when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and the banknote is gripped by the temporary gripping part Indicates the state that has been performed.
  • FIG. 14A is an operation explanatory view of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state in which the gripping unit picks up the banknote. .
  • FIG. 14B is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state where the clamp unit presses the banknote.
  • FIG. 14C is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state where the tape is wound around the banknote .
  • FIG. 15A is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the bundled banknote is conveyed to the dispensing unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state in which the bundled banknote is extracted in the second horizontal direction. .
  • FIG. 15B is an operation explanatory diagram of each unit until the bundled banknote is conveyed to the dispensing unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state in which the third conveyance unit grips the bundled banknote.
  • FIG. 15C is an operation explanatory view of each part until the bundled banknote is conveyed to the dispensing unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and the third conveyance unit conveys the bundled banknote to the dispensing unit. Shows the state.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic arrangement view of the second processing unit as viewed from above.
  • FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit with a part of the housing cut, and shows a receiving state for receiving a bundled banknote.
  • FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit with a part of the housing cut, and shows a dispensing state in which a bundled banknote is dispensed.
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, and shows a receiving state.
  • FIG. 20 is a perspective view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, showing a state of dispensing.
  • FIG. 21 is a front view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted and shows a receiving state.
  • FIG. 22 is a front view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, and shows a state of dispensing.
  • FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the banknote handling apparatus after the completion of taking in banknotes.
  • FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the banknote handling apparatus after the completion of taking in banknotes.
  • FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the first positioning portion.
  • FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the second positioning portion.
  • FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the third positioning portion.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the first positioning portion is attached.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the third positioning portion is attached.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic arrangement view of the second processing unit according to the modification as viewed from above.
  • FIG. 1 shows an external view of the banknote handling apparatus 100
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic configuration diagram of the banknote handling apparatus 100.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 is installed, for example, in a bank teller counter and used by an operator.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 takes in banknotes in a loose state, accumulates predetermined types of banknotes, binds the banknotes in a predetermined number of bundles, and throws them out.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 is an example of a paper sheet processing apparatus, and a banknote is an example of a paper sheet.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 is configured to stack a banknote on which a banknote is placed, a hopper section 2 that takes in the banknote, an identification section 3 that identifies the banknote, a binding stacker 4 that stacks banknotes to be bound, and a banknote that is not to be bound.
  • Bundling stacker 5 transports the banknotes taken in from the identification unit 3, the binding stacker 4, the non-binding stacker 5 and the reject stacker 6, and the second transports the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 to the binding unit 9.
  • the housing 12 has an upper surface 121, a lower surface 122, and four side surfaces.
  • the first side surface 123 that is one of the four side surfaces of the housing 12, the hopper portion 2 and the dispensing portion 11 are provided.
  • the second side surface 124 which is another side surface, is provided with a first outlet 413 of the bundling stacker 4 and a second outlet 53 of the non-bundling stacker 5, which will be described in detail later.
  • the first side surface 123 and the second side surface 124 are adjacent to each other.
  • the inside of the housing 12 is divided into a first processing unit 126 that performs processing related to banknote identification and classification, and a second processing unit 127 that performs processing related to binding of banknotes to be bound.
  • the second processing unit 127 is provided above the first processing unit 126.
  • the first processing unit 126 includes a hopper unit 2, an identification unit 3, a non-binding stacker 5, and a reject stacker 6.
  • the second processing unit 127 includes a binding stacker 4, a second transport unit 8, a binding unit 9, and a third transport unit 10. Most of the first transport unit 7 is included in the first processing unit 126.
  • the binding stacker 4 includes two stackers, a first binding stacker 4A and a second binding stacker 4B. Both the first binding stacker 4A and the second binding stacker 4B accumulate the banknotes to be bound. The banknotes accumulated as the banknotes to be bound can be set as appropriate.
  • the bundling stacker 4 is an example of a stacking unit.
  • the first and second bundling stackers 4A and 4B are arranged substantially vertically in the second processing unit 127.
  • the first binding stacker 4A is located above the second binding stacker 4B.
  • the first bundling stacker 4A and the second bundling stacker 4B have the same configuration. When the two stackers are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “binding stacker 4”. The detailed configuration of the bundling stacker 4 will be described later.
  • the non-bundling stacker 5 includes two stackers, the first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B.
  • the first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B are arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction in the first processing unit 126.
  • the second non-bundling stacker 5B is disposed closer to the hopper portion 2 than the first non-bundling stacker 5A.
  • unbound stacker 5 When the two stackers are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “unbound stacker 5”.
  • the detailed configuration of the non-binding stacker 5 will be described later.
  • the banknotes stacked on the non-binding stacker 5 can be set as appropriate.
  • the reject stacker 6 accumulates reject banknotes.
  • the reject stacker 6 is closer to the hopper portion 2 than the first and second unbundled stackers 5A and 5B.
  • the reject stacker 6 is positioned slightly above the first and second unbundled stackers 5A and 5B. The detailed configuration of the reject stacker 6 will be described later.
  • the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 can be set as appropriate.
  • the hopper unit 2 is provided in a portion corresponding to the first processing unit 126 in the first side surface 123, and the dispensing unit 11 is provided in a portion corresponding to the second processing unit 127 in the first side surface 123.
  • the hopper unit 2 includes a mounting table 21 on which banknotes are mounted, two guide units 22 and 22 for guiding banknotes mounted on the mounting table 21, an intake roller 23, and an intake port for taking in banknotes. 24 and a banknote sensor 25 for detecting a banknote on the mounting table 21.
  • a banknote is mounted in the hopper part 2 so that a banknote is taken in a transversal direction.
  • the hopper part 2 is an example of an intake part.
  • the banknote sensor 25 is provided in the vicinity of the intake port 24.
  • the banknote sensor 25 includes a transmission unit that transmits light and a reception unit that receives light, and detects a banknote by blocking light that is emitted from the transmission unit and reaches the reception unit.
  • the bill sensor 25 is arranged such that light is blocked by the bill placed on the placing table 21. That is, the bill sensor 25 can detect that a bill is placed on the placement table 21 by blocking light.
  • a first banknote sensor 411, a second banknote sensor 412, an integrated sensor 52, an integrated sensor 62, a passage sensor 74, a first tape sensor 9210, a second tape sensor 9211, a first sensor 117, and a second sensor 118 are also described. It has the same configuration.
  • the dispensing unit 11 receives the bundled banknotes at the receiving position above the hopper unit 2, slides the bundled banknotes to a dispensing position shifted laterally from the receiving position, and throws the bundled banknotes out of the housing 12 from the dispensing port 111. Put out.
  • the throwing unit 11 throws the bundled banknotes from the throwing port 111 in the short direction.
  • the first transport unit 7 is composed of a transport belt or the like.
  • the first transport unit 7 includes a main transport path 71, first to fourth branch paths 72a to 72d branched from the main transport path 71, a sorting mechanism 73 provided at a branch point from the main transport path 71, and a bill And a plurality of passage sensors 74 for detecting the passage of.
  • the 1st conveyance part 7 conveys a banknote in the transversal direction.
  • the main transport path 71 extends from the take-in roller 23 to the first binding stacker 4A.
  • the first branch path 72a is located on the most upstream side of the main conveyance path 71, and from the first branch path 72a toward the downstream side, the second branch path 72b, the third branch path 72c, and the fourth branch path 72d. Are in this order.
  • the first to fourth branch paths 72a to 72d are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a branch path 72.
  • the first branch path 72 a extends to the reject stacker 6.
  • the second branch path 72b extends to the second non-bundling stacker 5B.
  • the third branch path 72c extends to the first non-bundling stacker 5A.
  • the fourth branch path 72d extends to the second binding stacker 4B.
  • the distribution mechanism 73 is driven by a solenoid (not shown).
  • the sorting mechanism 73 sorts whether or not the bills transported through the main transport path 71 are branched to the branch path 72.
  • a passage sensor 74 is provided on the upstream side of each sorting mechanism 73.
  • the passage sensor 74 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. That is, the passage of the banknote can be detected when the reception of light in the receiving unit of the passage sensor 74 is interrupted and the light reception is resumed thereafter.
  • the sorting mechanism 73 operates when the passage sensor 74 immediately upstream detects the passage of the bill when guiding the bill to the branch path 72.
  • the identification unit 3 is provided on the upstream side of the first branch path 72 a in the main transport path 71.
  • the identification unit 3 is configured to identify the denomination, authenticity, and correctness of each banknote to be conveyed.
  • the identification part 3 has the line sensor 31 and the magnetic sensor 32, and acquires the characteristic of a banknote.
  • the identification unit 3 determines whether the characteristics of the banknotes match the characteristics of the various banknotes stored therein, and identifies the denomination, authenticity, and correctness.
  • Bundle unit 9 binds stacked banknotes. As will be described in detail later, the bundling unit 9 creates a tape ring L, pulls the tape back after the banknote is conveyed into the tape ring L, and binds the banknote with the tape.
  • the second transport unit 8 grips the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 and transports the banknotes into the tape ring L.
  • the second transport unit 8 includes a gripping unit 81 that grips a banknote, and a first horizontal movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the horizontal direction and the short direction of the banknote (hereinafter referred to as “first horizontal direction”).
  • first horizontal direction A second horizontal movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the horizontal direction and in the longitudinal direction of the banknote
  • second horizontal direction a vertical movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the vertical direction.
  • the second transport unit 8 is an example of a pre-bundling transport unit.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic enlarged view of the gripping unit 81.
  • the gripping unit 81 includes an upper arm portion 81a, a lower arm portion 81b opposite to the upper arm portion 81a, and a gripping mechanism that moves the upper arm portion 81a in the vertical direction.
  • the upper arm portion 81a has three finger portions that extend in parallel to each other and a connecting portion that connects the three finger portions.
  • the lower arm portion 81b has three finger portions that extend in parallel to each other and a connecting portion that connects the three finger portions.
  • a portion that is in contact with the bill B (ie, an inner portion, hereinafter referred to as “contact portion”) 81c and a portion of the lower arm portion 81b that is in contact with the bill B (ie, an inner portion) Yes, hereinafter referred to as “contact portion”) 81d is made of urethane rubber.
  • the contact portions 81c and 81d may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber.
  • the gripping mechanism supports the upper arm portion 81a so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and moves the upper arm portion 81a up and down by a motor and a driving belt. Thereby, a banknote can be hold
  • the first horizontal movement mechanism supports the gripping unit 81 so as to be movable in the first horizontal direction, and moves the gripping unit 81 in the first horizontal direction by a motor and a driving belt.
  • the vertical movement mechanism supports the first horizontal movement mechanism so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and moves the first horizontal movement mechanism in the vertical direction by a motor and a drive belt.
  • the second horizontal movement mechanism supports the vertical movement mechanism so as to be movable in the second horizontal direction, and moves the vertical movement mechanism in the second horizontal direction by a motor and a drive belt.
  • the gripping unit 81 is configured to be movable in directions along three orthogonal axes by the first horizontal movement mechanism, the second horizontal movement mechanism, and the vertical movement mechanism.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic enlarged view of the third transport unit 10.
  • the third transport unit 10 receives the bundled banknotes from the second transport unit 8 and transports them to the dispensing unit 11.
  • the third transport unit 10 includes an upper gripper 101, a lower gripper 102, and a horizontal movement mechanism that moves the upper gripper 101 and the lower gripper 102 in the first horizontal direction.
  • the third transport unit 10 is an example of a post-bundling transport unit.
  • a part that contacts the banknote B that is, an inner part, hereinafter referred to as “contact part” 101a and a part of the lower gripping part 102 that contacts the banknote B (that is, an inner part).
  • contact portion is made of urethane rubber.
  • the contact portions 101a and 102a may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber.
  • the horizontal movement mechanism moves the upper gripper 101 in the vertical direction when moving the upper gripper 101 in the first horizontal direction.
  • the third transport unit 10 is configured to pass through the side of the binding unit 9 in the first horizontal direction.
  • the third transport unit 10 receives the bound banknotes supported by the second transport unit 8 while moving in the first horizontal direction from the binding stacker 4 side to the dispensing unit 11 side.
  • the upper gripping portion 101 is located closer to the binding stacker 4, the upper gripping portion 101 is sufficiently separated upward from the lower gripping portion 102.
  • the upper gripping part 101 moves downward as it moves from this position to the dispensing part 11 side, and when it reaches the bound banknote supported by the second transport part 8, the upper gripping part 101 and the lower gripping part 102 bind the bound banknote. Is in a gripped state.
  • the upper holding unit 101 and the lower holding unit 102 convey the bundled banknotes to the vicinity of the dispensing unit 11 while holding the bundled banknotes.
  • the upper gripping portion 101 moves upward in the vicinity of the throwing portion 11 as it approaches the throwing portion 11.
  • the bundled banknotes gripped by the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 are released from the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 in the dispensing portion 11 and are thrown out to the dispensing portion 11.
  • the second side surface 124 of the housing 12 is provided with a touch panel 17 that is an operation unit for inputting information to the banknote processing apparatus 100 and a display unit for displaying information on the banknote processing apparatus 100. It has been.
  • the touch panel 17 is a human interface part for an operator who operates the banknote handling apparatus 100.
  • FIG. 5 the schematic block diagram of the binding stacker 4 and the binding part 9 is shown.
  • the bundling stacker 4 stacks and stacks the bills B transported via the first transport unit 7 in the vertical direction.
  • the bill B is transported in the short direction with one long side on the front side and enters the binding stacker 4.
  • the bundling stacker 4 includes a stage 41 on which the bill B is placed, a guide 42 for aligning the long side on the front side in the conveyance direction of the bill B, and a rear wall 43 facing the long side on the rear side in the conveyance direction of the bill B.
  • an alignment mechanism 49 see FIG.
  • the short side of the bill B that faces the positioning unit 47 is “first side b1”, the long side on the front side in the transport direction is “second side b2”, and the opposite side to the first side b1.
  • the short side is referred to as “third side b3”, and the long side on the rear side in the transport direction is referred to as “fourth side b4” (see FIG. 9).
  • the stage 41 is configured to be movable in the up and down direction, which is the overlapping direction of the bills B.
  • the stage 41 moves according to the accumulated amount of the bills B.
  • the guide 42 stops the movement of the bills B that have been transported into the bundling stacker 4 in the transport direction, and drops the bills B onto the stage 41.
  • the banknotes dropped on the stage 41 have the second side b2 facing the guide 42 and the fourth side b4 facing the rear wall 43.
  • the impeller 410 has a plurality of flexible wings, and plays a role of accelerating the falling of the banknote B by hitting the end on the rear side in the transport direction of the banknote B transported to the bundling stacker 4. have. Thereby, even if it is a case where the banknote B is continuously carried in in the bundling stacker 4, it prevents that the subsequent banknote B enters into the rear-end part of the previous banknote B, and it makes the banknote B one by one in order. Can be stacked from above.
  • the first outlet 413 and the door 46 are provided on the first side b1 side of the bill B on the stage 41.
  • a positioning portion 47 is provided on the inside of the door 46, that is, on the portion facing the first side b ⁇ b> 1 of the bill B.
  • the alignment mechanism 49 is provided on the third side b3 side of the bill B.
  • the alignment mechanism 49 presses the third side b ⁇ b> 3 of the banknote B in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B so that the first side b ⁇ b> 1 of the banknote B contacts the positioning unit 47.
  • the first side b1 of the bills B is aligned by the positioning portion 47 and the alignment mechanism 49.
  • the first banknote sensor 411 includes a transmission unit 411a, a prism 411c, and a reception unit 411b. Arranged to send.
  • the first banknote sensor 411 detects the presence of the banknote B by blocking light at at least one of the two places.
  • the second banknote sensor 412 is configured to detect the banknote B located at a predetermined height in the binding stacker 4.
  • the second banknote sensor 412 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25.
  • the second banknote sensor 412 is arranged to transmit light in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B in parallel with the surface of the stage 41 at a predetermined height position. In FIG. 5, for convenience of explanation, the second banknote sensor 412 is illustrated so as to transmit light in the short direction of the banknote B.
  • the second banknote sensor 412 is blocked by the banknote B from the light traveling from the transmitter to the receiver, while the banknote B is at the predetermined height.
  • the light from the transmission unit is arranged so as to reach the reception unit.
  • the non-bundling stacker 5 stacks and stacks banknotes. As shown in FIG. 2, the non-bundling stacker 5 has a container 50 for collecting banknotes, an impeller 51 for carrying the conveyed banknotes into the container 50, and an accumulation sensor 52 for detecting the presence or absence of banknotes. is doing.
  • the bottom of the container 50 of the non-bundling stacker 5 is inclined. Thereby, the banknotes carried into the container 50 are collected at the lower end of the bottom.
  • the integrated sensor 52 is provided at the lower end of the bottom of the container 50.
  • the integrated sensor 52 has the same configuration as that of the banknote sensor 25, and detects banknotes in the container 50 by blocking light.
  • the integrated sensor 52 is arranged so that light is blocked by the banknotes in the container 50.
  • the impeller 51 has a plurality of wings, holds the conveyed banknote between the wings, and carries it into the container 50.
  • the banknotes are separated from the wings of the impeller 51 near the bottom of the container 50 and accumulated in the container 50.
  • the container 50 is open to the second side surface 124 of the housing 12 as shown in FIG. That is, the second side surface 124 is provided with a second outlet 53 for taking out the banknotes accumulated in the non-binding stacker 5 to the outside of the housing 12.
  • the second outlet 53 is not provided with a door and is open.
  • the second outlet 53 of the first non-bundling stacker 5A and the second outlet 53 of the second non-bundling stacker 5B are opened side by side in the horizontal direction on the second side surface 124.
  • the non-binding stacker 5 is provided with an extruding mechanism 54 for extruding the accumulated banknotes toward the second outlet 53.
  • the push-out mechanism 54 is provided on the back side (the side opposite to the second outlet 53) of the container 50, and is configured to push out banknotes from the back side to the front side (the second outlet 53 side). .
  • the reject stacker 6 stacks and stacks banknotes. As shown in FIG. 2, the reject stacker 6 includes a container 60 that accumulates banknotes, an impeller 61 that carries the conveyed banknotes into the container 60, an accumulation sensor 62 that detects the presence or absence of banknotes, and a container 60. It has stoppers 64 and 64 for preventing the banknotes from being discharged outside.
  • the container 60 of the reject stacker 6 is opened in the first side surface 123 of the housing 12 as shown in FIG. That is, the first side surface 123 is provided with a reject outlet 63 for taking out the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 to the outside of the housing 12.
  • the reject outlet 63 opens above the inlet 24 on the first side surface 123.
  • the reject outlet 63 is not provided with a door and is open.
  • the bottom of the container 60 is inclined so as to be positioned downward as the distance from the first side surface 123 increases. Therefore, the banknotes in the container 60 are accumulated at a position where they enter from the first side surface 123 to the inside. Thereby, it can prevent that the banknote carried in in the container 60 is discharged
  • the two stoppers 64, 64 are provided at the edge of the bottom of the container 60 on the first side surface 123 side.
  • the stopper 64 is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in parallel with the edge of the bottom portion on the first side surface 123 side, and is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so as to be against the bottom of the container 60. Standing up.
  • These stoppers 64, 64 can also prevent the banknotes in the container 60 from being discharged from the reject outlet 63 on the first side surface 123 to the outside. Note that when the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 are extracted from the reject outlet 63, the banknotes can be extracted by depressing the stoppers 64 and 64 against the elastic force of the biasing spring.
  • the impeller 61 has a plurality of flexible wings, and has a role of knocking down the end of the banknote falling in the container 60 on the rear side in the transport direction. Even when banknotes are continuously carried into the container 60, it is possible to prevent subsequent banknotes from entering the rear end of the previous banknote and stack the banknotes one by one in order. .
  • the integrated sensor 62 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25, and detects the banknote in the container 60 when light is blocked.
  • the integrated sensor 62 is arranged so that light is blocked by the banknotes in the container 60.
  • FIG. 6 the block diagram which shows schematic structure of the banknote processing apparatus 100 is shown.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 includes, for example, a control unit 120 and a memory (not shown) based on a known processor.
  • the control unit 120 includes the hopper unit 2, the identification unit 3, the binding stacker 4, the non-binding stacker 5, the reject stacker 6, the first transport unit 7, the second transport unit 8, the binding unit 9, and the third transport unit 10.
  • the projecting unit 11 and the touch panel 17 are connected so that signals can be transmitted and received.
  • the control unit 120 includes a banknote sensor 25, a first banknote sensor 411, a second banknote sensor 412, an integrated sensor 52, an integrated sensor 62, a passage sensor 74, a first tape sensor 9210, a second tape sensor 9211, and a second.
  • the first sensor 117 and the second sensor 118 are connected and their detection signals are input.
  • the control unit 120 generates a control signal based on an input signal from the touch panel 17 and detection signals from various sensors, and outputs the control signal to the hopper unit 2 and the like.
  • the hopper unit 2 and the like operate according to the control signal. For example, taking the bundling stacker 4 as an example, the control unit 120 controls the stage 41, the guide 42, a lock mechanism 46 c described later, the alignment mechanism 49, and the impeller 410. In the memory, dimensions and the like for each type of banknote B are stored.
  • the deposit process of the banknote handling apparatus 100 will be described.
  • the banknotes in a loose state are classified and accumulated in a predetermined stacker, and further, the predetermined banknotes are bound.
  • a predetermined type of banknotes to be bound are stacked alternately on the first and second binding stackers 4A and 4B by a predetermined number, and the predetermined number of stacked banknotes are sequentially bound by the binding unit 9. Processing will be described.
  • an operator receives a bill in a rose state to be deposited from a customer, and places the bill on the hopper unit 2. At this time, even if a plurality of types of banknotes are mixed in the banknotes in a rose state, they are placed on the hopper unit 2 without being classified. An operator adjusts the guide part 22 according to the dimension of a banknote. Subsequently, the operator operates the touch panel 17 to start taking in banknotes. Note that when the bill sensor 25 detects the placement of the bill on the hopper unit 2, the bill processing apparatus 100 may automatically start taking in the bill.
  • the banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2 are taken into the housing 12 from the take-in port 24 one by one when the take-in roller 23 is operated.
  • the taken banknote is transported by the first transport unit 7 and passes through the identification unit 3.
  • the identification unit 3 acquires the banknote type of the banknote that passes through and notifies the control unit 120 of the banknote type.
  • Control part 120 determines the conveyance destination corresponding to a banknote according to the kind of banknote. Specifically, when the banknote is a banknote of a predetermined denomination to be bound and is a correct banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the binding stacker 4 (any one of 4A and 4B). When the banknote is a banknote of a predetermined denomination and is a banknote banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the first non-binding stacker 5A. When the banknote is a banknote of a denomination other than the predetermined denomination, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the second non-binding stacker 5B. When the banknote is a reject banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the reject stacker 6.
  • Control part 120 controls the 1st conveyance part 7 so that a bill may be conveyed to the stacker used as a conveyance place. Specifically, the control unit 120 controls the sorting mechanism 73 corresponding to the branch path 72 connected to the stacker as the transport destination so that the bill is guided from the main transport path 71 to the branch path 72. The control unit 120 switches the sorting mechanism 73 when the passage sensor 74 immediately before the branch path 72 detects a bill. Further, the control unit 120 controls the impeller 410, the impeller 51, or the impeller 61 of the stacker serving as a transport destination, and carries bills into the stacker.
  • the bills conveyed to the bundling stacker 4 are conveyed to one of the two bundling stackers 4.
  • a predetermined number for example, 100
  • the subsequent banknotes are conveyed to the other binding stacker 4.
  • the banknote is first conveyed to the first binding stacker 4A.
  • the first binding stacker 4 ⁇ / b> A when bills are conveyed, the bills are stacked one by one by the rotation of the impeller 410.
  • the control unit 120 controls the second transport unit 8 to grip the banknotes in the first binding stacker 4A by the gripping unit 81, and to remove the banknotes. It is conveyed to the binding unit 9. Thereafter, the control unit 120 controls the binding unit 9 to bind the banknotes with the tape T.
  • the subsequent banknotes are stacked on the second binding stacker 4B. Thereafter, when the banknotes stacked on the second binding stacker 4B reach the binding number, the subsequent banknotes are again stacked on the first binding stacker 4A. By this time, since the banknotes in the first binding stacker 4A have been unloaded, the first binding stacker 4A is empty. Thus, by providing the two binding stackers 4, the binding process can be performed while the banknotes are continuously collected.
  • control unit 120 controls the third transport unit 10 and the dispensing unit 11 to throw out the bundled banknotes from the dispensing port 111.
  • a banknote of a predetermined denomination and a banknote banknote is conveyed to the first non-binding stacker 5A.
  • the first non-binding stacker 5 ⁇ / b> A when bills are conveyed, the bills are stacked in the container 50 by the rotation of the impeller 51. In this way, banknotes of a predetermined denomination and banknotes are stacked on the first non-binding stacker 5A.
  • banknotes of denominations other than the predetermined denomination are conveyed to the second non-bundling stacker 5B and accumulated in the second non-bundling stacker 5B. Reject banknotes are also transported to the reject stacker 6 and accumulated in the reject stacker 6.
  • the rejected banknotes are taken in and identified again. That is, the operator removes the reject banknote from the reject stacker 6, places it on the hopper unit 2, and takes it in again. Since the reject banknote is a banknote that has not been identified as a normal banknote for some reason, it tries to capture and identify again. Nevertheless, the banknotes identified as reject banknotes are again accumulated in the reject stacker 6. The operator returns the accumulated banknotes to the customer.
  • the same-type bundling process is completed, and the counting and sorting of banknotes to be deposited passed from the customer are completed.
  • the touch panel 17 the counted amount is displayed.
  • the operator obtains the approval of the amount from the customer or confirms the coincidence between the amount and the amount described in the payment slip described by the customer, the operator confirms the amount of money with the touch panel 17.
  • the confirmed deposit amount is notified to a higher-level device (not shown), and the deposit process is completed.
  • the operator takes out the bundled banknotes thrown out from the outlet 111, the banknotes accumulated in the bundling stacker 4, and the banknotes accumulated in the non-bundling stacker 5, and puts them in a predetermined storage location. Store.
  • a banknote in which a plurality of types of banknotes are mixed and in a loose state is a banknote of a predetermined denomination, a banknote of a predetermined denomination, and a banknote of a denomination other than the predetermined denomination,
  • the bills are classified as reject banknotes, and the correct banknotes of a predetermined denomination are in a state of being bound for each bound number.
  • FIG. 7 shows a perspective view in which a part of the binding stacker 4 is omitted.
  • FIG. 8 is a perspective view in which a part of the bundling stacker 4 is omitted from a direction different from that in FIG.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic plan view in which a part of the binding stacker 4 is omitted.
  • the stage 41 is configured to be movable up and down, which is the overlapping direction of the bills B. Specifically, the stage 41 is connected to the up / down moving part 41a.
  • the vertical movement part 41a is attached to a vertically extending shaft (not shown) so as to be movable up and down, and is driven up and down by a motor (not shown).
  • the stage 41 has a comb-teeth shape.
  • the bills B are stacked at a predetermined stacking position on the stage 41. This stacking position is the position of the bill B when the first side b1 comes into contact with the positioning portion 47. That is, as will be described in detail later, the bills B are stacked in a state where the first side b1 is substantially in contact with the positioning portion 47.
  • the guide 42 is configured to be movable in the conveyance direction of the bills B.
  • the guide 42 includes an upper guide 42a and a lower guide 42b.
  • the upper guide 42a is attached to a rotating shaft 42d provided on a pair of frames 42c and 42c that move in the conveyance direction of the bill B.
  • the pair of frames 42c, 42c is movably attached to a horizontal shaft (not shown) extending in the transport direction, and is driven along the horizontal shaft by a motor (not shown).
  • the rotating shaft 42d is rotatably supported by the pair of frames 42c and 42c.
  • An upper guide 42a is integrally attached to the rotating shaft 42d.
  • the rotary shaft 42d is biased by a torsion spring 42e around its axis.
  • the upper guide 42a rotates integrally with the rotating shaft 42d.
  • the lower guide 42b is fixed to the pair of frames 42c and 42c.
  • the lower guide 42b is provided below the upper guide 42a.
  • the upper guide 42a is formed in the shape of four comb teeth.
  • the lower guide 42b is formed in four comb teeth.
  • the upper guide 42a is urged around the rotating shaft 42d by a torsion spring 42e, and the tip of the upper guide 42a contacts the tip of the lower guide 42b, and is hung from the rotating shaft 42d.
  • the upper guide 42a and the lower guide 42b form a wall on the front side in the transport direction of the binding stacker 4.
  • three slits extending vertically are formed by the comb teeth of the upper guide 42a and the comb teeth of the lower guide 42b.
  • the two slits at both ends are arranged at positions where the two comb teeth of the stage 41 can enter.
  • the upper guide 42a and the lower guide 42b move back and forth in the conveyance direction of the bill B as the frames 42c and 42c move.
  • the upper guide 42a can rotate forward in the transport direction against the biasing force of the torsion spring 42e, and opens the binding stacker 4 to the front in the transport direction.
  • the rear wall 43 is fixedly arranged in the binding stacker 4. As shown in FIG. 8, a plurality of second locking grooves 44, 44,... Are formed at the upper end portion of the rear wall 43.
  • the second locking groove 44 extends along the fourth side b ⁇ b> 4 of the banknote B stacked on the stage 41. That is, the second locking groove 44 extends in parallel with the surface 41 b of the stage 41.
  • the plurality of second locking grooves 44, 44,... are arranged in the overlapping direction of the banknotes B, that is, in the vertical direction.
  • the second locking groove 44 is formed between the banknote bundle on the stage 41 and the rear wall 43 when the banknote B carried into the binding stacker 4 falls on the stage 41. This is a portion for preventing entry into a gap (a gap between the stage 41 and the rear wall 43 when no banknote bundle is formed on the stage 41).
  • a substantially rectangular frame 46 a is provided at an end portion in a direction (hereinafter referred to as “width direction”) orthogonal to both the conveyance direction of the bills B and the stacking direction of the bills B.
  • a substantially square first outlet 413 is formed in the frame 46a.
  • the door 46 is attached so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis provided on one side of the frame 46a.
  • the door 46 rotates between an open state in which the first outlet 413 is opened and a closed state in which the first outlet 413 is closed.
  • the door 46 is urged in a direction of opening by a coil spring (not shown) provided on the rotating shaft.
  • the door 46 is made of a material that allows the inside to be visually observed from the outside.
  • the door 46 is made of a transparent or translucent material (for example, glass or resin).
  • the door 46 is provided with a lock mechanism 46c as shown in FIG.
  • the lock mechanism 46c is configured to be switchable between a constrained state in which the door 46 is constrained to a closed state and a release state in which the door 46 can be freely opened and closed.
  • the lock mechanism 46c includes a pin 46d provided on the frame 46a, a drive mechanism 46e including a solenoid or the like for driving the pin 46d, and an engaged portion provided on the door 46 and engaged with the pin 46d. 46f.
  • the lock mechanism 46 c is individually controlled by the control unit 120 for each binding stacker 4. That is, the door 46 can be opened and closed individually.
  • a positioning portion 47 is provided inside the door 46.
  • the positioning part 47 positions the first side b1 at a predetermined positioning position P by contacting the first side b1 of the bill B.
  • the positioning portion 47 is made of a material that allows the inside to be visually observed from the outside.
  • the positioning portion 47 is made of a transparent or translucent material (for example, glass or resin).
  • FIGS. 7 to 9 show a state where the second positioning portion 47B is attached. In addition, when not distinguishing the kind of the positioning part 47, it only calls the "positioning part 47".
  • a plurality of first locking grooves 48, 48,... are formed in a part of the positioning portion 47 as shown in FIGS.
  • the first locking groove 48 extends along the first side b ⁇ b> 1 of the bills B stacked on the stage 41. That is, the first locking groove 48 extends in parallel with the surface 41 b of the stage 41.
  • the plurality of first locking grooves 48, 48,... are arranged in the overlapping direction of the banknotes B, that is, in the vertical direction.
  • the first locking grooves 48, 48,... are formed in a relatively upper part of the positioning portion 47.
  • the first locking groove 48 is a locking portion for hooking the first side b1 of the bill B by moving the stage 41 when the bill B leans against the positioning portion 47 and is accumulated. Function as.
  • the alignment mechanism 49 is provided on the side opposite to the door 46 in the binding stacker 4 as shown in FIG. That is, the alignment mechanism 49 is provided at a position facing the third side b ⁇ b> 3 of the banknotes B in the binding stacker 4.
  • the alignment mechanism 49 aligns the edges of the banknotes in the width direction.
  • the width direction is equivalent to the longitudinal direction of a banknote. That is, the alignment mechanism 49 aligns the short sides of the banknotes.
  • the alignment mechanism 49 includes an arm 49a that is rotatably provided around a rotation axis that extends in the stacking direction of the bills B, and a stepping motor 49b that rotates the arm 49a.
  • the alignment mechanism 49 brings the first side b1 of the bill B into contact with the positioning portion 47 by pressing the third side b3 of the bill B toward the door 46 by the arm 49a. That is, the alignment mechanism 49 aligns both short sides of the bills B in cooperation with the door 46. By doing so, the banknotes B in the bundling stacker 4 are aligned in a state of being in contact with the positioning portion 47.
  • the alignment mechanism 49 is an example of a pressing unit.
  • the position after the bill B is moved (that is, the distance between the arm 49a and the positioning portion 47 is substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the bill B). It functions as a restricting portion that restricts movement of the bill B toward the alignment mechanism 49 in the longitudinal direction.
  • Alignment mechanism 49 is configured to be able to adjust the amount of movement of arm 49a, and adjusts the amount of movement of arm 49a according to the type of bill B and the type of positioning portion 47. Specifically, the movement amount of the arm 49a is adjusted such that the arm 49a rotates to a position where the distance between the arm 49a and the positioning portion 47 substantially matches the longitudinal dimension of the bill B to be stacked. Thus, the movement amount of the alignment mechanism 49 when the third side b3 of the banknote B is pressed is adjusted according to the longitudinal dimension of the banknote B and the positioning position P of the positioning portion 47.
  • the stage 41 is formed with a first hole 41c and a second hole 41d through which light transmitted and received by the first banknote sensor 411 passes.
  • the binding stacker 4 is provided with two first banknote sensors 411.
  • the two first banknote sensors 411 are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B. For this reason, the stage 41 is formed with two sets of first holes 41c and second holes 41d.
  • each first banknote sensor 411 includes a transmission unit 411a that transmits light, a reception unit 411b that receives light, and a prism 411c that guides light from the transmission unit 411a toward the reception unit 411b. And have.
  • the transmission unit 411a and the reception unit 411b are arranged side by side in the conveyance direction of the bills B on the ceiling 45.
  • the transmission unit 411a is arranged to transmit light downward, and the reception unit 411b is arranged to receive light from below.
  • the prism 411c is disposed on the bottom of the bundling stacker 4.
  • the prism 411c has an incident portion 411d, an emission portion 411e, and two reflecting surfaces, and is formed in a substantially U shape.
  • the incident portion 411d faces the transmission portion 411a, and the emission portion 411e faces the reception portion 411b. That is, the incident part 411d and the emission part 411e are arranged in the banknote transport direction and upward.
  • the light incident from the incident portion 411d is reflected by the two reflecting surfaces and emitted upward from the emitting portion 411e.
  • the stage 41 light traveling from the transmitting unit 411a toward the incident unit 411d passes through the first hole 41c of the stage 41, and light traveling from the emitting unit 411e toward the receiving unit 411b passes through the second hole 41d of the stage 41. .
  • the incident portion 411d is inserted through the first hole 41c, and the emission portion 411e is inserted through the second hole 41d.
  • the traveling direction of the light traveling from the transmitting unit 411a to the incident unit 411d and the light traveling from the emitting unit 411e to the receiving unit 411b coincides with the moving direction of the stage 41. Even if it moves in the direction, the light transmitted from the transmitting unit 411a passes through the first hole 41c and enters the incident unit 411d, and the light emitted from the emitting unit 411e passes through the second hole 41d. The light enters the receiver 411b. That is, even if the stage 41 moves up and down, an optical path from the transmission unit 411a to the reception unit 411b is secured.
  • the positions of the transmitting unit 411a, the receiving unit 411b, and the prism 411c are fixed, so that the optical axis of the first banknote sensor 411 does not fluctuate and the presence or absence of the banknote B is accurately determined. Can be detected.
  • control of the binding stacker 4 by the control unit 120 will be described.
  • the control unit 120 moves the stage 41 to the initial position before the banknote B is conveyed to the bundling stacker 4.
  • the initial position of the stage 41 is a position relatively above and close to the impeller 410. Thereby, the fall distance of the banknote B falling in the binding stacker 4 can be made comparatively short, and the fall position of the banknote B can be stabilized.
  • the initial position of the stage 41 is a position lower than the height of the second banknote sensor 412.
  • control unit 120 moves the guide 42 to a position corresponding to the type of the bill B conveyed to the binding stacker 4. Since the bill B is transported in a posture in which the short side direction coincides with the transport direction, the position of the guide 42 is adjusted according to the short direction dimension of the bill B. Specifically, the guide 42 is disposed at a position where the distance between the guide 42 and the rear wall 43 is slightly larger than the short dimension of the bills B carried into the bundling stacker 4.
  • the banknote B is conveyed to the binding stacker 4 with this state as an initial state. Since the bill B carried into the binding stacker 4 has a momentum in the transport direction, the second side b2 on the front side in the transport direction of the bill B hits the guide 42 and falls onto the stage 41 as it is.
  • the drop of the bill B is promoted by the impeller 410.
  • the rear end portion in the transport direction of the bills B carried into the bundling stacker 4 is hit downward by the impeller 410.
  • the falling bill B tends to be in a state where the rear end portion is lower than the front end portion.
  • the bill B may be drawn toward the impeller 410, that is, to the rear side in the transport direction.
  • the rear end of the bill B is a gap between the bill bundle on the stage 41 and the rear wall 43 (if no bill bundle is formed on the stage 41, the stage 41 and the rear wall 43 There is a risk of entering the gap.
  • second locking grooves 44, 44,... are provided at the upper end portion of the rear wall 43.
  • the fourth side b4 of the bill B that is about to enter the gap between the bill bundle and the rear wall 43 is caught by the second locking groove 44, and the entry into the gap is suppressed. In this way, the bill B carried into the bundling stacker 4 appropriately falls onto the stage 41.
  • the second side b2 of the bill B is substantially in contact with the guide 42. Further, the fourth side b ⁇ b> 4 of the banknote B faces the rear wall 43 with a minute gap between the fourth side b ⁇ b> 4 and the rear wall 43. Depending on the state when falling on the stage 41, the fourth side b4 of the bill B may be in contact with the rear wall 43.
  • the control unit 120 lowers the stage 41 by an amount corresponding to the thickness of the predetermined number of sheets each time the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 increase by a predetermined number (for example, ten sheets).
  • a predetermined number for example, ten sheets.
  • the control unit 120 determines whether or not the second banknote sensor 412 detects the banknote B every time the banknote B is carried into the binding stacker 4. Normally, the second banknote sensor 412 does not detect the banknote B. However, when the second banknote sensor 412 detects the banknote B, the control unit 120 lowers the stage 41 by a predetermined amount. The descending amount at this time is an amount corresponding to the thickness of the predetermined number of banknotes B or an amount slightly larger than that. Thereby, the 2nd banknote sensor 412 will be in the state which is not detecting a banknote.
  • the control unit 120 basically controls the stage 41 to be lowered every time the number of stacked sheets increases by a predetermined number, while the stage 41 is basically set when the uppermost banknote B exceeds the height detected by the second banknote sensor 412. Lower separately from control. Depending on the state of the banknote B, even the same number of banknote bundles have different thicknesses. Therefore, the control of the stage 41 according to the number of banknotes B and the control of the stage 41 by monitoring the height of the uppermost banknote B are performed. By using together, the fall distance of the banknote which falls in the binding stacker 4 can be maintained in a substantially constant range.
  • the control unit 120 operates the arm 49a of the alignment mechanism 49 every time one bill B is carried into the binding stacker 4. Thereby, the banknote B is pressed toward the positioning part 47 of the door 46 in the longitudinal direction, and the first side b1 of the banknote B comes into contact with the positioning part 47 of the door 46. In this way, both short sides of the accumulated bills B are aligned.
  • the control unit 120 raises the stage 41 and compresses the stacked banknotes B to have a predetermined thickness between the stage 41 and the ceiling 45. To do. If the thickness of the banknote B that is freely dropped and accumulated on the stage 41 does not reach the predetermined thickness, such as when the banknote B is a new bill, the banknote B Is not compressed.
  • the control unit 120 causes the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 to grip the bill B. Since the gripping unit 81 has a shape that can be inserted into the gap between the comb teeth of the guide 42 and the gap between the comb teeth of the stage 41, the banknote B on the stage 41 does not interfere with the guide 42 and the stage 41. It can be gripped.
  • the 2nd conveyance part 8 draws out bill B to the conveyance direction front side in the state where grasping unit 81 grasped bill B.
  • the upper guide 42a of the guide 42 is urged in the direction of closing the bundling stacker 4 by the urging force of the torsion spring 42e (the direction in which the tip portion contacts the tip portion of the lower guide 42b).
  • the bill B drawn out to the gripping unit 81 pushes and moves the upper guide 42a against the biasing force of the torsion spring 42e and rotates it forward in the transport direction.
  • the binding stacker 4 opens to the front side in the transport direction, and the bill B is extracted from the binding stacker 4.
  • the second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B to the binding unit 9. Thereafter, a bundling process is performed.
  • the banknotes B may lean against the positioning portion 47.
  • the bill B may lean against the positioning unit 47 when the bill B naturally falls on the stage 41.
  • the bill B may flutter, and one end portion of the bill B may lean against the positioning portion 47 by the time signature.
  • the control unit 120 monitors the leaning of the banknote B to the positioning unit 47, and performs control to cancel the leaning of the banknote B when the banknote B leans.
  • the control unit 120 detects the leaning of the bill B on the positioning unit 47 by the second bill sensor 412. Since the 2nd banknote sensor 412 is arrange
  • the control unit 120 adjusts the height position of the uppermost banknote B by lowering the stage 41 by a predetermined amount. Even when the stage 41 is lowered, when the bill B is continuously detected by the second bill sensor 412, it is determined that the bill B is leaning against the positioning unit 47.
  • the control unit 120 interrupts the taking of the bill B of the hopper unit 2 and reciprocates the stage 41 up and down as a recovery operation.
  • the control unit 120 first moves the stage 41 downward and then moves it upward.
  • the first side b1 of the banknote B leaning against the positioning portion 47 is caught in any of the first locking grooves 48.
  • the control unit 120 continues the upward movement of the stage 41 even after the first side b1 of the banknote B is caught in the first locking groove 48.
  • the bill B receives the reaction force from the first locking groove 48 and is pushed into the bill bundle, that is, toward a predetermined stacking position on the stage 41.
  • the control unit 120 lowers the stage 41. Thereafter, the control unit 120 raises the stage 41 again and restarts the pushing of the bill B from the first locking groove 48 below.
  • the stage 41 is moved a plurality of times. The banknote B can be pushed to the stacking position by ascending.
  • the control unit 120 determines that the leaning of the bill B to the positioning unit 47 has been recovered. , Resume taking in the bill B.
  • the control unit 120 determines that the leaning of the bill B to the positioning unit 47 has not been recovered.
  • the lock mechanism 46c of the door 46 is set in the released state to allow the banknote B to be taken out from the bundling stacker 4, and the operator is notified via the touch panel 17 of the leaning of the banknote B to the positioning portion 47. The operator is prompted by the display on the touch panel 17 to take out the banknote B in the bundling stacker 4 and start over from taking in the banknote B.
  • the bundling unit 9 includes a tape supply unit 91 that supplies the tape T, a tape ring creation unit 92 that creates the tape ring L using the tape T, A temporary gripping part 93 (see FIGS.
  • the tape supply unit 91 includes a tape reel 911 around which the tape T is wound and a tape transport unit 912 that transports the tape T drawn from the tape reel 911.
  • the tape transport unit 912 transports the tape T along a predetermined transport path.
  • the tape transport unit 912 has a guide (not shown) and a plurality of roller pairs.
  • the tape ring creating unit 92 creates a tape ring L with the tape T, and after the accumulated banknotes B are arranged in the tape ring L, the tape T is pulled back and the tape T is wound around the banknotes B.
  • the tape ring creating unit 92 includes a feed roller pair 920 that feeds and retracts the tape T, a tape gripping unit 921 that grips the leading end of the tape T, and the tape ring L when the tape T is created with the tape T. It has a guide portion 925 that defines the shape, a first tape sensor 9210 that detects the tip of the tape T, and a second tape sensor 9211 that detects that the large tape ring L2 has been created.
  • the tape ring creating unit 92 creates a small tape ring with the tape T by the tape gripping unit 921 and then feeds the tape T by the feed roller pair 920 to enlarge the small tape ring to create the large tape ring L2.
  • the guide portion 925 guides the tape T to define the shape of the large tape ring L2, and the second tape sensor 9211 detects the formation of the large tape ring L2.
  • the delivery roller pair 920 is driven by a stepping motor to deliver the tape T when the tape ring L is created.
  • the feed roller pair 920 is located at the downstream end of the tape transport unit 912 and also constitutes a part of the tape transport unit 912.
  • the tape reel 911 is provided with a stepping motor that rotates the tape reel 911 in the rewinding direction of the tape T.
  • the tape T is wound around the banknote B.
  • the feed roller pair 920 and the tape reel 911 rotate in the direction to rewind the tape T.
  • the first tape sensor 9210 is provided in the transport path of the tape T and is provided between the feed roller pair 920 and the tape grip portion 921.
  • the first tape sensor 9210 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25.
  • the first tape sensor 9210 detects the tape T when light is blocked. For example, the leading end of the tape T can be detected when the pair of delivery rollers 920 pulls back the tape T and the first tape sensor 9210 is in a state where light is received from a state where the light is blocked.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed at a position where the tape T fed from the feed roller pair 920 can be received. Although not shown in detail, the tape gripping portion 921 creates a tape loop L by rotating in a state where the tip end portion of the tape T fed from the feed roller pair 920 is gripped.
  • the guide portion 925 defines the shape of the large tape ring L2 by making contact with the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 when creating the large tape ring L2.
  • the guide part 925 defines the large tape ring L2 in a substantially rectangular shape, specifically, a rectangular shape with curved corners.
  • FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the tape ring creating unit 92.
  • the guide portion 925 includes a lower guide portion 926 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 from the lower side of the large tape ring L2, a first side guide portion 927 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 from the horizontal direction, and It has a second side guide portion 928 and four first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d corresponding to the four corner portions of the rectangle.
  • FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the lower part of the tape ring creating unit 92 as viewed obliquely from above.
  • the lower guide portion 926 has a pair of side walls 926a, 926a and a bottom wall 926b that regulate the position of the tape T in the width direction, and is formed in a groove shape.
  • the width of the bottom wall 926b is wider than the tape width.
  • the pair of side walls 926a and 926a are inclined so that the groove width increases from the bottom wall 926b toward the opening end (that is, upward).
  • the bottom wall 926b is provided with a through hole through which a stamp 981 of a stamping portion 98 described later passes.
  • first corner guide part 929a and 2nd corner guide part 929b are provided in the longitudinal direction both ends of bottom wall 926b.
  • the first corner guide portion 929a bends the tape T located at the corner formed by the lower guide portion 926 and the first side guide portion 927.
  • the second corner guide part 929b bends the tape T located at the corner formed by the lower guide part 926 and the second side guide part 928 (not shown in FIG. 11).
  • Each of the first corner guide portion 929a and the second corner guide portion 929b is composed of two plates. Each of the two plates has an edge that curves in a concave shape, and is erected on the bottom wall 926b so as to face each other.
  • the lower guide portion 926 is provided with a moving mechanism, and is configured to be movable up and down by the moving mechanism. This moving mechanism is common to the moving mechanism of lower clamp parts 943 and 944 described later.
  • the first side guide portion 927 extends in the vertical direction at the end of the lower guide portion 926 on the binding stacker 4 side in the longitudinal direction.
  • the 1st side guide part 927 has the side wall 927a and the bottom wall 927b, and is formed in groove shape.
  • the side wall 927a regulates the position of the tape T in the width direction.
  • the width of the bottom wall 927b is wider than the tape width.
  • Two slits through which the first corner guide portion 929a passes are formed in the bottom wall 927b.
  • 2nd side guide part 928 is extended in the up-down direction in the edge part by the side of the projection part 11 of the longitudinal direction of the lower guide part 926.
  • the second side guide portion 928 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape.
  • the second side guide portion 928 is supported by the support portion so as to be vertically movable, and is connected to the lower guide portion 926 via a link.
  • the second side guide portion 928 rises in conjunction with the rise of the lower guide portion 926 and descends in conjunction with the fall of the lower guide portion 926.
  • the amount of movement of the second side guide portion 928 is amplified by the link.
  • the second side guide portion 928 is configured to retract upward so as not to hinder the conveyance of the bundled banknote B when the bundled banknote B is conveyed.
  • a third corner guide portion 929c and a fourth corner guide portion 929d are provided above the first corner guide portion 929a and the second corner guide portion 929b and at substantially the same height as the tape grip portion 921. Yes.
  • the third corner guide part 929c is provided adjacent to the first side guide part 927.
  • the third corner guide portion 929c has two plates. The two plates have end edges that curve in a concave shape, and stand on the bottom wall 927b so as to face each other.
  • the fourth corner guide portion 929d is provided adjacent to the second side guide portion 928.
  • the fourth corner guide portion 929d is formed of a block having a curved surface that is curved in a concave shape.
  • corner guide portions 929 when the first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d are not particularly distinguished, they may be simply referred to as corner guide portions 929.
  • the second tape sensor 9211 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25 and detects the tape T when light is blocked.
  • the receiving portion of the second tape sensor 9211 is attached to the fourth corner guide portion 929d as conceptually shown in FIG.
  • the transmission unit of the second tape sensor 9211 is disposed at a position where light from the transmission unit is blocked by the tape T guided by the fourth corner guide unit 929d.
  • the second tape sensor 9211 is configured such that the fourth corner guide portion 929d guides the tape T when the transmitting portion transmits light and the receiving portion does not receive light. Detects that it has reached a predetermined size.
  • the temporary gripping part 93 temporarily grips the bill B transported into the tape loop L by the second transporting part 8.
  • the temporary holding portion 93 is provided on the opposite side to the second conveying portion 8 with respect to the tape loop L in the second horizontal direction, that is, the tape width direction.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 grips a portion of the banknote B on the side opposite to the second transport portion 8 with respect to the tape loop L.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 includes an upper gripping portion 931, a lower gripping portion 932, and a vertical movement mechanism that moves the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932 in the vertical direction.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 grips the bill B with the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932.
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the upper part of the tape loop creating unit 92 as viewed from obliquely below.
  • the upper grip 931 includes an upper base plate 933, an upper movable plate 934, and first and second contact portions 931a and 931b provided on the upper movable plate 934.
  • the first and second contact portions 931 a and 931 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the first contact portion 931a and the second contact portion 931b are located at the same height.
  • the first and second contact portions 931a and 931b are made of urethane rubber.
  • the 1st and 2nd contact parts 931a and 931b may be comprised with rubber
  • a tape grip portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 931a and the second contact portion 931b.
  • the upper movable plate 934 is supported by the upper base plate 933 so as to be movable in the width direction of the tape T
  • the lower grip 932 includes a lower base plate 935, a lower movable plate 936, and first and second contact portions 932 a and 932 b provided on the lower movable plate 936.
  • the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the first contact portion 932a and the second contact portion 932b are located at the same height.
  • the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 931a and 931b of the upper grip portion 931, respectively.
  • the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are made of urethane rubber.
  • the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber.
  • the lower movable plate 936 is supported by the lower base plate 935 so as to be movable in the width direction of the tape T.
  • the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 are configured to move in the second horizontal direction in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8 when the bill is transported into the large tape ring L2. ing.
  • the upper movable plate 934 is supported not only by the upper base plate 933 but also by a shaft extending vertically.
  • the lower movable plate 936 is supported not only by the lower base plate 935 but also by a shaft extending vertically. These shafts extend in the vertical direction.
  • the upper grip portion 931 and the lower grip portion 932 move up and down
  • the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 move up and down along the shaft.
  • the vertical movement of the upper grip 931 and the lower grip 932 is not hindered.
  • These two shafts are integrally formed by a frame.
  • the frame and the shaft are configured to be movable in the second horizontal direction by a moving mechanism.
  • the frame and the shaft are moved in the second horizontal direction by the moving mechanism in conjunction with the movement of the second conveying unit 8 when the bill is conveyed into the large tape ring L2.
  • the moving mechanism moves the frame in the second horizontal direction in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8.
  • the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 supported by the shaft of the frame also move in the second horizontal direction.
  • first and second contact portions 931a and 931b of the upper grip portion 931 and the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b of the lower grip portion 932 are fed into the large tape loop L2 of the bill by the second transport portion 8.
  • the position in the second horizontal direction is changed according to the amount of insertion.
  • the clamp part 94 presses the banknote B in the stacking direction when binding the banknote B with the tape T.
  • the clamp portion 94 presses a portion in the vicinity of the portion to be bound bound by the tape T in the bill B.
  • the clamp portion 94 is provided below the bill B and a pair of upper clamp portions 941 and 942 provided above the bill B conveyed into the tape loop L. It has a pair of lower clamp parts 943, 944, and a moving mechanism for moving one upper clamp part 942 and lower clamp parts 943, 944 up and down.
  • the upper clamp portions 941 and 942 are provided on both sides of the tape T in the tape width direction.
  • the upper clamp part 941 far from the second transport part 8 is fixed and cannot move up and down.
  • the upper clamp part 942 closer to the second transport part 8 is configured to be movable up and down.
  • the former is referred to as a fixed upper clamp portion 941 and the latter is referred to as a movable upper clamp portion 942.
  • the fixed upper clamp portion 941 has first and second contact portions 941a and 941b.
  • the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b are located at the same height.
  • the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b are made of urethane rubber.
  • the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber.
  • a part of the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b.
  • the tape grip portion 921 is located at a position lower than the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b.
  • the movable upper clamp portion 942 has first to third contact portions 942a to 942c.
  • the first to third contact portions 942a to 942c are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the third contact portion 942c is located between the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b in the short direction.
  • the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b are located at the same height.
  • the third contact portion 942c is located at a lower position than the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b.
  • the first to third contact portions 942a to 942c are made of urethane rubber.
  • the first to third contact portions 942a to 942c may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber.
  • the movable upper clamp portion 942 includes a clamp position where the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b are the same height as the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941, and a third contact portion. 942c moves up and down between a retracted position that is higher than the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941. When the movable upper clamp portion 942 is located at the clamp position, the third contact portion 942c is located at substantially the same height as the tape grip portion 921.
  • the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are provided on both sides of the tape T in the tape width direction.
  • the lower clamp part 943 far from the second transport part 8 and the lower clamp part 944 closer to the second transport part 8 have the same configuration.
  • the lower clamp portion 943 has first and second contact portions 943a and 943b.
  • the first and second contact portions 943 a and 943 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the first contact portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b are located at the same height.
  • the first and second contact portions 943a and 943b are made of urethane rubber.
  • the first and second contact portions 943a and 943b may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber.
  • the first and second contact portions 943a and 943b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941, respectively.
  • the lower clamp portion 944 has first and second contact portions 944a and 944b.
  • the first and second contact portions 944 a and 944 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B.
  • the first contact portion 944a and the second contact portion 944b are located at the same height, and the first contact portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b of the lower clamp portion 943 are located at the same height.
  • the first and second contact portions 944a and 944b are made of urethane rubber.
  • the first and second contact portions 944a and 944b may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber.
  • the first and second contact portions 944a and 944b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 942a and 942b of the movable upper clamp portion 942, respectively.
  • the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are formed integrally with the lower guide portion 926 of the guide portion 925. That is, the lower clamp parts 943, 944 and the lower guide part 926 move up and down integrally. That is, the moving mechanism that moves the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 up and down is the same as the moving mechanism of the lower guide portion 926.
  • the heater 95 joins the tapes T with the tape T wound around the bill B.
  • the heater 95 thermally welds the tapes T to each other.
  • the cutter 96 cuts a portion where the tape T is not wrapped around the bill B, that is, a portion of the tape T where the bill B is bound and left over.
  • the tip of the cutter 96 is provided with a sawtooth cutting blade.
  • the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are unitized and are opposite to the stamp portion 98 with respect to the bill B arranged in the tape ring L, specifically, the stamp portion 98 in the stacking direction of the bill B. Located on the opposite side. More specifically, the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are disposed above the tape grip portion 921. The heater 95 joins the tape T on the tape grip portion 921. The cutter 96 cuts the tape T on the tape grip portion 921.
  • the printing unit 97 is provided in the tape transport unit 912 as shown in FIG.
  • the printing unit 97 includes a print head that performs printing on the tape T conveyed by the tape conveyance unit 912.
  • the printing unit 97 prints information (for example, denomination, date and time, serial number, etc.) related to the banknotes B to be bound on the tape T, for example.
  • the printing position of the printing unit 97 is shifted in the tape width direction with respect to the portion to be imprinted by the imprinting portion 98 so that the printing does not overlap with the imprinting by the imprinting portion 98.
  • the stamp portion 98 compresses the bill B with the clamp portion 94 and stamps the tape T with the tape T wound around the bill B.
  • the stamping part 98 stamps, for example, a mark related to the banknotes B to be bound (for example, a financial institution mark, a mark indicating the type of banknotes such as a correct note or a non-performing bill) on the tape T.
  • the stamp portion 98 is on the opposite side of the heater 95 and the cutter 96 with respect to the bill B arranged in the tape ring L, specifically, on the opposite side of the heater 95 and the cutter 96 in the stacking direction of the bill B. Has been placed.
  • the stamp unit 98 includes a stamp 981 and a moving mechanism (not shown) that moves the stamp 981 in the vertical direction.
  • the stamp 981 impresses the tape T wound around the banknote B from the stacking direction of the banknote B.
  • the stamp portion 98 is provided integrally with the lower guide portion 926, and moves in the vertical direction integrally with the lower guide portion 926 when the lower guide portion 926 moves in the vertical direction.
  • FIGS. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating the operation of each part until the bill B is transported to the large tape ring L2 and gripped by the temporary gripping portion 93 when viewed in the thickness direction of the bill B.
  • FIG. I a state immediately before the bill B is pulled out from the bundling stacker 4
  • FIG. 13B is a state immediately before the bill B is conveyed to the large tape ring L2, and FIG. It is the state gripped by.
  • FIG. 14A to 14C show operation explanatory diagrams of respective parts until the gripping unit 81 picks up the banknote B and the tape T is wound around the banknote B when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote B.
  • FIG. 14B is a state in which the clamp unit 94 presses the bill B
  • FIG. 14C is a state in which the tape T is wound around the bill B.
  • 15A to 15C show operation explanatory views of respective parts until the bundled banknote B is conveyed to the dispensing unit 11 when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote B.
  • FIG. FIG. 15B shows a state in which the third transport unit 10 grips the bundled bill B
  • FIG. 15C shows a state in which the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled bill B to the dispensing unit 11. It is in the state.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic layout view of the second processing unit 127 as viewed from above. 13 to 15, the upper gripping portion 931, the fixed upper clamping portion 941, and the movable upper clamping portion 942 are not shown. 13 to 15, the portions of the lower grip portion 932 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 that are in contact with the bill B are indicated by hatching.
  • the second transport unit 8 transports the bills B from the binding stacker 4 to the binding unit 9.
  • the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 grips the bill B in the first binding stacker 4A.
  • the second transport unit 8 extracts the gripped banknote B from the first bundling stacker 4A in the first horizontal direction, and continues to the first position until the position in the first horizontal direction matches the tape ring L.
  • Transport horizontally. This first horizontal direction corresponds to the first transport direction.
  • the 2nd conveyance part 8 moves to the up-down direction to the height position which carries in the banknote B in the tape ring L.
  • the control unit 120 creates the tape loop L while the second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 to the second position.
  • the 2nd conveyance part 8 moves the banknote B to a 2nd horizontal direction, as shown to FIG. 13B, and makes it approach in the large tape ring L2.
  • the temporary gripping unit 93 also moves in the second horizontal direction.
  • the temporary holding unit 93 moves in the same direction as the second transport unit 8 in the second horizontal direction.
  • the amount of movement at this time corresponds to the amount of movement of the second transport unit 8.
  • This second horizontal direction corresponds to the second transport direction.
  • the temporary gripping portion 93 grips the bill B as shown in FIG. 13C.
  • the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 releases the banknote B, in the second horizontal direction, in the direction opposite to that when the banknote B enters the large tape ring L2. Moving. And as shown to FIG. 14A, the holding
  • the clamp portion 94 presses the banknote B in the stacking direction, that is, in the vertical direction from both sides.
  • the bill B is compressed from above and below by the upper clamp portions 941 and 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944.
  • the gripping by the gripping unit 81 and the temporary gripping portion 93 is released.
  • the lower guide portion 926 moves upward in conjunction with the rise of the lower clamp portions 943, 944, and the feed roller pair 920 pulls back the tape T.
  • the tape ring L becomes smaller.
  • the lower guide 926 stops rising, while the tape T continues to be pulled back. Finally, the tape T is wound around the banknote B as shown in FIG.
  • the heater 95 joins the tapes T, and the cutter 96 cuts the tapes T.
  • the stamp portion 98 stamps the tape T.
  • the gripping unit 81 grips the bundled banknote B. Subsequently, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are lowered, and the pressing by the clamp portion 94 is released. Note that the lower grip 932 of the temporary grip 93 is also slightly lowered. In addition, the movable upper clamp portion 942 rises. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15A, the second transport unit 8 transports the bundled banknotes B in the second horizontal direction, and transports the banknotes by a predetermined amount to the opposite side from when the banknotes are transported to the large tape loop L2.
  • the tape gripping portion 921 grips the tip end portion of the tape T when binding the bill B with the tape T, the tape gripping portion 921 enters a state between the tape T and the bill B. ing. Therefore, the second transport unit 8 moves the bundled bills B in the second horizontal direction until the tape gripping unit 921 comes out from between the tape T and the bills B.
  • the holding unit 81 releases the holding of the bundled banknote B.
  • the third transport unit 10 grips the bundled banknote B.
  • the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are lowered to a predetermined height position. This height position corresponds to the height of the dispensing unit 11.
  • the lower grip portion 932 is lowered to the same height as the lower clamp portions 943 and 944.
  • the second transport unit 8 moves the bundled banknote B to the height of the lower clamp units 943 and 944 and releases the grip of the grip unit 81.
  • the height of the lower arm portion 81b matches the height of the lower clamp portions 943, 944.
  • the bundled banknote B is placed on the lower arm part 81b and the lower clamp parts 943, 944.
  • the third transport unit 10 moves in the first horizontal direction from the binding stacker 4 side to the binding banknote B as shown in FIG. 15B. come.
  • the distance between the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 of the third transport unit 10 becomes smaller as it approaches the bundled banknote B, and when the third transporter 10 reaches the bound banknote B, the third transport is performed.
  • the part 10 is in a state of holding the bundled banknote B.
  • the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknote B toward the dispensing unit 11 in the first horizontal direction.
  • the lower arm portion 81 b and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 of the second transport unit 8 support the bundled bill B from below, and function as a guide when the bundled bill B is transported to the dispensing unit 11.
  • the third transport unit 10 gradually releases the grip of the bundled banknote B.
  • the bundled banknotes B are pushed out to the dispensing unit 11 by the third transport unit 10.
  • the 1st horizontal direction by which the banknote B is extracted from the bundling stacker 4 by the 2nd conveyance part 8 is shown. It is arranged at an offset position. That is, the binding unit 9 is disposed at a position offset from a straight line extending from the binding stacker 4 in the first horizontal direction. And after the 2nd conveyance part 8 and the 3rd conveyance part 10 extract the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 to the 1st horizontal direction, they convey the banknote B to the 2nd horizontal direction which cross
  • the bill B is carried into the bundling portion 9 by means of the above, and the bundled bill B is carried out in the direction opposite to that when it is carried into the bundling portion 9 in the second horizontal direction, and then removed from the bundling stacker 4 in the first horizontal direction. Transport in the same direction as when. Thereafter, the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknote B to the dispensing unit 11.
  • the housing 12 extends from the bundling stacker 4 in the first horizontal direction, then bends in the second horizontal direction, and further returns to the second horizontal direction. Again, a transport space is provided so that a substantially T-shaped transport path that is bent and extended in the first horizontal direction is secured.
  • FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit with a part of the housing cut, and shows a receiving state in which the bundled banknotes B are received.
  • FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit with a part of the housing cut, and shows a dispensing state in which the bundled banknote B is dispensed.
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, and shows a receiving state.
  • FIG. 20 is a perspective view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, showing a state of dispensing.
  • FIG. 21 is a front view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted and shows a receiving state.
  • FIG. 22 is a front view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, and shows a state of dispensing.
  • the throwing unit 11 receives the bundled banknote B at the receiving position, slides the bundled banknote B to the side, and throws it out at the throwing position, and a base part that supports the slide part 112 so as to be slidable. 113, a drive unit 114 that drives the slide unit 112, a first sensor 117 (see FIGS. 19 and 20) that detects the presence or absence of the bill B on the slide unit 112 at the receiving position, and the slide unit 112 at the dispensing position. And a second sensor 118 (see FIGS. 19 and 20) for detecting the presence or absence of the bill B.
  • the receiving position is a position where the bill B is received from the third transport unit 10 and coincides with the position of the third transport unit 10 in the second horizontal direction.
  • the receiving position is located above the hopper unit 2.
  • the throwing position is a position where the bill B is thrown into the throwing port 111, and coincides with the position of the throwing port 111 in the second horizontal direction.
  • the throwing position is shifted from the upper side of the hopper 2 to the side.
  • the base portion 113 is made of sheet metal.
  • the base portion 113 includes a guide pole 113a (see FIGS. 18 and 20) for guiding the slide portion 112 and a cam plate 113b for guiding the slide portion 112.
  • the guide pole 113a extends along the second horizontal direction.
  • the cam plate 113b is a plate extending along the second horizontal direction, and is formed with a rectilinear groove 113c and a cam groove 113d.
  • the rectilinear groove 113c extends along the second horizontal direction. Most of the cam groove 113d extends along the second horizontal direction, and an end portion on the ejection position side extends obliquely downward.
  • the base unit 113 is provided with a drive unit 114.
  • the drive unit 114 includes a drive motor 114a, a first gear 114b coupled to the drive motor 114a, a second gear 114c that meshes with the first gear 114b, and a third gear 114d that rotates integrally with the second gear 114c. And have.
  • the base unit 113 is provided with a transmission unit of the first sensor 117 and a transmission unit of the second sensor 118.
  • the transmission unit of the first sensor 117 and the transmission unit of the second sensor 118 are arranged at different positions in the second horizontal direction.
  • the transmission part of the first sensor 117 is disposed at a position where the bill 112 on the slide part 112 is shielded from light when the slide part 112 is located at the receiving position.
  • the transmission unit of the second sensor 118 is disposed at a position where the bill 112 on the slide unit 112 is shielded from light when the slide unit 112 is positioned at the dispensing position.
  • the slide unit 112 includes a transport unit 115 that transports the banknote B, and a receiving unit 116 that receives the banknote B and regulates the falling of the banknote B.
  • the transport unit 115 includes a support unit 115a that supports the banknote B, a hanging part 115b (see FIGS. 19 and 20) that bends and hangs from the support unit 115a, and a contact that contacts one short side when the banknote B is transported.
  • the support part 115a is formed of a substantially rectangular sheet metal, is inclined with respect to a horizontal plane, and has a long side on the third transport part 10 side.
  • a hanging portion 115b is provided on the long side of the lower side of the support portion 115a.
  • a locking portion 115c is provided on the short side on the receiving position side.
  • the support 115a is formed with a first hole 115g through which light transmitted from the transmitter of the first sensor 117 passes and a second hole 115h through which light transmitted from the transmitter of the second sensor 118 passes. ing. 115 g of 1st holes are arrange
  • the second hole 115h is arranged at a position where light from the transmission unit of the second sensor 118 passes when the transport unit 115 is located at the projection position.
  • the hanging portion 115b is disposed to face the cam plate 113b.
  • a first bearing 115f is provided on the surface of the hanging portion 115b that faces the cam plate 113b.
  • a rack 115e is provided on the surface of the hanging portion 115b opposite to the cam plate 113b.
  • the rack 115e extends along the second horizontal direction.
  • a third gear 114d of the drive unit 114 is engaged with the rack 115e.
  • the hanging portion 115b is formed with an engaging groove 115i (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 22) that extends in a direction orthogonal to the second horizontal direction and engages the receiving portion 116.
  • the engagement groove 115i extends substantially in the vertical direction.
  • the receiving portion 116 is made of sheet metal.
  • the receiving portion 116 includes a second bearing 116a that engages with the cam groove 113d, and an engagement pin (not shown) that engages with the engagement groove 115i.
  • the receiving part 116 is attached to the hanging part 115b of the conveying part 115 by engaging the engaging pin with the engaging groove 115i. As a result, the receiving unit 116 moves together with the transport unit 115. Here, the receiving part 116 is movable relative to the conveying part 115 along the engagement groove 115i.
  • the second bearing 116a is provided on the surface of the receiving portion 116 opposite to the engaging pin.
  • the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled bills B to the dispensing unit 11.
  • the slide portion 112 is located at the receiving position as shown in FIG.
  • the second bearing 116a is located at the end on the receiving position side of the cam groove 113d
  • the receiving portion 116 protrudes from the surface of the support portion 115a. (Receiving state).
  • the third transport unit 10 pushes the bundled banknotes B to the slide unit 112. Since the support portion 115 a is inclined, the bundled banknote B slides down the surface of the support portion 115 a and is received by the receiving portion 116.
  • the drive motor 114a is operated, and the transport unit 115 is driven via the gear train and the rack 115e.
  • the conveyance unit 115 is guided by the guide pole 113a and the rectilinear groove 113c and moves in the second horizontal direction toward the ejection position.
  • the receiving unit 116 also moves in the second horizontal direction together with the transport unit 115.
  • the receiving portion 116 is guided to the cam groove 113d through the second bearing 116a.
  • the end of the cam groove 113d on the ejection position side extends obliquely downward, and the receiving part 116 is movable relative to the conveying part 115 along the engaging groove 115i.
  • the part 116 moves downward as it approaches the throwing position. That is, the protrusion amount of the receiving portion 116 from the support portion 115a starts to decrease when the slide portion 112 approaches the throwing position.
  • the receiving portion 116 is not projected from the surface of the support portion 115 a (released state) at the throwing position.
  • the bundled banknotes B are not supported at the dispensing position, and the bundled banknotes B slide down along the surface of the support portion 115a as shown in FIG.
  • the transport unit 115 returns to the receiving position in preparation for the delivery of the next bundled banknote B, the receiving unit 116 is guided to the cam groove 113d and becomes in the receiving state again.
  • the bills B accumulated in the bundling stacker 4 are bundled in the bundling portion 9 and then thrown out from the outlet 111.
  • the control unit 120 causes the touch panel 17 to display a display indicating that the bill B is taken out.
  • the control unit 120 unlocks the door 46 of the binding stacker 4, opens the door 46, and illuminates the binding stacker 4. Lights up.
  • the other stacking stacker 4 since the banknote B remains only after one stacking stacker 4 after the completion of taking in the banknote B, the other stacking stacker 4 does not open the door 46 and does not light up.
  • the control unit 120 operates the push-out mechanism 54 of the non-bundling stacker 5 to push out the bills B and to illuminate the non-bundling stacker 5. Light up.
  • the bill B is not stacked on the reject stacker 6, but when the bill B is stacked on the reject stacker 6, the control unit 120 turns on the illumination in the reject stacker 6.
  • the door 46 is automatically opened and the illumination is turned on to notify the operator of the presence of the bill B.
  • the presence of the bill B is notified to the operator by pushing out the bill B and turning on the illumination. Furthermore, in the reject stacker 6, the presence of the banknote B is notified to the operator when the illumination is turned on.
  • the banknote B can be taken out visually by opening the door 46 of the binding stacker 4, pushing out the banknote of the non-binding stacker 5, or lighting the stacker.
  • the stage 41 and the guide 42 perform a predetermined operation in order to make it easy to take out the bill B.
  • the control unit 120 moves the stage 41 to the lowest position.
  • the control unit 120 moves the guide 42 from the state when the banknotes B are stacked to the front side in the transport direction. Thereby, a gap is formed between the guide 42 and the banknote B. Thereby, a space is secured above the banknote B and in the transport direction front side, and the banknote B can be easily taken out.
  • the control unit 120 raises the stage 41 and moves it to the initial position. And the control part 120 confirms whether the 1st banknote sensor 411 and the 2nd banknote sensor 412 have detected the banknote B in the state.
  • the control unit 120 assumes that the banknote B remains in the binding stacker 4 and moves the stage 41 to the lowest position. Move and open door 46 again.
  • the bundling stacker 4 is configured so that the positioning portion 47 can be replaced, that is, replaced.
  • 24 to 26 are perspective views of the three types of positioning portions 47. FIG. 24 to 26 show a state in which the door 46 is opened and the positioning portion 47 is exposed to the outside.
  • positioning portions 47 are prepared, which are a first positioning portion 47A, a second positioning portion 47B, and a third positioning portion 47C.
  • the first positioning portion 47A is attached to the inner surface of the door 46 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the second positioning part 47B is attached to the first positioning part 47A. As shown in FIG. 26, the third positioning portion 47C is attached to the first positioning portion 47A.
  • FIG. 27 shows a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the first positioning portion 47A is attached.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the third positioning portion 47C is attached. 27 and 28, illustration of some elements of the binding stacker is omitted.
  • a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the second positioning portion 47B is attached is shown in FIG.
  • the positioning position P for positioning the short side b ⁇ b> 1 of the bill B is changed by replacing the positioning portion 47. That is, since the first positioning portion 47A is directly attached to the door 46, the positioning position P is closest to the door 46 in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B, that is, farthest from the alignment mechanism 49. Since the second positioning portion 47B is attached to the first positioning portion 47A, the positioning position P is farther from the door 46 than the positioning position P by the first positioning portion 47A in the longitudinal direction of the bill B, and the alignment mechanism 49 Get closer to. Since the third positioning portion 47C is attached to the first positioning portion 47A and is thicker than the second positioning portion 47B, the positioning position P is farthest from the door 46 in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B and is closest to the alignment mechanism 49. .
  • the positioning part 47 is replaced according to the longitudinal dimension of the bill B.
  • the longitudinal dimension differs depending on the type of the bill B. Even if the longitudinal dimension of the banknote B changes, it is possible to press the short side b1 of the banknote B against the positioning portion 47 by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a. However, only by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a, for the bill B having a small longitudinal dimension, the moving distance of the bill B from dropping on the stage 41 until the short side b1 contacts the positioning portion 47 is long. turn into. If the movement distance of the bill B is long, the possibility that the bill B flutters during movement increases.
  • the alignment mechanism 49 having a large movable range of the arm 49a is required only by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a.
  • the positioning portion 47 by moving the positioning portion 47 according to the longitudinal dimension of the bill B, the moving distance of the bill B until the short side b1 contacts the positioning portion 47 can be reduced.
  • the amount of movement of the arm 49a can be reduced.
  • the first positioning portion 47A is attached, and the variation in the dimension within the first range is as follows. This can be done by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a.
  • the second positioning portion 47B is attached, and the variation of the dimension within the second range is determined by the arm 49a. This can be done by adjusting the amount of movement.
  • the third positioning portion 47C is attached, and the variation in the dimension within the third range is that of the arm 49a. This can be done by adjusting the amount of movement.
  • control unit 120 the dimensions of the bills B to be stacked in the bundling stacker 4 and the type of the positioning unit 47 attached are input in advance.
  • the control unit 120 adjusts the amount of movement of the arm 49a according to the longitudinal dimension of the bills B stacked on the binding stacker 4 and the positioning position P of the positioning unit 47 attached.
  • the longitudinal dimension of the bill B varies greatly depending on the country. Even if the change in the longitudinal dimension of the bill B within the same country can be dealt with only by adjusting the movement range of the arm 49a, if the country changes, the change in the longitudinal dimension of the bill B is large, and the movement range of the arm 49a In some cases, adjustment alone is not enough. That is, it is conceivable to change the type of the positioning unit 47 according to the country in which the banknote handling apparatus 100 is used as one of the usages of the replaceable positioning unit 47. By carrying out like this, it is not necessary to prepare the banknote processing apparatus 100 which differs for every country, and it can respond easily to various countries with the common banknote processing apparatus 100 by changing the positioning part 47.
  • the replacement of the positioning unit 47 is not limited to replacement according to the country.
  • the positioning unit 47 may be replaced according to the longitudinal dimension of the banknote B to be stacked on the binding stacker 4.
  • the banknote B can be neatly aligned with respect to the banknote B of various dimensions. it can.
  • banknotes B having a longitudinal dimension within a predetermined range can be dealt with by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a without replacing the positioning portion 47. That is, more types of banknotes B can be positioned with one type of positioning portion 47.
  • the positioning portion 47 is provided on the door 46, and the door 46 is attached to one side of the frame 46a so as to open and close freely. By opening the door 46, the positioning portion 47 is exposed to the outside of the binding stacker 4. That is, when the positioning portion 47 is replaced, the replacement work can be easily performed by opening the door 46.
  • the second positioning portion 47B is attached to the first positioning portion 47A, and the third positioning portion 47C is attached to the first positioning portion 47A, but is not limited to this configuration.
  • the second positioning portion 47B and the third positioning portion 47C may be configured to be directly attached to the door 46.
  • the 2nd positioning part 47B and the 3rd positioning part 47C have thickness according to each positioning position P.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes the binding stacker 4 that stacks and stacks the banknotes B.
  • the binding stacker 4 faces the first side b1 that is one side of the stacked banknotes B, and the first side b1.
  • the pressing portion 49 that presses the positioning portion 47 that positions the first side b1 of the banknote B and the third side b3 that is opposite to the first side b1 to contact the first side b1 with the positioning unit 47.
  • the positioning unit 47 is configured to be replaceable, and changes the positioning position P by being replaced.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 even if the banknote processing apparatus 100 itself is not changed, the banknotes B having various dimensions can be neatly arranged in the binding stacker 4 as long as the positioning unit 47 is replaced.
  • the internal layout of the paper sheet processing apparatus is various, and due to the layout, the paper sheet is taken into the housing from the take-in unit, bundled in the housing, and then bundled paper take-in unit It may be thrown above.
  • a layout may be obtained as a result of the compact configuration of the paper sheet processing apparatus.
  • the technology disclosed herein has been made in view of the above points, and the object of the technique is to process the paper sheets in a configuration in which the paper sheets after being bundled are conveyed above the take-in portion.
  • the object is to make the device compact.
  • the paper sheet processing apparatus disclosed herein has the following configuration.
  • a paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in and binds paper sheets and then throws out the paper sheets, A housing (housing 12); A take-in part (hopper part 2) for taking paper sheets into the housing; A throwing unit (throwing unit 11) for throwing the bound paper sheets out of the housing; The throwing-out unit receives the bound paper sheets at a receiving position above the take-in part, and slides the paper sheets to a throw-out position shifted laterally from above the take-in part. It has the slide part (slide part 112) to throw out, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
  • the slide unit receives the bound paper sheets (hereinafter referred to as “bundled paper sheets”) that have been conveyed above the take-in unit, and the slide unit is shifted laterally therefrom. And slides the bound paper sheets at the throwing position. That is, the bound paper sheets are thrown out at a position shifted laterally from the take-in portion.
  • bundled paper sheets the bound paper sheets
  • the paper sheet processing apparatus can be made compact.
  • the slide portion receives a paper sheet and controls a receiving state (reception unit 116) that can be switched between a receiving state that restricts the falling of the paper sheet and a released state that releases the paper sheet and drops the paper sheet. )
  • the receiving portion is in the receiving state at the receiving position, and is in the released state by sliding to the dispensing position.
  • the bound paper sheets are received by the receiving portion, and dropping is restricted. And in a throwing-out position, when a receiving part will be in a cancellation
  • the receiving portion is guided between the receiving position and the throwing position by a cam mechanism, and is in the receiving state at the receiving position by the guide of the cam mechanism, while at the releasing position is in the released state. It is characterized by becoming.
  • the receiving unit automatically enters the receiving state by moving to the receiving position, and automatically enters the released state by moving to the dispensing position. That is, it is not necessary to provide a special drive source and drive mechanism only for switching the receiving portion between the receiving state and the release state, and the configuration of the slide portion can be simplified.
  • the slide unit is configured to slide between the receiving position and the dispensing position, and includes a transport unit (a transport unit 115) that transports paper sheets, The receiving part slides with the conveying part.
  • the bundled paper sheets are transported from the receiving position to the dispensing position by the transport section in a state where dropping is regulated by the receiving section.
  • the ejection unit includes a first sensor (first sensor 117) that detects the presence or absence of paper sheets on the transport unit at the receiving position by transmitting and receiving light; and A second sensor (second sensor 118) for detecting the presence or absence of paper sheets by transmitting and receiving light;
  • the transport unit includes a first hole (first hole 115g) through which light from the first sensor passes at the receiving position, and a second hole (through the light from the second sensor at the discharge position). The second hole 115h) is provided.
  • the first sensor that detects the presence or absence of paper sheets at the receiving position and the second sensor that detects the presence or absence of paper sheets at the dispensing position are separately provided.
  • the sensor since the sensor detects the presence or absence of paper sheets using light transmitted and received through the transport unit, it is necessary to provide an opening through which the light passes in the transport unit.
  • the first sensor is disposed so that light passes through the opening of the transport unit located at the receiving position, and the second sensor is disposed at the ejection position. It is necessary to arrange so that the opening of the transport unit located at the position passes through the light. That is, the arrangement of the first sensor and the second sensor is restricted by the position of the opening.
  • the first opening that allows the light from the first sensor to pass at the receiving position and the second opening that allows the light from the second sensor to pass at the ejection position are provided in the transport unit. Since they are provided separately, the positions of the first sensor and the second sensor may be appropriately set in relation to the first opening and the second opening, respectively. That is, the position of the first sensor may be determined based on the relationship with the first opening regardless of the second sensor and the second opening. Further, the position of the second sensor may be determined in relation to the second opening regardless of the first sensor and the first opening.
  • the paper sheet processing apparatus 100 is preventing the scattering of the banknote B in conveyance by comprising the part which contacts the banknote B among rubber
  • a paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in paper sheets and performs a predetermined process is known.
  • a paper sheet processing apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-197509 counts captured paper sheets, temporarily accumulates the counted paper sheets in a stacking unit, and collects the accumulated paper sheets. Bundling is performed at a bundling portion every fixed number of sheets. At this time, the paper sheets accumulated in the accumulation unit are conveyed to the bundling unit by the conveyance unit.
  • the technique disclosed here has been made in view of the above points, and the purpose of the technique is to prevent scattering of paper sheets being conveyed.
  • the paper sheet processing apparatus disclosed herein has the following configuration.
  • a paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in paper sheets and performs predetermined processing, A transport unit (second transport unit 8 and third transport unit 10) for transporting the captured paper sheets to a predetermined place;
  • the portion of the transport unit that contacts the paper sheet is made of rubber or resin.
  • contact portion the portion of the transport unit that contacts the paper sheet
  • the contact portion is made of rubber or resin, it is compared with the case where the contact portion is made of metal.
  • the frictional force can be increased and scattering of paper sheets being conveyed can be prevented.
  • a stacking unit (bundling stacker 4) for stacking paper sheets;
  • a bundling portion (bundling portion 9) for bundling paper sheets,
  • the transport unit includes a pre-bundling transport unit (second transport unit 8) that transports the paper sheets accumulated in the stacking unit to the binding unit, At least a part of a portion (contact portion 81c, 81d) in contact with the paper sheet in the pre-bundling conveyance portion is made of rubber or resin.
  • the friction between the contact portion and the paper sheet is configured by forming at least a part of the pre-bundling conveyance portion in contact with the paper sheet (hereinafter referred to as “contact portion”) with rubber or resin. It is possible to improve the force and prevent paper sheets from being scattered or displaced.
  • the transport unit includes a post-bundling transport unit (third transport unit 10) that transports the paper sheets bound in the binding unit, At least a part of a portion (contact portion 101a, 102a) in contact with the paper sheet in the post-bundling conveyance portion is made of rubber or resin.
  • the paper sheets fall from the post-bundling conveyance unit during conveyance of the paper sheets after bundling. It is prevented.
  • the bundling portion includes clamp portions (upper clamp portions 941, 942 and lower clamp portions 943, 944) that compress the paper sheets with the paper sheets interposed therebetween, and is configured to bind the paper sheets compressed by the clamp portions. And At least a part of the clamp portion that contacts the paper sheet (first and second contact portions 941a and 941b, first to third contact portions 942a to 942c, first and second contact portions 943a and 943b, and The first and second contact portions 944a and 944b) are made of rubber or resin.
  • At least a part of the contact portion of the clamp unit is also formed of rubber or resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the paper sheets from being scattered even during binding.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 improves the maintainability of the banknote processing apparatus 100 by devising arrangement
  • Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-197509 discloses a paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in paper sheets in a loose state, binds them, and throws them out.
  • loose paper sheets are input from the upper part of the apparatus, and the bound paper sheets are discharged from the lower part of the apparatus.
  • the paper sheets placed on the input unit are taken in the short direction. Thereafter, the paper sheets are sequentially conveyed to the stacking unit, the binding unit, and the discharge port in a state where the short side direction and the traveling direction coincide with each other.
  • the apparatus includes a transport path for transporting paper sheets from the input unit to the stacking unit, a transport mechanism for transporting paper sheets from the stacking unit to the bundling unit, and paper sheets. Conveying means and the like for conveying the gas from the bundling portion to the discharge port are dense and there is almost no space for maintenance.
  • the technology disclosed herein has been made in view of the above points, and the object is to secure a space for maintenance inside the apparatus.
  • the paper sheet processing apparatus disclosed herein has the following configuration.
  • a paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in and binds paper sheets, A stacking unit (bundling stacker 4) for stacking paper sheets; A binding unit (binding unit 9) for binding paper sheets; A transport unit (second transport unit 8 and third transport unit 10) that transports the paper sheets stacked in the stacking unit to the binding unit;
  • the binding unit is a position that is offset with respect to a predetermined first transport direction (first horizontal direction) in which sheets are extracted from the stacking unit by the transport unit when viewed in a direction orthogonal to a horizontal plane. Are located in The transport unit is After the paper sheets are extracted from the stacking unit in the first transport direction, the paper sheets are transported in a second transport direction (second horizontal direction) that intersects the first transport direction.
  • the paper sheets after being bundled are unloaded in the direction opposite to when they are carried into the bundling section in the second transport direction, and then transported in the same direction as when they are extracted from the stacking section in the first transport direction. It is characterized by.
  • the paper sheets extracted from the stacking unit in the first conveyance direction are not directly conveyed in the first conveyance direction and carried into the bundling unit, but are conveyed from the first conveyance direction to the second conveyance direction. It is bent in the direction and carried into the binding part. That is, the binding unit is not arranged side by side in the first transport direction with respect to the stacking unit in a plan view (when viewed in a direction orthogonal to the horizontal plane), but on the side of the first transport direction.
  • the paper sheets are conveyed in the opposite direction to that when they are carried into the bundling portion in the second conveyance direction, and then conveyed in the same direction as when they are extracted from the stacking portion in the first conveyance direction. Therefore, a space for transporting paper sheets is provided in the first transport direction with respect to the stacking unit. As a result, maintenance can be performed using this conveyance space during maintenance.
  • the paper sheet is not transported by a roller pair or the like, but is transported while being gripped by the transport unit. That is, in a configuration in which paper sheets are conveyed by a roller pair, it is necessary to arrange a conveyance mechanism including the roller pair, and it is difficult to secure a space inside the apparatus. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the paper sheet is moved in a state where the paper sheet is gripped by the transport unit, the transport unit itself moves, so that the movement space is provided. That is, the moving space of the transport unit becomes a maintenance space.
  • [3-4] In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to any one of [3-1] to [3-3], It has a take-in part (hopper part) that takes in paper sheets, The dispensing unit receives the bundled paper sheets that the transport unit has transported in the first transport direction at a receiving position above the take-in unit, and the paper sheets are transported in the second transport direction. It has a slide part (slide part 112) which slides to the same side as the said bundling part, and throws out this paper sheet in a predetermined throwing position.
  • hopper part takes in paper sheets
  • the dispensing unit receives the bundled paper sheets that the transport unit has transported in the first transport direction at a receiving position above the take-in unit, and the paper sheets are transported in the second transport direction. It has a slide part (slide part 112) which slides to the same side as the said bundling part, and throws out this paper sheet in a predetermined throwing position.
  • the bound paper sheets are once discharged to the receiving position above the take-in section by the transport section. Since this receiving position is above the take-in portion, there is no space for dropping the paper sheets as they are, and if the paper sheets are stored on the spot, the size of the paper sheet processing device is increased vertically. On the other hand, the paper sheet received at the receiving position is slid by the slide part, so that the paper sheet is prevented from dropping to the take-in part. Further, since it is not necessary to secure a space for storing paper sheets above the take-in portion, the paper sheet processing apparatus can be made compact.
  • the paper sheets are slid in the second transport direction to the same side as the paper sheets are carried into the bundling portion, the paper sheets are slid out of the receiving position and thrown out.
  • An increase in the size of the leaf processing apparatus can be suppressed.
  • the binding unit is provided at a position offset with respect to the first transport direction, and the paper sheet processing apparatus is enlarged by an amount corresponding to the offset of the binding unit.
  • the throwing position is offset to the same side as the binding unit with respect to the first transport direction. In this way, by utilizing the fact that the sheet processing apparatus is enlarged due to the offset of the bundling portion, it is also possible to provide the dispensing position at a position offset laterally from the receiving position.
  • the bundling portion is configured to create a tape ring (tape ring L) with tape (tape T), and after the paper sheets are carried into the tape ring, the tape is tightened to bind the paper sheets.
  • the second transport direction is the same as a direction in which a paper sheet is carried into the tape ring.
  • the paper sheet is carried into the tape loop at the binding portion.
  • the paper sheet is transported into the tape loop, and the paper sheet is changed from the first transport direction to the second transport direction, transported to the binding unit, and returned to the second transport direction.
  • the transport mode of transporting again in the first transport direction is very well suited.
  • the first transport direction coincides with the tape winding direction (for example, when the paper sheet is transported in the short direction and the tape is wound in the short direction of the paper sheet), as described above.
  • a transport space can be secured in the first transport direction with respect to the stacking unit without disposing a binding unit.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 has been described as an example of the paper sheet processing apparatus, but the paper sheet processing apparatus is not limited to this.
  • paper sheets are identified, distributed, and collected by another device, and the paper sheet processing apparatus conveys the paper sheets in a rose state and accumulates them in the accumulating unit, and the paper sheets accumulated in the accumulating unit.
  • the apparatus which performs only the process which conveys a kind to another place by a conveyance part may be sufficient.
  • the banknote was demonstrated as an example of paper sheets, paper sheets are not restricted to a banknote, A cash voucher, such as a gift certificate, may be sufficient.
  • the configuration of the banknote handling apparatus 100 is an example and is not limited thereto.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes two binding stackers 4, two non-binding stackers 5, and one reject stacker 6, but the number of these is not limited to this.
  • the number of binding stackers 4 may be one or three or more.
  • the number of non-binding stackers 5 may be one or three or more.
  • the number of reject stackers 6 may be two or more.
  • the non-binding stacker 5 and the reject stacker 6 may be omitted.
  • the intake port 24, the outlet 111, and the reject outlet 63 are provided on the first side surface 123, and the first outlet 413, the second outlet 53, and the touch panel 17 are provided on the second side surface 124.
  • each element of the banknote handling apparatus 100 is only an example, and various arrangements can be adopted.
  • the throwing portion 11 may be provided on the side surface of the housing 12 opposite to the first side surface 123, and the binding stacker 4 may be provided closer to the first side surface 123.
  • the said banknote processing apparatus 100 is performing the same kind bundling process, it is not restricted to this.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 divides and stacks different types of banknotes into two binding stackers 4 for a plurality of types of banknotes as a binding target, and stacks the predetermined number of banknotes for each binding stacker 4.
  • a plurality of types of bundling processes for bundling may be performed. That is, the banknotes stacked on the first binding stacker 4A and the banknotes stacked on the second binding stacker 4B are different in type.
  • the banknote handling apparatus 100 may perform a division process of dividing the banknotes B into a predetermined number without binding them. That is, the banknote handling apparatus 100 may not include the binding unit 9.
  • the banknote B in a loose state is placed on the hopper unit 2 as in the same-type bundling process. Thereafter, the bill B is taken in from the take-in port 24, identified by the identification unit 3, and conveyed to an appropriate stacker in the same manner as in the same type bundling process.
  • the control unit 120 releases the lock mechanism 44c of the binding stacker 4 so that the banknotes B of the binding stacker 4 reach the predetermined number on the touch panel 17.
  • the control unit 120 conveys the subsequent banknotes B to the other binding stacker 4. Thereafter, when the banknotes B of the other binding stacker 4 reach a predetermined number, the control unit 120 releases the lock mechanism 44c of the other binding stacker 4 and releases the banknotes of the binding stacker 4 on the touch panel 17 as before. The fact that B has reached the predetermined number is displayed. The operator opens the door 44 and takes out the bills B accumulated in the binding stacker 4.
  • the said banknote processing apparatus 100 processes the banknote of the rose state in which the banknote of several denominations was mixed, it is not restricted to this.
  • the banknote processing apparatus 100 may be configured to process banknotes of a predetermined one type of denomination.
  • the types of banknotes accumulated in each stacker are set in advance, but are not limited to this.
  • the types of banknotes may be assigned to each stacker in the order identified by the identification unit 3 after the banknotes are taken into the banknote handling apparatus 100.
  • the first binding stacker 4A stacks the types of banknotes B first identified by the identification unit 3
  • the second binding stacker 4B stacks the types of banknotes B identified second by the identification unit 3.
  • the first non-bundling stacker 5A accumulates the types of banknotes B identified third by the identification unit 3
  • the second non-bundling stacker 5B collects the types of banknotes B identified fourth by the identification unit 3. You may make it accumulate.
  • the bill B is transported in the short direction, that is, transported in a posture in which the short direction coincides with the transport direction.
  • the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the bills B may be transported in the longitudinal direction, that is, in a posture in which the longitudinal direction coincides with the transport direction. Further, the transport direction may be switched on the way.
  • the bundling stacker 4 is aligned so that the first side b1 of the bill B is in contact with the positioning portion 47, but is not limited to this.
  • a configuration in which the second side b ⁇ b> 2 or the fourth side b ⁇ b> 4 which is the long side of the banknote B is in contact with the positioning portion 47 may be used. In that case, the positioning part 47 is replaced according to the short direction dimension of the banknote B.
  • the banknote B is piled up and down in the binding stacker 4, and the stage 41 is comprised so that it may move up and down, it is not restricted to this.
  • the surface 41b of the stage 41 is inclined with respect to the vertical direction
  • the banknotes B are stacked in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction
  • the stage 41 similarly moves in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction. It may be configured.
  • first locking grooves 48, 48,... Of the positioning portion 47 may be omitted.
  • the contact portions 942a to 942c, the first and second contact portions 943a and 943b, and the first and second contact portions 944a and 944b are made of urethane rubber, but are not limited thereto.
  • each contact portion may be made of a material other than urethane rubber and having a larger coefficient of friction than a main body portion (for example, metal) to which each contact portion is attached.
  • the technique disclosed herein is useful for a paper sheet processing apparatus.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Pile Receivers (AREA)
  • Basic Packing Technique (AREA)

Abstract

A banknote processing device (100) is provided with a bundling stacker (4) which overlays and accumulates banknotes (B). The bundling stacker (4) comprises: a positioning unit (47) which opposes a first edge (b1), being one edge of the accumulated banknotes (B), and which positions the first edge (b1) in a prescribed positioning position (P); and a pressing unit (49) which pushes a third edge (b3), being one edge of the banknotes (B), opposite to the first edge (b1), causing the first edge (b1) to come into contact with the positioning unit (47). The positioning unit (47) is configured in such a way that the positioning unit can be exchanged, and by being exchanged, the positioning position (P) changes.

Description

紙葉類処理装置Paper sheet processing equipment
 ここに開示された技術は、紙葉類処理装置に関するものである。 The technology disclosed here relates to a paper sheet processing apparatus.
 従来より、紙葉類を集積する集積部を備えた紙葉類処理装置が知られている。例えば、特許文献1に係る紙葉類処理装置は、紙葉類を計数し、計数した紙葉類を集積部に一時的に集積し、集積した紙葉類を一定枚数ごとに結束するものである。 Conventionally, a paper sheet processing apparatus having a stacking unit for stacking paper sheets is known. For example, a paper sheet processing apparatus according to Patent Document 1 counts paper sheets, temporarily accumulates the counted paper sheets in a stacking unit, and binds the stacked paper sheets every predetermined number. is there.
特開2002-197509号公報JP 2002-197509 A
 ところで、集積部においては、集積された紙葉類の各辺が揃っていることが好ましい。例えば、特許文献1に記載の紙葉類処理装置のように集積後の紙葉類を結束する場合には、集積部における紙葉類の各辺を揃えておくことによって、きれいに整列された状態の紙葉類を結束することができ、結束された紙葉類の品質を向上させることができる。 By the way, in the stacking unit, it is preferable that each side of the stacked paper sheets is aligned. For example, when bundling paper sheets after stacking as in the paper sheet processing apparatus described in Patent Document 1, the sheets are neatly aligned by aligning the sides of the paper sheets in the stacking unit. Paper sheets can be bundled, and the quality of the bundled paper sheets can be improved.
 また、集積後の紙葉類を結束する場合に限らず、集積部において各辺を揃えた状態で紙葉類を集積しておくことによって、集積後の紙葉類の取り扱いが容易になる。例えば、集積後の紙葉類を所定の場所へ搬送する場合に紙葉類がきれいに整列していないと、紙葉類が搬送中に何かの拍子で散乱してしまう可能性が高まる。また、オペレータが集積後の紙葉類を集積部から取り出す場合においても、紙葉類がきれいに整列している方が取り扱いが容易であり、紙葉類が整列していないと、集積部から紙葉類の取り出しがスムーズにできない等、紙葉類の取り扱いが煩雑となる。 Also, not only when the stacked paper sheets are bundled, but also by stacking the paper sheets with the sides aligned in the stacking unit, handling of the stacked paper sheets becomes easy. For example, if the stacked paper sheets are transported to a predetermined place and the paper sheets are not neatly aligned, the possibility that the paper sheets will be scattered at some time during transport increases. Even when the operator takes out the collected paper sheets from the stacking unit, it is easier to handle if the paper sheets are neatly aligned. If the paper sheets are not aligned, the paper is removed from the stacking unit. Handling of paper sheets becomes complicated, for example, the leaves cannot be taken out smoothly.
 それに加え、様々な種類の紙葉類をきれいに整列できることが好ましい。紙葉類の種類は様々であり、紙葉類の寸法は紙葉類の種類に応じて異なる。 In addition, it is preferable that various types of paper sheets can be arranged neatly. There are various types of paper sheets, and the dimensions of the paper sheets differ depending on the types of paper sheets.
 ここに開示された技術は、かかる点に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的とするところは、様々な種類の紙葉類を集積部においてきれいに整列させることにある。 The technology disclosed herein has been made in view of such a point, and its purpose is to neatly arrange various types of paper sheets in the stacking unit.
 ここに開示された技術は、紙葉類を重ねて集積する集積部を備えた紙葉類処理装置であって、前記集積部は、集積された紙葉類の一辺である第1辺と対向し、該第1辺を所定位置に位置決めする位置決め部と、紙葉類のうち前記第1辺に対向する一辺である第3辺を押して、該第1辺を前記位置決め部に接触させる押し当て部とを有し、前記位置決め部は、取替可能に構成され、取り替えられることによって前記所定位置を変更する。 The technology disclosed herein is a paper sheet processing apparatus including a stacking unit that stacks and stacks paper sheets, and the stacking unit faces a first side that is one side of the stacked paper sheets. And pressing a positioning part that positions the first side at a predetermined position and a third side that is one side of the paper sheet that faces the first side, so that the first side contacts the positioning part. The positioning unit is configured to be replaceable, and changes the predetermined position by being replaced.
 この構成によれば、集積部に搬入された紙幣は、第3辺が押し当て部に押されることによって、紙葉類の第1辺が規制部に接触し、少なくとも第1辺が所定の位置に揃えられる。これにより、集積部に集積される紙葉類は少なくとも第1辺が整列した状態となる。 According to this configuration, the banknotes carried into the stacking unit have the third side pressed by the pressing unit, whereby the first side of the paper sheet contacts the regulating unit, and at least the first side is at a predetermined position. To be aligned. As a result, the sheets stacked on the stacking unit are in a state where at least the first sides are aligned.
 ところで、紙葉類の第1辺から第3辺までの長さ(以下、単に「寸法」という場合には、第1辺から第3辺までの長さを意味する)は、紙葉類の種類に応じて異なる。寸法が短い紙葉類は、集積部に搬入されてから押し当て部に押されて、第1辺が規制部に接触するまでの紙葉類の移動量は長くなる。該移動量が長くなるほど、第1辺が規制部に接触するまでの間に紙葉類がばたつく可能性が高くなる。そのため、紙葉類を整然と集積するためには、該移動量が短い方が好ましい。前記の構成によれば、位置決め部を取り替えることによって、第1辺をどこに位置決めするかを変更することができる。つまり、寸法が短い紙葉類が集積部に集積される際には、第1辺が押し当て部寄りの位置に位置決めされるような位置決め部に取り替えられる。これにより、寸法が短い紙葉類であっても、位置決め部に接触するまでの移動量が短くなり、紙葉類の移動時のばたつきが低減される。 By the way, the length of the paper sheet from the first side to the third side (hereinafter simply referred to as “dimension” means the length from the first side to the third side) of the paper sheet. It depends on the type. A paper sheet having a short dimension is pushed by the pressing unit after being carried into the stacking unit, and the amount of movement of the paper sheet until the first side comes into contact with the regulating unit becomes long. The longer the movement amount, the higher the possibility that the paper sheets will flutter before the first side comes into contact with the restricting portion. For this reason, it is preferable that the amount of movement is short in order to accumulate paper sheets in an orderly manner. According to the said structure, it can change where a 1st edge | side is positioned by replacing a positioning part. That is, when paper sheets with short dimensions are stacked on the stacking unit, the sheet is replaced with a positioning unit in which the first side is positioned at a position closer to the pressing unit. Thereby, even if it is a paper sheet with a short dimension, the movement amount until it contacts a positioning part becomes short, and the flapping at the time of the movement of paper sheet is reduced.
 このように、集積部に集積される紙葉類の寸法に応じて適切な位置決め部を取り付けておくことによって、様々な寸法の紙葉類に対して、紙葉類をきれいに整列させることができる。特に、対象とする紙葉類が紙幣である場合、紙幣の寸法は国によって大きく異なる。紙幣の寸法が長い国と紙幣の寸法が短い国とで別々の紙葉類処理装置を準備することも可能であるが、装置の種類が増加し、製造及び管理が煩雑になってしまう。それに対し、前記の構成によれば、紙葉類処理装置自体は共通とし、位置決め部のみを取り替えることによって、紙幣の寸法の長い国と短い国との両方に対応することができる。 Thus, by attaching an appropriate positioning portion according to the size of the paper sheets to be accumulated in the accumulation portion, the paper sheets can be neatly aligned with respect to the paper sheets of various sizes. . In particular, when the target paper sheet is a banknote, the dimensions of the banknote vary greatly from country to country. Although it is possible to prepare separate paper sheet processing apparatuses for countries with long banknote dimensions and countries with short banknote dimensions, the types of apparatuses increase, and manufacturing and management become complicated. On the other hand, according to the said structure, paper sheet processing apparatus itself can be made common, and it can respond to both a country with a long dimension of a banknote, and a short country by replacing | exchanging only a positioning part.
 尚、紙幣の寸法が異なる国々に対応する場合のように、出荷時に位置決め部を取り替える場合に限らず、出荷後であって装置の使用時に、対象とする紙葉類の寸法が変わる度に位置決め部を取り替えてもよい。 It should be noted that the positioning is not limited to the case where the positioning unit is replaced at the time of shipment, as in the case of dealing with countries with different banknote dimensions, and is positioned each time the size of the target paper sheet changes after shipment and when the device is used. Parts may be replaced.
 また、紙葉類の前記第3辺を押すときの前記押し当て部の移動量は、前記位置決め部の種類及び紙葉類の寸法に応じて調整されるようにしてもよい。 Further, the amount of movement of the pressing portion when the third side of the paper sheet is pressed may be adjusted according to the type of the positioning portion and the size of the paper sheet.
 紙葉類の第3辺を押して、第1辺を位置決め部に接触させる場合、紙葉類の移動量は、位置決め部の位置(即ち、種類)及び紙葉類の寸法に依存する。そこで、押し当て部の移動量は、位置決め部の種類及び紙葉類の寸法に応じて調整される。これにより、位置決め部の取替に加えて、押し当て部の移動量の調整によって、様々な寸法の紙葉類の第1辺を整列させることができる。 When the third side of the paper sheet is pushed and the first side is brought into contact with the positioning unit, the amount of movement of the paper sheet depends on the position (ie, type) of the positioning unit and the size of the paper sheet. Therefore, the amount of movement of the pressing portion is adjusted according to the type of the positioning portion and the size of the paper sheet. Thereby, in addition to the replacement of the positioning portion, the first sides of the paper sheets having various dimensions can be aligned by adjusting the moving amount of the pressing portion.
 さらに、前記位置決め部は、前記所定位置が異なる第1位置決め部及び第2位置決め部を少なくとも含み、前記第1辺と第3辺との間の寸法が所定の第1範囲の紙葉類に対しては、前記第1位置決め部が用いられ、前記押し当て部の移動量が該寸法に応じて調整され、前記第1辺と第3辺との間の寸法が前記第1範囲と異なる第2範囲の紙葉類に対しては、前記第2位置決め部が用いられ、前記押し当て部の移動量が該寸法に応じて調整されるようにしてもよい。 Further, the positioning unit includes at least a first positioning unit and a second positioning unit having different predetermined positions, and the sheet between the first side and the third side has a predetermined first range. Then, the first positioning part is used, the amount of movement of the pressing part is adjusted according to the dimension, and the dimension between the first side and the third side is different from the first range. For the paper sheets in the range, the second positioning portion may be used, and the movement amount of the pressing portion may be adjusted according to the dimensions.
 この構成によれば、寸法が第1範囲内の紙葉類に対しては第1規制部が用いられ、押し当て部の移動量を調整することによって第1範囲内の寸法の紙葉類に対応する。一方、寸法が第1範囲とは異なる第2範囲内の紙葉類に対しては、第1規制部が第2規制部に取り替えられる。そして、第2規制部が取り付けられた状態で押し当て部の移動量を調整することによって第2範囲内の寸法の紙葉類に対応する。 According to this configuration, the first regulating portion is used for the paper sheets whose dimensions are within the first range, and the paper sheets having the dimensions within the first range are adjusted by adjusting the amount of movement of the pressing portion. Correspond. On the other hand, the first restricting portion is replaced with the second restricting portion for paper sheets in the second range whose dimensions are different from the first range. And it corresponds to the paper sheet of the dimension within a 2nd range by adjusting the movement amount of a pressing part in the state in which the 2nd control part was attached.
 このように、規制部は、所定の範囲内の寸法の紙葉類に対しては共通で用いられ、該範囲内での寸法の変化に対しては押し当て部の移動量を調整することで対応する。そして、該範囲外の寸法の紙葉類を集積する際には、規制部を取り替える。こうすることで、規制部の種類を低減することができると共に、異なる寸法の紙葉類に規制部の取り替えのみで対応する場合に比べて、様々な寸法の紙葉類に柔軟に対応することができる。 As described above, the restricting portion is commonly used for paper sheets having a size within a predetermined range, and by adjusting the amount of movement of the pressing portion with respect to a change in the size within the range. Correspond. And when stacking paper sheets with dimensions outside this range, the restricting portion is replaced. In this way, the types of restriction parts can be reduced, and paper sheets of various sizes can be handled flexibly as compared with the case of dealing with paper sheets of different dimensions only by replacing the restriction part. Can do.
 また、前記集積部は、該集積部を開閉する扉を有し、前記位置決め部は、前記扉に設けられていてもよい。 The stacking unit may have a door that opens and closes the stacking unit, and the positioning unit may be provided on the door.
 この構成によれば、集積部には扉が設けられており、位置決め部は扉に設けられている。 According to this configuration, the accumulation part is provided with a door, and the positioning part is provided on the door.
 さらに、前記扉は、所定の軸周りに回転することによって前記集積部を開閉するように構成されており、前記位置決め部は、前記扉が前記集積部を開放したときに該集積部の外方に露出するようにしてもよい。 Further, the door is configured to open and close the accumulation portion by rotating around a predetermined axis, and the positioning portion is formed on an outer side of the accumulation portion when the door opens the accumulation portion. You may make it expose to.
 この構成によれば、扉が開くことによって位置決め部が集積部の外方に露出するので、位置決め部の取り替え作業を容易に行うことができる。 According to this configuration, the positioning part is exposed to the outside of the stacking part when the door is opened, so that the positioning part can be easily replaced.
 前記紙葉類処理装置によれば、様々な種類の紙葉類を集積部においてきれいに整列させることができる。 According to the paper sheet processing apparatus, various types of paper sheets can be neatly aligned in the stacking unit.
図1は、紙幣処理装置の外観図である。FIG. 1 is an external view of a banknote handling apparatus. 図2は、紙幣処理装置の概略構成図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic configuration diagram of the banknote handling apparatus. 図3は、把持ユニットの概略拡大図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic enlarged view of the gripping unit. 図4は、第3搬送部の概略拡大図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic enlarged view of the third transport unit. 図5は、結束スタッカ及び結束部の概略構成図である。FIG. 5 is a schematic configuration diagram of the binding stacker and the binding unit. 図6は、紙幣処理装置の概略構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of the banknote handling apparatus. 図7は、結束スタッカの主要部の斜視図である。FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the main part of the binding stacker. 図8は、図7とは異なる方向から見た、結束スタッカの一部を省略した斜視図である。FIG. 8 is a perspective view in which a part of the binding stacker is omitted from a direction different from FIG. 図9は、結束スタッカの一部を省略した概略平面図である。FIG. 9 is a schematic plan view in which a part of the binding stacker is omitted. 図10は、テープ輪作成部の斜視図である。FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the tape ring creating unit. 図11は、テープ輪作成部の下部を斜め上方から見た斜視図である。FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the lower part of the tape ring creating section as viewed obliquely from above. 図12は、テープ輪作成部の上部を斜め下方から見た斜視図である。FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the upper part of the tape ring creating unit as viewed obliquely from below. 図13A、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送されて一時把持部に把持されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、紙幣が結束スタッカから抜き出される直前の状態を示す。FIG. 13A is an operation explanatory diagram of each part from when the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping part when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and the banknote is extracted from the binding stacker. Indicates the previous state. 図13Bは、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送されて一時把持部に把持されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送される直前の状態を示す。FIG. 13B is an operation explanatory diagram of each part from when the banknote is transported to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping portion when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and the banknote is transported to the large tape ring. The state immediately before being performed is shown. 図13Cは、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣が大テープ輪へ搬送されて一時把持部に把持されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、紙幣が一時把持部により把持された状態を示す。FIG. 13C is an operation explanatory diagram of each part from when the banknote is conveyed to the large tape ring and gripped by the temporary gripping part when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and the banknote is gripped by the temporary gripping part Indicates the state that has been performed. 図14Aは、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直し、紙幣にテープが巻き付けられるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直した状態を示す。FIG. 14A is an operation explanatory view of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state in which the gripping unit picks up the banknote. . 図14Bは、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直し、紙幣にテープが巻き付けられるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、クランプ部が紙幣を押圧した状態を示す。FIG. 14B is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state where the clamp unit presses the banknote. . 図14Cは、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、把持ユニットが紙幣を持ち直し、紙幣にテープが巻き付けられるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、紙幣にテープが巻き付けられた状態を示す。FIG. 14C is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the gripping unit picks up the banknote and the tape is wound around the banknote when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state where the tape is wound around the banknote . 図15Aは、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、結束紙幣が投出部へ搬送されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、結束紙幣を第2水平方向へ抜き出した状態を示す。FIG. 15A is an operation explanatory diagram of each part until the bundled banknote is conveyed to the dispensing unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state in which the bundled banknote is extracted in the second horizontal direction. . 図15Bは、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、結束紙幣が投出部へ搬送されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、第3搬送部が結束紙幣を把持した状態を示す。FIG. 15B is an operation explanatory diagram of each unit until the bundled banknote is conveyed to the dispensing unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and shows a state in which the third conveyance unit grips the bundled banknote. . 図15Cは、紙幣の厚み方向を向いて見たときの、結束紙幣が投出部へ搬送されるまでの各部の動作説明図であって、第3搬送部が結束紙幣を投出部まで搬送した状態を示す。FIG. 15C is an operation explanatory view of each part until the bundled banknote is conveyed to the dispensing unit when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote, and the third conveyance unit conveys the bundled banknote to the dispensing unit. Shows the state. 図16は、第2処理部を上方から見た概略配置図である。FIG. 16 is a schematic arrangement view of the second processing unit as viewed from above. 図17は、筐体の一部を切断した、投出部の斜視図であり、結束紙幣を受け取る受取状態を示している。FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit with a part of the housing cut, and shows a receiving state for receiving a bundled banknote. 図18は、筐体の一部を切断した、投出部の斜視図であり、結束紙幣を投出する投出状態を示している。FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit with a part of the housing cut, and shows a dispensing state in which a bundled banknote is dispensed. 図19は、投出部の主要部品を抜き出した斜視図であり、受取状態を示している。FIG. 19 is a perspective view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, and shows a receiving state. 図20は、投出部の主要部品を抜き出した斜視図であり、投出状態を示している。FIG. 20 is a perspective view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, showing a state of dispensing. 図21は、投出部の主要部品を抜き出した正面図であり、受取状態を示している。FIG. 21 is a front view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted and shows a receiving state. 図22は、投出部の主要部品を抜き出した正面図であり、投出状態を示している。FIG. 22 is a front view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, and shows a state of dispensing. 図23は、紙幣の取込完了後の紙幣処理装置の斜視図である。FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the banknote handling apparatus after the completion of taking in banknotes. 図24は、第1位置決め部の斜視図である。FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the first positioning portion. 図25は、第2位置決め部の斜視図である。FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the second positioning portion. 図26は、第3位置決め部の斜視図である。FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the third positioning portion. 図27は、第1位置決め部を取り付けた場合の結束スタッカの概略平面図である。FIG. 27 is a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the first positioning portion is attached. 図28は、第3位置決め部を取り付けた場合の結束スタッカの概略平面図である。FIG. 28 is a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the third positioning portion is attached. 図29は、変形例に係る第2処理部を上方から見た概略配置図である。FIG. 29 is a schematic arrangement view of the second processing unit according to the modification as viewed from above.
 以下、例示的な実施形態を図面に基づいて詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, exemplary embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
 〈紙幣処理装置の概略構成〉
 図1は、紙幣処理装置100の外観図を示し、図2は、紙幣処理装置100の概略構成図を示す。
<Schematic configuration of banknote handling apparatus>
FIG. 1 shows an external view of the banknote handling apparatus 100, and FIG. 2 shows a schematic configuration diagram of the banknote handling apparatus 100.
 紙幣処理装置100は、例えば銀行のテラーカウンタに設置され、オペレータによって使用される。紙幣処理装置100は、バラ状態の紙幣を取り込み、所定の種類の紙幣を集積し、該紙幣を所定の結束枚数で結束して投出する。紙幣処理装置100は、紙葉類処理装置の一例であり、紙幣は、紙葉類の一例である。 The banknote handling apparatus 100 is installed, for example, in a bank teller counter and used by an operator. The banknote handling apparatus 100 takes in banknotes in a loose state, accumulates predetermined types of banknotes, binds the banknotes in a predetermined number of bundles, and throws them out. The banknote processing apparatus 100 is an example of a paper sheet processing apparatus, and a banknote is an example of a paper sheet.
 紙幣処理装置100は、紙幣が載置され、該紙幣を取り込むホッパ部2と、紙幣を識別する識別部3と、結束対象の紙幣を集積する結束スタッカ4と、結束対象でない紙幣を集積する非結束スタッカ5と、リジェクト紙幣を集積するリジェクトスタッカ6と、紙幣を結束する結束部9と、結束された紙幣(以下、「結束紙幣」という)を投出する投出部11と、ホッパ部2から取り込まれた紙幣を、識別部3、結束スタッカ4、非結束スタッカ5及びリジェクトスタッカ6に搬送する第1搬送部7と、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣を結束部9まで搬送する第2搬送部8と、結束紙幣を投出部11まで搬送する第3搬送部10と、識別部3、結束スタッカ4、非結束スタッカ5、リジェクトスタッカ6、第1搬送部7、第2搬送部8、結束部9、第3搬送部10及び投出部11を収容する箱状の筐体12とを備えている。 The banknote handling apparatus 100 is configured to stack a banknote on which a banknote is placed, a hopper section 2 that takes in the banknote, an identification section 3 that identifies the banknote, a binding stacker 4 that stacks banknotes to be bound, and a banknote that is not to be bound. Bundling stacker 5, reject stacker 6 for collecting rejected banknotes, bundling section 9 for bundling banknotes, dispensing section 11 for throwing out bundled banknotes (hereinafter referred to as "bundled banknotes"), and hopper section 2 The first transport unit 7 transports the banknotes taken in from the identification unit 3, the binding stacker 4, the non-binding stacker 5 and the reject stacker 6, and the second transports the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 to the binding unit 9. The transport unit 8, the third transport unit 10 that transports the bundled banknotes to the dispensing unit 11, the identification unit 3, the binding stacker 4, the non-binding stacker 5, the reject stacker 6, the first transport unit 7, and the second transport unit 8. , Yui Part 9, and a box-shaped casing 12 for housing the third conveying unit 10 and dispensing unit 11.
 筐体12は、上面121と、下面122と4つの側面とを有している。筐体12の4つの側面のうちの1つの側面である第1側面123には、ホッパ部2及び投出部11が設けられている。また、別の側面である第2側面124には、詳しくは後述する結束スタッカ4の第1取出口413及び非結束スタッカ5の第2取出口53が設けられている。第1側面123と第2側面124とは、隣接している。 The housing 12 has an upper surface 121, a lower surface 122, and four side surfaces. On the first side surface 123 that is one of the four side surfaces of the housing 12, the hopper portion 2 and the dispensing portion 11 are provided. The second side surface 124, which is another side surface, is provided with a first outlet 413 of the bundling stacker 4 and a second outlet 53 of the non-bundling stacker 5, which will be described in detail later. The first side surface 123 and the second side surface 124 are adjacent to each other.
 筐体12の内部は、紙幣の識別及び分類に関する処理を行う第1処理部126と、結束対象の紙幣の結束に関する処理を行う第2処理部127とに別れている。第2処理部127は、第1処理部126の上方に設けられている。第1処理部126には、ホッパ部2、識別部3、非結束スタッカ5及びリジェクトスタッカ6が含まれる。第2処理部127には、結束スタッカ4、第2搬送部8、結束部9及び第3搬送部10が含まれる。第1搬送部7の大部分は、第1処理部126に含まれている。 The inside of the housing 12 is divided into a first processing unit 126 that performs processing related to banknote identification and classification, and a second processing unit 127 that performs processing related to binding of banknotes to be bound. The second processing unit 127 is provided above the first processing unit 126. The first processing unit 126 includes a hopper unit 2, an identification unit 3, a non-binding stacker 5, and a reject stacker 6. The second processing unit 127 includes a binding stacker 4, a second transport unit 8, a binding unit 9, and a third transport unit 10. Most of the first transport unit 7 is included in the first processing unit 126.
 結束スタッカ4は、第1結束スタッカ4Aと第2結束スタッカ4Bとの2つのスタッカを含んでいる。第1結束スタッカ4Aと第2結束スタッカ4Bはともに、結束対象の紙幣を集積する。結束対象の紙幣として集積する紙幣は、適宜設定することができる。結束スタッカ4は、集積部の一例である。 The binding stacker 4 includes two stackers, a first binding stacker 4A and a second binding stacker 4B. Both the first binding stacker 4A and the second binding stacker 4B accumulate the banknotes to be bound. The banknotes accumulated as the banknotes to be bound can be set as appropriate. The bundling stacker 4 is an example of a stacking unit.
 第1及び第2結束スタッカ4A,4Bは、第2処理部127内において実質的に上下方向に並んで配置されている。第1結束スタッカ4Aは、第2結束スタッカ4Bの上方に位置している。第1結束スタッカ4Aと第2結束スタッカ4Bとは、同様の構成をしている。2つのスタッカを区別しないときには、単に「結束スタッカ4」と称する。結束スタッカ4の詳細な構成については後述する。 The first and second bundling stackers 4A and 4B are arranged substantially vertically in the second processing unit 127. The first binding stacker 4A is located above the second binding stacker 4B. The first bundling stacker 4A and the second bundling stacker 4B have the same configuration. When the two stackers are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “binding stacker 4”. The detailed configuration of the bundling stacker 4 will be described later.
 非結束スタッカ5は、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bの2つのスタッカを含んでいる。第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bは、第1処理部126内において実質的に水平方向に並んで配置されている。第2非結束スタッカ5Bの方が第1非結束スタッカ5Aよりもホッパ部2に近い位置に配置されている。2つのスタッカを区別しないときには、単に「非結束スタッカ5」と称する。非結束スタッカ5の詳細な構成については後述する。非結束スタッカ5に集積する紙幣は適宜設定することができる。 The non-bundling stacker 5 includes two stackers, the first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B. The first and second non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B are arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction in the first processing unit 126. The second non-bundling stacker 5B is disposed closer to the hopper portion 2 than the first non-bundling stacker 5A. When the two stackers are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as “unbound stacker 5”. The detailed configuration of the non-binding stacker 5 will be described later. The banknotes stacked on the non-binding stacker 5 can be set as appropriate.
 リジェクトスタッカ6は、リジェクト紙幣を集積する。リジェクトスタッカ6は、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bよりもホッパ部2に近接している。リジェクトスタッカ6は、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bよりも少し上方に位置している。リジェクトスタッカ6の詳細な構成については後述する。リジェクトスタッカ6に集積する紙幣は適宜設定することができる。 The reject stacker 6 accumulates reject banknotes. The reject stacker 6 is closer to the hopper portion 2 than the first and second unbundled stackers 5A and 5B. The reject stacker 6 is positioned slightly above the first and second unbundled stackers 5A and 5B. The detailed configuration of the reject stacker 6 will be described later. The banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 can be set as appropriate.
 ホッパ部2は、第1側面123のうち第1処理部126に対応する部分に設けられ、投出部11は、第1側面123のうち第2処理部127に対応する部分に設けられている。ホッパ部2は、紙幣が載置される載置台21と、載置台21上に載置された紙幣を案内する2つのガイド部22,22と、取込ローラ23と、紙幣を取り込む取込口24と、載置台21上の紙幣を検知する紙幣センサ25とを有している。本実施形態では、紙幣が短手方向に取り込まれていくように、紙幣がホッパ部2に載置される。ホッパ部2は、取込部の一例である。 The hopper unit 2 is provided in a portion corresponding to the first processing unit 126 in the first side surface 123, and the dispensing unit 11 is provided in a portion corresponding to the second processing unit 127 in the first side surface 123. . The hopper unit 2 includes a mounting table 21 on which banknotes are mounted, two guide units 22 and 22 for guiding banknotes mounted on the mounting table 21, an intake roller 23, and an intake port for taking in banknotes. 24 and a banknote sensor 25 for detecting a banknote on the mounting table 21. In this embodiment, a banknote is mounted in the hopper part 2 so that a banknote is taken in a transversal direction. The hopper part 2 is an example of an intake part.
 紙幣センサ25は、取込口24の近傍に設けられている。紙幣センサ25は、光を送信する送信部と光を受信する受信部とを有し、送信部から出射されて受信部に到達する光が遮断されることによって紙幣を検知する。紙幣センサ25は、載置台21上に載置された紙幣により光が遮断されるように配置されている。つまり、紙幣センサ25は、光が遮断されることによって、載置台21上に紙幣が載置されていることを検知することができる。尚、後述する第1紙幣センサ411、第2紙幣センサ412、集積センサ52、集積センサ62、通過センサ74、第1テープセンサ9210、第2テープセンサ9211、第1センサ117及び第2センサ118も同様の構成をしている。 The banknote sensor 25 is provided in the vicinity of the intake port 24. The banknote sensor 25 includes a transmission unit that transmits light and a reception unit that receives light, and detects a banknote by blocking light that is emitted from the transmission unit and reaches the reception unit. The bill sensor 25 is arranged such that light is blocked by the bill placed on the placing table 21. That is, the bill sensor 25 can detect that a bill is placed on the placement table 21 by blocking light. A first banknote sensor 411, a second banknote sensor 412, an integrated sensor 52, an integrated sensor 62, a passage sensor 74, a first tape sensor 9210, a second tape sensor 9211, a first sensor 117, and a second sensor 118 are also described. It has the same configuration.
 投出部11は、結束紙幣をホッパ部2の上方の受取位置において受け取って、該結束紙幣を受取位置から側方へずれた投出位置へスライドさせて投出口111から筐体12外へ投出する。投出部11は、該結束紙幣をその短手方向へ投出口111から投出する。 The dispensing unit 11 receives the bundled banknotes at the receiving position above the hopper unit 2, slides the bundled banknotes to a dispensing position shifted laterally from the receiving position, and throws the bundled banknotes out of the housing 12 from the dispensing port 111. Put out. The throwing unit 11 throws the bundled banknotes from the throwing port 111 in the short direction.
 第1搬送部7は、搬送ベルト等で構成されている。第1搬送部7は、主搬送路71と、主搬送路71から分岐する第1~第4分岐路72a~72dと、主搬送路71からの分岐箇所に設けられた振り分け機構73と、紙幣の通過を検知する複数の通過センサ74とを有している。第1搬送部7は、紙幣をその短手方向に搬送していく。 The first transport unit 7 is composed of a transport belt or the like. The first transport unit 7 includes a main transport path 71, first to fourth branch paths 72a to 72d branched from the main transport path 71, a sorting mechanism 73 provided at a branch point from the main transport path 71, and a bill And a plurality of passage sensors 74 for detecting the passage of. The 1st conveyance part 7 conveys a banknote in the transversal direction.
 主搬送路71は、取込ローラ23から第1結束スタッカ4Aまで延びている。第1分岐路72aは、主搬送路71の最も上流側に位置しており、第1分岐路72aから下流側に向かって、第2分岐路72b、第3分岐路72c、第4分岐路72dがこの順で位置している。第1~第4分岐路72a~72dのそれぞれを区別しないときには、単に分岐路72と称する。第1分岐路72aは、リジェクトスタッカ6まで延びている。第2分岐路72bは、第2非結束スタッカ5Bまで延びている。第3分岐路72cは、第1非結束スタッカ5Aまで延びている。第4分岐路72dは、第2結束スタッカ4Bまで延びている。 The main transport path 71 extends from the take-in roller 23 to the first binding stacker 4A. The first branch path 72a is located on the most upstream side of the main conveyance path 71, and from the first branch path 72a toward the downstream side, the second branch path 72b, the third branch path 72c, and the fourth branch path 72d. Are in this order. When the first to fourth branch paths 72a to 72d are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a branch path 72. The first branch path 72 a extends to the reject stacker 6. The second branch path 72b extends to the second non-bundling stacker 5B. The third branch path 72c extends to the first non-bundling stacker 5A. The fourth branch path 72d extends to the second binding stacker 4B.
 振り分け機構73は、ソレノイド(図示省略)によって駆動される。振り分け機構73は、主搬送路71を搬送された紙幣を分岐路72へ分岐させるか否かを振り分ける。各振り分け機構73の上流側には、通過センサ74が設けられている。通過センサ74は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしている。つまり、通過センサ74の受信部における光の受信が中断され、その後に光の受信が再開されたことをもって、紙幣の通過を検知することができる。振り分け機構73は、紙幣を分岐路72へ導く際には、その直上流の通過センサ74が紙幣の通過を検知したことをもって作動する。 The distribution mechanism 73 is driven by a solenoid (not shown). The sorting mechanism 73 sorts whether or not the bills transported through the main transport path 71 are branched to the branch path 72. A passage sensor 74 is provided on the upstream side of each sorting mechanism 73. The passage sensor 74 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. That is, the passage of the banknote can be detected when the reception of light in the receiving unit of the passage sensor 74 is interrupted and the light reception is resumed thereafter. The sorting mechanism 73 operates when the passage sensor 74 immediately upstream detects the passage of the bill when guiding the bill to the branch path 72.
 識別部3は、主搬送路71のうち第1分岐路72aよりも上流側に設けられている。識別部3は、搬送される紙幣の一枚一枚について、その金種、真偽及び正損を識別するように構成されている。具体的には、識別部3は、ラインセンサ31及び磁気センサ32を有し、紙幣の特徴を取得する。識別部3は、紙幣の特徴が、記憶している各種紙幣の特徴と一致するかを判定し、金種、真偽、及び正損を識別する。 The identification unit 3 is provided on the upstream side of the first branch path 72 a in the main transport path 71. The identification unit 3 is configured to identify the denomination, authenticity, and correctness of each banknote to be conveyed. Specifically, the identification part 3 has the line sensor 31 and the magnetic sensor 32, and acquires the characteristic of a banknote. The identification unit 3 determines whether the characteristics of the banknotes match the characteristics of the various banknotes stored therein, and identifies the denomination, authenticity, and correctness.
 結束部9は、集積された紙幣を結束する。詳しくは後述するが、結束部9は、テープ輪Lを作成し、該テープ輪Lの中へ紙幣が搬送された後にテープを引き戻し、紙幣をテープで結束する。 Bundle unit 9 binds stacked banknotes. As will be described in detail later, the bundling unit 9 creates a tape ring L, pulls the tape back after the banknote is conveyed into the tape ring L, and binds the banknote with the tape.
 第2搬送部8は、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣を把持して、該紙幣をテープ輪Lの中へ搬送する。第2搬送部8は、紙幣を把持する把持ユニット81と、把持ユニット81を水平方向であって且つ紙幣の短手方向(以下、「第1水平方向」という)へ移動させる第1水平移動機構と、把持ユニット81を水平方向であって且つ紙幣の長手方向(以下、「第2水平方向」という)へ移動させる第2水平移動機構と、把持ユニット81を上下方向へ移動させる上下移動機構とを有している。第2搬送部8は、結束前搬送部の一例である。 The second transport unit 8 grips the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 and transports the banknotes into the tape ring L. The second transport unit 8 includes a gripping unit 81 that grips a banknote, and a first horizontal movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the horizontal direction and the short direction of the banknote (hereinafter referred to as “first horizontal direction”). A second horizontal movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the horizontal direction and in the longitudinal direction of the banknote (hereinafter referred to as “second horizontal direction”), and a vertical movement mechanism that moves the gripping unit 81 in the vertical direction. have. The second transport unit 8 is an example of a pre-bundling transport unit.
 図3に、把持ユニット81の概略拡大図を示す。把持ユニット81は、上アーム部81aと、上アーム部81aと相対向する下アーム部81bと、上アーム部81aを上下方向へ移動させる把持機構とを有している。上アーム部81aは、互いに平行に延びる3本の指部と、3本の指部を連結する連結部とを有している。同様に、下アーム部81bは、互いに平行に延びる3本の指部と、3本の指部を連結する連結部とを有している。上アーム部81aのうち紙幣Bと接触する部分(即ち、内側の部分であり、以下、「接触部」という)81c及び下アーム部81bのうち紙幣Bと接触する部分(即ち、内側の部分であり、以下、「接触部」という)81dは、ウレタンゴムで構成されている。尚、接触部81c,81dは、ウレタンゴム以外のゴム又は樹脂で構成されていてもよい。把持機構は、上アーム部81aを上下方向に移動可能に支持すると共に、モータ及び駆動ベルトによって上アーム部81aを上下に移動させる。これにより、上アーム部81aと下アーム部81bとで紙幣を把持することができる。 FIG. 3 shows a schematic enlarged view of the gripping unit 81. The gripping unit 81 includes an upper arm portion 81a, a lower arm portion 81b opposite to the upper arm portion 81a, and a gripping mechanism that moves the upper arm portion 81a in the vertical direction. The upper arm portion 81a has three finger portions that extend in parallel to each other and a connecting portion that connects the three finger portions. Similarly, the lower arm portion 81b has three finger portions that extend in parallel to each other and a connecting portion that connects the three finger portions. Of the upper arm portion 81a, a portion that is in contact with the bill B (ie, an inner portion, hereinafter referred to as “contact portion”) 81c and a portion of the lower arm portion 81b that is in contact with the bill B (ie, an inner portion) Yes, hereinafter referred to as “contact portion”) 81d is made of urethane rubber. The contact portions 81c and 81d may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber. The gripping mechanism supports the upper arm portion 81a so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and moves the upper arm portion 81a up and down by a motor and a driving belt. Thereby, a banknote can be hold | gripped with the upper arm part 81a and the lower arm part 81b.
 第1水平移動機構は、把持ユニット81を第1水平方向に移動可能に支持しており、モータ及び駆動ベルトによって把持ユニット81を第1水平方向に移動させる。上下移動機構は、第1水平移動機構を上下方向に移動可能に支持しており、モータ及び駆動ベルトによって第1水平移動機構を上下方向に移動させる。第2水平移動機構は、上下移動機構を第2水平方向に移動可能に支持しており、モータ及び駆動ベルトによって上下移動機構を第2水平方向に移動させる。 The first horizontal movement mechanism supports the gripping unit 81 so as to be movable in the first horizontal direction, and moves the gripping unit 81 in the first horizontal direction by a motor and a driving belt. The vertical movement mechanism supports the first horizontal movement mechanism so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and moves the first horizontal movement mechanism in the vertical direction by a motor and a drive belt. The second horizontal movement mechanism supports the vertical movement mechanism so as to be movable in the second horizontal direction, and moves the vertical movement mechanism in the second horizontal direction by a motor and a drive belt.
 このように、把持ユニット81は、第1水平移動機構、第2水平移動機構及び上下移動機構によって直交する3軸に沿った方向に移動可能に構成されている。 Thus, the gripping unit 81 is configured to be movable in directions along three orthogonal axes by the first horizontal movement mechanism, the second horizontal movement mechanism, and the vertical movement mechanism.
 図4に、第3搬送部10の概略拡大図を示す。第3搬送部10は、第2搬送部8から結束紙幣を受け取って投出部11まで搬送する。第3搬送部10は、上把持部101と、下把持部102と、上把持部101及び下把持部102を第1水平方向へ移動させる水平移動機構とを有している。第3搬送部10は、結束後搬送部の一例である。 FIG. 4 shows a schematic enlarged view of the third transport unit 10. The third transport unit 10 receives the bundled banknotes from the second transport unit 8 and transports them to the dispensing unit 11. The third transport unit 10 includes an upper gripper 101, a lower gripper 102, and a horizontal movement mechanism that moves the upper gripper 101 and the lower gripper 102 in the first horizontal direction. The third transport unit 10 is an example of a post-bundling transport unit.
 上把持部101のうち紙幣Bと接触する部分(即ち、内側の部分であり、以下、「接触部」という)101a及び下把持部102のうち紙幣Bと接触する部分(即ち、内側の部分であり、以下、「接触部」という)102aは、ウレタンゴムで構成されている。尚、接触部101a,102aは、ウレタンゴム以外のゴム又は樹脂で構成されていてもよい。水平移動機構は、上把持部101を第1水平方向へ移動させる際に上把持部101を上下方向にも移動させる。詳しくは、第3搬送部10は、結束部9の側方を第1水平方向へ通過するように構成されている。第3搬送部10は、結束スタッカ4側から投出部11側へ第1水平方向に移動する途中で、第2搬送部8が支持する結束紙幣を受け取る。上把持部101は、結束スタッカ4寄りに位置するときには、下把持部102から上方へ十分に離間している。上把持部101は、この位置から投出部11側へ移動するにつれて下方へ移動し、第2搬送部8が支持する結束紙幣に到達したときには上把持部101と下把持部102とで結束紙幣を把持した状態となる。上把持部101及び下把持部102は、結束紙幣を把持した状態で結束紙幣を投出部11近傍まで搬送する。上把持部101は、投出部11の近傍において、投出部11へ近づくにつれて上方へ移動する。その結果、上把持部101と下把持部102とで把持された結束紙幣は、投出部11において上把持部101及び下把持部102による把持が解除され、投出部11へ投出される。 Of the upper gripping part 101, a part that contacts the banknote B (that is, an inner part, hereinafter referred to as “contact part”) 101a and a part of the lower gripping part 102 that contacts the banknote B (that is, an inner part). Yes, hereinafter referred to as “contact portion”) 102a is made of urethane rubber. The contact portions 101a and 102a may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber. The horizontal movement mechanism moves the upper gripper 101 in the vertical direction when moving the upper gripper 101 in the first horizontal direction. Specifically, the third transport unit 10 is configured to pass through the side of the binding unit 9 in the first horizontal direction. The third transport unit 10 receives the bound banknotes supported by the second transport unit 8 while moving in the first horizontal direction from the binding stacker 4 side to the dispensing unit 11 side. When the upper gripping portion 101 is located closer to the binding stacker 4, the upper gripping portion 101 is sufficiently separated upward from the lower gripping portion 102. The upper gripping part 101 moves downward as it moves from this position to the dispensing part 11 side, and when it reaches the bound banknote supported by the second transport part 8, the upper gripping part 101 and the lower gripping part 102 bind the bound banknote. Is in a gripped state. The upper holding unit 101 and the lower holding unit 102 convey the bundled banknotes to the vicinity of the dispensing unit 11 while holding the bundled banknotes. The upper gripping portion 101 moves upward in the vicinity of the throwing portion 11 as it approaches the throwing portion 11. As a result, the bundled banknotes gripped by the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 are released from the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 in the dispensing portion 11 and are thrown out to the dispensing portion 11.
 筐体12の第2側面124には、図1に示すように、紙幣処理装置100への情報を入力する操作部であり且つ紙幣処理装置100の情報を表示する表示部であるタッチパネル17が設けられている。タッチパネル17は、紙幣処理装置100を操作するオペレータに対するヒューマンインターフェース部分である。 As shown in FIG. 1, the second side surface 124 of the housing 12 is provided with a touch panel 17 that is an operation unit for inputting information to the banknote processing apparatus 100 and a display unit for displaying information on the banknote processing apparatus 100. It has been. The touch panel 17 is a human interface part for an operator who operates the banknote handling apparatus 100.
 〈結束スタッカ4の構成〉
 図5に、結束スタッカ4及び結束部9の概略構成図を示す。
<Configuration of unity stacker 4>
In FIG. 5, the schematic block diagram of the binding stacker 4 and the binding part 9 is shown.
 結束スタッカ4は、第1搬送部7を介して搬送されてきた紙幣Bを上下方向に積み重ねて集積する。紙幣Bは、一方の長辺を前側にして、その短手方向に搬送され、結束スタッカ4内へ入ってくる。結束スタッカ4は、紙幣Bが載置されるステージ41と、紙幣Bの搬送方向前側の長辺を揃えるためのガイド42と、紙幣Bの搬送方向後側の長辺と対向する後壁43と、結束スタッカ4の天井45と、結束スタッカ4を開放する扉46(図1参照)と、扉46の内側に設けられ、紙幣Bの一方の短辺と対向する位置決め部47(図1参照)と、集積された紙幣の短辺を揃える整列機構49(図9参照)と、搬送されてきた紙幣Bの結束スタッカ4への落下を促進する羽根車410と、結束スタッカ4内の紙幣Bの存在を検知する第1紙幣センサ411と、結束スタッカ4内の所定高さの紙幣Bを検知する第2紙幣センサ412とを有している。以下の説明では、説明の便宜上、紙幣Bのうち位置決め部47と対向する短辺を「第1辺b1」、搬送方向前側の長辺を「第2辺b2」、第1辺b1と反対側の短辺を「第3辺b3」、搬送方向後側の長辺を「第4辺b4」と称する(図9参照)。 The bundling stacker 4 stacks and stacks the bills B transported via the first transport unit 7 in the vertical direction. The bill B is transported in the short direction with one long side on the front side and enters the binding stacker 4. The bundling stacker 4 includes a stage 41 on which the bill B is placed, a guide 42 for aligning the long side on the front side in the conveyance direction of the bill B, and a rear wall 43 facing the long side on the rear side in the conveyance direction of the bill B. The ceiling 45 of the binding stacker 4, the door 46 (see FIG. 1) that opens the binding stacker 4, and the positioning portion 47 (see FIG. 1) that is provided inside the door 46 and faces one short side of the bill B. And an alignment mechanism 49 (see FIG. 9) for aligning the short sides of the stacked banknotes, an impeller 410 for promoting the falling of the conveyed banknotes B to the binding stacker 4, and the banknotes B in the binding stacker 4 It has the 1st banknote sensor 411 which detects presence, and the 2nd banknote sensor 412 which detects the banknote B of the predetermined height in the binding stacker 4. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the short side of the bill B that faces the positioning unit 47 is “first side b1”, the long side on the front side in the transport direction is “second side b2”, and the opposite side to the first side b1. The short side is referred to as “third side b3”, and the long side on the rear side in the transport direction is referred to as “fourth side b4” (see FIG. 9).
 ステージ41は、紙幣Bの重なり方向である上下方向に移動可能に構成されている。ステージ41は、紙幣Bの集積量に応じて移動する。 The stage 41 is configured to be movable in the up and down direction, which is the overlapping direction of the bills B. The stage 41 moves according to the accumulated amount of the bills B.
 ガイド42は、結束スタッカ4内に搬送されてきた紙幣Bの搬送方向への移動を停止させ、該紙幣Bをステージ41上に落下させる。ステージ41上に落下した紙幣は、第2辺b2がガイド42と対向し、第4辺b4が後壁43と対向している。 The guide 42 stops the movement of the bills B that have been transported into the bundling stacker 4 in the transport direction, and drops the bills B onto the stage 41. The banknotes dropped on the stage 41 have the second side b2 facing the guide 42 and the fourth side b4 facing the rear wall 43.
 羽根車410は、可撓性を有する複数の羽を有しており、結束スタッカ4へ搬送されてきた紙幣Bの、搬送方向後側の端部を叩いて、紙幣Bの落下を促進する役割を有している。これにより、紙幣Bが結束スタッカ4内に連続的に搬入される場合であっても、後の紙幣Bが先の紙幣Bの後端部に入り込むことを防止し、紙幣Bを1枚ずつ順に上から積み重ねていくことができる。 The impeller 410 has a plurality of flexible wings, and plays a role of accelerating the falling of the banknote B by hitting the end on the rear side in the transport direction of the banknote B transported to the bundling stacker 4. have. Thereby, even if it is a case where the banknote B is continuously carried in in the bundling stacker 4, it prevents that the subsequent banknote B enters into the rear-end part of the previous banknote B, and it makes the banknote B one by one in order. Can be stacked from above.
 第1取出口413及び扉46は、ステージ41上の紙幣Bの第1辺b1側に設けられている。扉46の内側、即ち、紙幣Bの第1辺b1と対向する部分には、位置決め部47が設けられている。 The first outlet 413 and the door 46 are provided on the first side b1 side of the bill B on the stage 41. A positioning portion 47 is provided on the inside of the door 46, that is, on the portion facing the first side b <b> 1 of the bill B.
 整列機構49は、紙幣Bの第3辺b3側に設けられている。整列機構49は、紙幣Bの第3辺b3を紙幣Bの長手方向に押して、紙幣Bの第1辺b1を位置決め部47に接触させる。こうして、位置決め部47と整列機構49とによって、紙幣Bの少なくとも第1辺b1が揃えられる。 The alignment mechanism 49 is provided on the third side b3 side of the bill B. The alignment mechanism 49 presses the third side b <b> 3 of the banknote B in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B so that the first side b <b> 1 of the banknote B contacts the positioning unit 47. Thus, at least the first side b1 of the bills B is aligned by the positioning portion 47 and the alignment mechanism 49.
 第1紙幣センサ411は、詳しくは後述するが、送信部411a、プリズム411c及び受信部411bを有し、紙幣Bの搬送方向における異なる2箇所において紙幣Bの集積方向(即ち、重なり方向)に光を送信するように配置されている。第1紙幣センサ411は、2箇所のうち少なくとも1箇所で光が遮断されることによって、紙幣Bの存在を検知する。 As will be described in detail later, the first banknote sensor 411 includes a transmission unit 411a, a prism 411c, and a reception unit 411b. Arranged to send. The first banknote sensor 411 detects the presence of the banknote B by blocking light at at least one of the two places.
 第2紙幣センサ412は、結束スタッカ4内において所定の高さに位置する紙幣Bを検知するように構成されている。第2紙幣センサ412は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしている。第2紙幣センサ412は、所定の高さ位置において、ステージ41の表面と平行で且つ紙幣Bの長手方向に光を送信するように配置されている。図5においては、説明の便宜上、第2紙幣センサ412は、紙幣Bの短手方向に光を送信するように図示されている。第2紙幣センサ412は、前記所定の高さ位置よりも高い位置に紙幣Bが存在するときには、送信部から受信部に向かう光が該紙幣Bにより遮断される一方、紙幣Bが前記所定の高さ位置よりも高い位置に存在しないときには、送信部からの光が受信部に到達するように配置されている。 The second banknote sensor 412 is configured to detect the banknote B located at a predetermined height in the binding stacker 4. The second banknote sensor 412 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. The second banknote sensor 412 is arranged to transmit light in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B in parallel with the surface of the stage 41 at a predetermined height position. In FIG. 5, for convenience of explanation, the second banknote sensor 412 is illustrated so as to transmit light in the short direction of the banknote B. When the banknote B is present at a position higher than the predetermined height position, the second banknote sensor 412 is blocked by the banknote B from the light traveling from the transmitter to the receiver, while the banknote B is at the predetermined height. When the light does not exist at a position higher than the position, the light from the transmission unit is arranged so as to reach the reception unit.
 〈非結束スタッカ5の構成〉
 非結束スタッカ5は、紙幣を積み重ねて集積する。非結束スタッカ5は、図2に示すように、紙幣を集積する容器50と、搬送されてきた紙幣を容器50内へ搬入する羽根車51と、紙幣の有無を検知する集積センサ52とを有している。
<Configuration of non-bundling stacker 5>
The non-bundling stacker 5 stacks and stacks banknotes. As shown in FIG. 2, the non-bundling stacker 5 has a container 50 for collecting banknotes, an impeller 51 for carrying the conveyed banknotes into the container 50, and an accumulation sensor 52 for detecting the presence or absence of banknotes. is doing.
 非結束スタッカ5の容器50の底部は、傾斜している。これにより、容器50へ搬入された紙幣は、底部の低い方の端部へ集まる。 The bottom of the container 50 of the non-bundling stacker 5 is inclined. Thereby, the banknotes carried into the container 50 are collected at the lower end of the bottom.
 集積センサ52は、容器50の底部の低い方の端部に設けられている。集積センサ52は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしており、光が遮断されることによって容器50内の紙幣を検知する。集積センサ52は、容器50内の紙幣により光が遮断されるように配置されている。 The integrated sensor 52 is provided at the lower end of the bottom of the container 50. The integrated sensor 52 has the same configuration as that of the banknote sensor 25, and detects banknotes in the container 50 by blocking light. The integrated sensor 52 is arranged so that light is blocked by the banknotes in the container 50.
 羽根車51は、複数の羽を有しており、搬送されてきた紙幣を羽の間で保持して、容器50内へ搬入する。紙幣は、容器50の底部近傍において羽根車51の羽から離脱し、容器50内に集積される。 The impeller 51 has a plurality of wings, holds the conveyed banknote between the wings, and carries it into the container 50. The banknotes are separated from the wings of the impeller 51 near the bottom of the container 50 and accumulated in the container 50.
 容器50は、図1に示すように、筐体12の第2側面124に開口している。すなわち、第2側面124には、非結束スタッカ5に集積された紙幣を筐体12の外部に取り出すための第2取出口53が設けられている。第2取出口53には、扉が設けられておらず、開放されている。第1非結束スタッカ5Aの第2取出口53と第2非結束スタッカ5Bの第2取出口53とは、第2側面124において水平方向に並んで開口している。 The container 50 is open to the second side surface 124 of the housing 12 as shown in FIG. That is, the second side surface 124 is provided with a second outlet 53 for taking out the banknotes accumulated in the non-binding stacker 5 to the outside of the housing 12. The second outlet 53 is not provided with a door and is open. The second outlet 53 of the first non-bundling stacker 5A and the second outlet 53 of the second non-bundling stacker 5B are opened side by side in the horizontal direction on the second side surface 124.
 また、非結束スタッカ5には、集積された紙幣を第2取出口53の方へ押し出すための押出機構54が設けられている。押出機構54は、容器50の奥側(第2取出口53と反対側)に設けられており、奥側から手前側(第2取出口53の側)に紙幣を押し出すように構成されている。 Further, the non-binding stacker 5 is provided with an extruding mechanism 54 for extruding the accumulated banknotes toward the second outlet 53. The push-out mechanism 54 is provided on the back side (the side opposite to the second outlet 53) of the container 50, and is configured to push out banknotes from the back side to the front side (the second outlet 53 side). .
 〈リジェクトスタッカ6の構成〉
 リジェクトスタッカ6は、紙幣を積み重ねて集積する。リジェクトスタッカ6は、図2に示すように、紙幣を集積する容器60と、搬送されてきた紙幣を容器60内へ搬入する羽根車61と、紙幣の有無を検知する集積センサ62と、容器60内の紙幣が外部へ排出されることを防止するストッパ64,64とを有している。
<Configuration of reject stacker 6>
The reject stacker 6 stacks and stacks banknotes. As shown in FIG. 2, the reject stacker 6 includes a container 60 that accumulates banknotes, an impeller 61 that carries the conveyed banknotes into the container 60, an accumulation sensor 62 that detects the presence or absence of banknotes, and a container 60. It has stoppers 64 and 64 for preventing the banknotes from being discharged outside.
 詳しくは、リジェクトスタッカ6の容器60は、図1に示すように、筐体12の第1側面123に開口している。すなわち、第1側面123には、リジェクトスタッカ6に集積された紙幣を筐体12の外部に取り出すためのリジェクト取出口63が設けられている。リジェクト取出口63は、第1側面123において、取込口24の上方に開口している。リジェクト取出口63には、扉が設けられておらず、開放されている。 Specifically, the container 60 of the reject stacker 6 is opened in the first side surface 123 of the housing 12 as shown in FIG. That is, the first side surface 123 is provided with a reject outlet 63 for taking out the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 to the outside of the housing 12. The reject outlet 63 opens above the inlet 24 on the first side surface 123. The reject outlet 63 is not provided with a door and is open.
 容器60の底部は、第1側面123から離れるに従って下方に位置するように傾斜している。そのため、容器60内の紙幣は、第1側面123から内側へ入り込んだ位置に集積されていく。これにより、容器60内に搬入された紙幣が、そのまま第1側面123のリジェクト取出口63から外部へ排出されることを防止することができる。 The bottom of the container 60 is inclined so as to be positioned downward as the distance from the first side surface 123 increases. Therefore, the banknotes in the container 60 are accumulated at a position where they enter from the first side surface 123 to the inside. Thereby, it can prevent that the banknote carried in in the container 60 is discharged | emitted from the rejection outlet 63 of the 1st side surface 123 as it is outside.
 さらに、2つのストッパ64,64は、容器60の底部のうち、第1側面123側の端縁に設けられている。ストッパ64は、底部の第1側面123側の端縁と平行に延びる軸回りに回動自在に支持されると共に、付勢バネ(図示省略)で付勢されて、容器60の底部に対して立ち上がった状態となっている。これらストッパ64,64によっても、容器60内の紙幣が第1側面123のリジェクト取出口63から外部へ排出されることを防止することができる。尚、リジェクトスタッカ6に集積された紙幣をリジェクト取出口63から抜き出すときには、ストッパ64,64を付勢バネの弾性力に抗して倒すことによって、紙幣を抜き出すことができる。 Furthermore, the two stoppers 64, 64 are provided at the edge of the bottom of the container 60 on the first side surface 123 side. The stopper 64 is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in parallel with the edge of the bottom portion on the first side surface 123 side, and is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so as to be against the bottom of the container 60. Standing up. These stoppers 64, 64 can also prevent the banknotes in the container 60 from being discharged from the reject outlet 63 on the first side surface 123 to the outside. Note that when the banknotes accumulated in the reject stacker 6 are extracted from the reject outlet 63, the banknotes can be extracted by depressing the stoppers 64 and 64 against the elastic force of the biasing spring.
 羽根車61は、可撓性を有する複数の羽を有しており、容器60内に落下する紙幣の、搬送方向後側の端部を叩き落とす役割を有している。紙幣が容器60内に連続的に搬入される場合であっても、後の紙幣が先の紙幣の後端部に入り込むことを防止し、紙幣を1枚ずつ順に上方に積み重ねていくことができる。 The impeller 61 has a plurality of flexible wings, and has a role of knocking down the end of the banknote falling in the container 60 on the rear side in the transport direction. Even when banknotes are continuously carried into the container 60, it is possible to prevent subsequent banknotes from entering the rear end of the previous banknote and stack the banknotes one by one in order. .
 集積センサ62は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしており、光が遮断されることによって容器60内の紙幣を検知する。集積センサ62は、容器60内の紙幣により光が遮断されるように配置されている。 The integrated sensor 62 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25, and detects the banknote in the container 60 when light is blocked. The integrated sensor 62 is arranged so that light is blocked by the banknotes in the container 60.
 〈紙幣処理装置のシステム構成〉
 図6に、紙幣処理装置100の概略構成を示すブロック図を示す。
<System configuration of banknote processing device>
In FIG. 6, the block diagram which shows schematic structure of the banknote processing apparatus 100 is shown.
 紙幣処理装置100は、例えば周知のプロセッサをベースとした制御部120及びメモリ(図示省略)を備えている。制御部120には、前述したホッパ部2、識別部3、結束スタッカ4、非結束スタッカ5、リジェクトスタッカ6、第1搬送部7、第2搬送部8、結束部9、第3搬送部10、投出部11及びタッチパネル17が、信号の送受信可能に接続されている。また、制御部120には、紙幣センサ25、第1紙幣センサ411、第2紙幣センサ412、集積センサ52、集積センサ62、通過センサ74、第1テープセンサ9210、及び第2テープセンサ9211、第1センサ117及び第2センサ118が接続され、それらの検出信号が入力されるように構成されている。制御部120は、タッチパネル17からの入力信号及び各種センサからの検知信号等に基づいて制御信号を生成し、ホッパ部2等へ該制御信号を出力する。ホッパ部2等は、その制御信号に従って動作する。例えば、結束スタッカ4を例に挙げると、ステージ41、ガイド42、後述するロック機構46c、整列機構49及び羽根車410が制御部120により制御される。メモリには、紙幣Bの種類ごとの寸法等が記憶されている。 The banknote processing apparatus 100 includes, for example, a control unit 120 and a memory (not shown) based on a known processor. The control unit 120 includes the hopper unit 2, the identification unit 3, the binding stacker 4, the non-binding stacker 5, the reject stacker 6, the first transport unit 7, the second transport unit 8, the binding unit 9, and the third transport unit 10. The projecting unit 11 and the touch panel 17 are connected so that signals can be transmitted and received. Further, the control unit 120 includes a banknote sensor 25, a first banknote sensor 411, a second banknote sensor 412, an integrated sensor 52, an integrated sensor 62, a passage sensor 74, a first tape sensor 9210, a second tape sensor 9211, and a second. The first sensor 117 and the second sensor 118 are connected and their detection signals are input. The control unit 120 generates a control signal based on an input signal from the touch panel 17 and detection signals from various sensors, and outputs the control signal to the hopper unit 2 and the like. The hopper unit 2 and the like operate according to the control signal. For example, taking the bundling stacker 4 as an example, the control unit 120 controls the stage 41, the guide 42, a lock mechanism 46 c described later, the alignment mechanism 49, and the impeller 410. In the memory, dimensions and the like for each type of banknote B are stored.
 〈紙幣処理装置の動作説明〉
 以下、紙幣処理装置100の入金処理について説明する。入金処理においては、バラ状態の紙幣が分類され、所定のスタッカに集積され、さらには、所定の紙幣については結束される。以下では、結束対象の所定の一種類の紙幣を第1及び第2結束スタッカ4A,4Bに所定枚数ずつ交互に集積し、該所定枚数集積した紙幣を順次、結束部9により結束する同一種類結束処理について説明する。
<Operation description of banknote processing device>
Hereinafter, the deposit process of the banknote handling apparatus 100 will be described. In the deposit process, the banknotes in a loose state are classified and accumulated in a predetermined stacker, and further, the predetermined banknotes are bound. In the following, a predetermined type of banknotes to be bound are stacked alternately on the first and second binding stackers 4A and 4B by a predetermined number, and the predetermined number of stacked banknotes are sequentially bound by the binding unit 9. Processing will be described.
 まず、オペレータは顧客から入金すべきバラ状態の紙幣を受け取り、該紙幣をホッパ部2へ載置する。このとき、バラ状態の紙幣に複数種類の紙幣が混在していたとしても、それらを分類することなく、ホッパ部2へ載置する。オペレータは、紙幣の寸法に合わせて、ガイド部22を調整する。続いて、オペレータは、タッチパネル17を操作して、紙幣の取込を開始する。尚、紙幣センサ25がホッパ部2への紙幣の載置を検知すると、紙幣処理装置100が自動的に紙幣の取込を開始するようにしてもよい。 First, an operator receives a bill in a rose state to be deposited from a customer, and places the bill on the hopper unit 2. At this time, even if a plurality of types of banknotes are mixed in the banknotes in a rose state, they are placed on the hopper unit 2 without being classified. An operator adjusts the guide part 22 according to the dimension of a banknote. Subsequently, the operator operates the touch panel 17 to start taking in banknotes. Note that when the bill sensor 25 detects the placement of the bill on the hopper unit 2, the bill processing apparatus 100 may automatically start taking in the bill.
 ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣は、取込ローラ23が作動することにより1枚ずつ取込口24から、筐体12内へ取り込まれていく。取り込まれた紙幣は、第1搬送部7により搬送され、識別部3を通過する。識別部3は、通過する紙幣の紙幣種別を取得し、その紙幣種別を制御部120へ通知する。 The banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2 are taken into the housing 12 from the take-in port 24 one by one when the take-in roller 23 is operated. The taken banknote is transported by the first transport unit 7 and passes through the identification unit 3. The identification unit 3 acquires the banknote type of the banknote that passes through and notifies the control unit 120 of the banknote type.
 制御部120は、紙幣の種類に応じて、紙幣に対応する搬送先を決定する。具体的には、紙幣が結束対象の所定金種の紙幣であって且つ正券紙幣であるときには、制御部120は、搬送先を結束スタッカ4(4A及び4Bの何れか一方)とする。紙幣が結束対象の所定金種の紙幣であって且つ損券紙幣であるときには、制御部120は、搬送先を第1非結束スタッカ5Aとする。紙幣が所定金種以外の金種の紙幣であるときには、制御部120は、搬送先を第2非結束スタッカ5Bとする。紙幣がリジェクト紙幣であるときには、制御部120は、搬送先をリジェクトスタッカ6とする。 Control part 120 determines the conveyance destination corresponding to a banknote according to the kind of banknote. Specifically, when the banknote is a banknote of a predetermined denomination to be bound and is a correct banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the binding stacker 4 (any one of 4A and 4B). When the banknote is a banknote of a predetermined denomination and is a banknote banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the first non-binding stacker 5A. When the banknote is a banknote of a denomination other than the predetermined denomination, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the second non-binding stacker 5B. When the banknote is a reject banknote, the control unit 120 sets the transport destination as the reject stacker 6.
 制御部120は、紙幣が搬送先となるスタッカに搬送されるように第1搬送部7を制御する。具体的には、制御部120は、搬送先となるスタッカへ繋がる分岐路72に対応する振り分け機構73を該紙幣が主搬送路71から該分岐路72へ導かれるように制御する。制御部120は、該分岐路72の直前の通過センサ74が紙幣を検知したときに、該振り分け機構73を切り替える。さらに、制御部120は、搬送先となるスタッカの羽根車410、羽根車51又は羽根車61を制御して、紙幣をスタッカ内に搬入する。 Control part 120 controls the 1st conveyance part 7 so that a bill may be conveyed to the stacker used as a conveyance place. Specifically, the control unit 120 controls the sorting mechanism 73 corresponding to the branch path 72 connected to the stacker as the transport destination so that the bill is guided from the main transport path 71 to the branch path 72. The control unit 120 switches the sorting mechanism 73 when the passage sensor 74 immediately before the branch path 72 detects a bill. Further, the control unit 120 controls the impeller 410, the impeller 51, or the impeller 61 of the stacker serving as a transport destination, and carries bills into the stacker.
 結束スタッカ4に搬送される紙幣は、2つの結束スタッカ4のうち一方の結束スタッカ4へ搬送される。一方の結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣の枚数が所定の結束枚数(例えば、100枚)に達すると、それ以降の紙幣は、他方の結束スタッカ4へ搬送される。ここでは、紙幣がまず第1結束スタッカ4Aへ搬送されるものとする。第1結束スタッカ4Aにおいては、紙幣が搬送されてくると、羽根車410の回転によって、紙幣が1枚ずつ上方に重ねられていく。第1結束スタッカ4Aに集積された紙幣が結束枚数に達すると、制御部120は、第2搬送部8を制御し、把持ユニット81により第1結束スタッカ4A内の紙幣を把持し、該紙幣を結束部9へ搬送する。その後、制御部120は、結束部9を制御して、紙幣をテープTで結束する。 The bills conveyed to the bundling stacker 4 are conveyed to one of the two bundling stackers 4. When the number of banknotes stacked on one binding stacker 4 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100), the subsequent banknotes are conveyed to the other binding stacker 4. Here, it is assumed that the banknote is first conveyed to the first binding stacker 4A. In the first binding stacker 4 </ b> A, when bills are conveyed, the bills are stacked one by one by the rotation of the impeller 410. When the banknotes accumulated in the first binding stacker 4A reach the number of bindings, the control unit 120 controls the second transport unit 8 to grip the banknotes in the first binding stacker 4A by the gripping unit 81, and to remove the banknotes. It is conveyed to the binding unit 9. Thereafter, the control unit 120 controls the binding unit 9 to bind the banknotes with the tape T.
 尚、第1結束スタッカ4Aに集積された紙幣が結束枚数に達すると、それ以降の紙幣は第2結束スタッカ4Bに集積される。その後、第2結束スタッカ4Bに集積された紙幣が結束枚数に達したときには、それ以降の紙幣は再び第1結束スタッカ4Aに集積されるようになる。このときまでには、第1結束スタッカ4A内の紙幣の搬出が完了しているので、第1結束スタッカ4A内は空の状態になっている。このように、2つの結束スタッカ4を設けることによって、紙幣の集積を連続して行いつつ、結束処理を行うことができる。 Note that when the banknotes stacked on the first binding stacker 4A reach the binding number, the subsequent banknotes are stacked on the second binding stacker 4B. Thereafter, when the banknotes stacked on the second binding stacker 4B reach the binding number, the subsequent banknotes are again stacked on the first binding stacker 4A. By this time, since the banknotes in the first binding stacker 4A have been unloaded, the first binding stacker 4A is empty. Thus, by providing the two binding stackers 4, the binding process can be performed while the banknotes are continuously collected.
 続いて、制御部120は、第3搬送部10及び投出部11を制御して、結束紙幣を投出口111から投出する。 Subsequently, the control unit 120 controls the third transport unit 10 and the dispensing unit 11 to throw out the bundled banknotes from the dispensing port 111.
 所定金種の紙幣であって且つ損券紙幣は、第1非結束スタッカ5Aへ搬送される。第1非結束スタッカ5Aにおいては、紙幣が搬送されてくると、羽根車51の回転によって、紙幣を容器50内に積み重ねていく。こうして、所定金種の紙幣であって且つ損券紙幣は、第1非結束スタッカ5Aに集積される。同様に、所定金種以外の金種の紙幣は、第2非結束スタッカ5Bへ搬送され、第2非結束スタッカ5Bに集積される。リジェクト紙幣も、リジェクトスタッカ6へ搬送され、リジェクトスタッカ6に集積される。 A banknote of a predetermined denomination and a banknote banknote is conveyed to the first non-binding stacker 5A. In the first non-binding stacker 5 </ b> A, when bills are conveyed, the bills are stacked in the container 50 by the rotation of the impeller 51. In this way, banknotes of a predetermined denomination and banknotes are stacked on the first non-binding stacker 5A. Similarly, banknotes of denominations other than the predetermined denomination are conveyed to the second non-bundling stacker 5B and accumulated in the second non-bundling stacker 5B. Reject banknotes are also transported to the reject stacker 6 and accumulated in the reject stacker 6.
 以上の処理が、ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣が無くなるまで続けられる。ホッパ部2の紙幣の有無は、紙幣センサ25によって検知される。 The above processing is continued until there are no more banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2. The presence or absence of banknotes in the hopper 2 is detected by the banknote sensor 25.
 ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣の処理が完了すると、リジェクト紙幣の取込及び識別を再度行う。つまり、オペレータは、リジェクト紙幣をリジェクトスタッカ6から抜き出して、ホッパ部2へ載置し、再び取込を行う。リジェクト紙幣は、何らかの理由で正常な紙幣として識別されなかった紙幣であるので、再び取込及び識別を試みる。それでも尚、リジェクト紙幣として識別される紙幣は、再びリジェクトスタッカ6に集積される。オペレータは、再び集積された紙幣を顧客に返却する。 When the processing of the banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2 is completed, the rejected banknotes are taken in and identified again. That is, the operator removes the reject banknote from the reject stacker 6, places it on the hopper unit 2, and takes it in again. Since the reject banknote is a banknote that has not been identified as a normal banknote for some reason, it tries to capture and identify again. Nevertheless, the banknotes identified as reject banknotes are again accumulated in the reject stacker 6. The operator returns the accumulated banknotes to the customer.
 尚、第1及び第2非結束スタッカ5A,5Bに集積された紙幣については、再度の取込を行わない。 In addition, about the banknote integrated | stacked on the 1st and 2nd non-bundling stackers 5A and 5B, it does not take in again.
 こうして、ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣の処理とリジェクト紙幣の再処理が完了すると、同一種類結束処理が完了し、顧客から渡された入金すべき紙幣の計数及び分別が終了する。タッチパネル17には、計数された金額が表示される。オペレータは、顧客からその金額の承認を得るか、又は、その金額と顧客が記載した入金伝票に記載された金額との一致を確認すると、タッチパネル17により入金額の確定操作を行う。確定操作が行われると、確定した入金額が上位装置(図示省略)へ通知され、入金処理が完了する。 Thus, when the processing of the banknotes placed on the hopper unit 2 and the reprocessing of the rejected banknotes are completed, the same-type bundling process is completed, and the counting and sorting of banknotes to be deposited passed from the customer are completed. On the touch panel 17, the counted amount is displayed. When the operator obtains the approval of the amount from the customer or confirms the coincidence between the amount and the amount described in the payment slip described by the customer, the operator confirms the amount of money with the touch panel 17. When the confirmation operation is performed, the confirmed deposit amount is notified to a higher-level device (not shown), and the deposit process is completed.
 入金処理の完了後は、オペレータは、投出口111から投出されている結束紙幣、結束スタッカ4に集積されている紙幣及び非結束スタッカ5に集積されている紙幣を取り出して所定の収納場所に収納する。 After the deposit process is completed, the operator takes out the bundled banknotes thrown out from the outlet 111, the banknotes accumulated in the bundling stacker 4, and the banknotes accumulated in the non-bundling stacker 5, and puts them in a predetermined storage location. Store.
 以上の処理により、複数種類の紙幣が混在し且つバラ状態であった紙幣は、所定金種の正券紙幣と、所定金種の損券紙幣と、所定金種以外の金種の紙幣と、リジェクト紙幣とに分類され、所定金種の正券紙幣については結束枚数ごとに結束された状態となる。 By the above processing, a banknote in which a plurality of types of banknotes are mixed and in a loose state is a banknote of a predetermined denomination, a banknote of a predetermined denomination, and a banknote of a denomination other than the predetermined denomination, The bills are classified as reject banknotes, and the correct banknotes of a predetermined denomination are in a state of being bound for each bound number.
 〈結束スタッカ4の詳細構成〉
 図7に、結束スタッカ4の一部を省略した斜視図を示す。図8に、図7とは異なる方向から見た、結束スタッカ4の一部を省略した斜視図を示す。図9に、結束スタッカ4の一部を省略した概略平面図を示す。
<Detailed Configuration of Bundling Stacker 4>
FIG. 7 shows a perspective view in which a part of the binding stacker 4 is omitted. FIG. 8 is a perspective view in which a part of the bundling stacker 4 is omitted from a direction different from that in FIG. FIG. 9 shows a schematic plan view in which a part of the binding stacker 4 is omitted.
 ステージ41は、紙幣Bの重なり方向である上下に移動可能に構成されている。具体的には、ステージ41は、上下移動部41aに連結されている。上下移動部41aは、上下に延びるシャフト(図示省略)に対して上下に移動可能に取り付けられ、モータ(図示省略)により上下に駆動される。ステージ41は、櫛歯形状をしている。ステージ41上の所定の集積位置に紙幣Bが集積される。この集積位置は、第1辺b1が位置決め部47に接触するときの紙幣Bの位置である。つまり、詳しくは後述するが、紙幣Bは、第1辺b1が位置決め部47に略接触する状態で集積される。 The stage 41 is configured to be movable up and down, which is the overlapping direction of the bills B. Specifically, the stage 41 is connected to the up / down moving part 41a. The vertical movement part 41a is attached to a vertically extending shaft (not shown) so as to be movable up and down, and is driven up and down by a motor (not shown). The stage 41 has a comb-teeth shape. The bills B are stacked at a predetermined stacking position on the stage 41. This stacking position is the position of the bill B when the first side b1 comes into contact with the positioning portion 47. That is, as will be described in detail later, the bills B are stacked in a state where the first side b1 is substantially in contact with the positioning portion 47.
 ガイド42は、紙幣Bの搬送方向に移動可能に構成されている。詳しくは、ガイド42は、上側ガイド42aと、下側ガイド42bとを有している。上側ガイド42aは、紙幣Bの搬送方向に移動する一対のフレーム42c,42cに設けられた回転シャフト42dに取り付けられている。一対のフレーム42c,42cは、搬送方向に延びる水平シャフト(図示省略)に対して移動可能に取り付けられ、モータ(図示省略)により該水平シャフトに沿って駆動される。回転シャフト42dは、一対のフレーム42c,42cに回転自在に支持されている。回転シャフト42dには、上側ガイド42aが一体的に取り付けられている。回転シャフト42dは、その軸心回りにネジリバネ42eにより付勢されている。上側ガイド42aは、回転シャフト42dと一体的に回転する。一方、下側ガイド42bは、一対のフレーム42c,42cに固定されている。下側ガイド42bは、上側ガイド42aの下方に設けられている。上側ガイド42aは、4本の櫛歯状に形成されている。同様に、下側ガイド42bは、4本の櫛歯状に形成されている。上側ガイド42aは、ネジリバネ42eにより回転シャフト42d回りに付勢されており、上側ガイド42aの先端部が下側ガイド42bの先端部に接触し、回転シャフト42dから垂れ下がった状態となっている。 The guide 42 is configured to be movable in the conveyance direction of the bills B. Specifically, the guide 42 includes an upper guide 42a and a lower guide 42b. The upper guide 42a is attached to a rotating shaft 42d provided on a pair of frames 42c and 42c that move in the conveyance direction of the bill B. The pair of frames 42c, 42c is movably attached to a horizontal shaft (not shown) extending in the transport direction, and is driven along the horizontal shaft by a motor (not shown). The rotating shaft 42d is rotatably supported by the pair of frames 42c and 42c. An upper guide 42a is integrally attached to the rotating shaft 42d. The rotary shaft 42d is biased by a torsion spring 42e around its axis. The upper guide 42a rotates integrally with the rotating shaft 42d. On the other hand, the lower guide 42b is fixed to the pair of frames 42c and 42c. The lower guide 42b is provided below the upper guide 42a. The upper guide 42a is formed in the shape of four comb teeth. Similarly, the lower guide 42b is formed in four comb teeth. The upper guide 42a is urged around the rotating shaft 42d by a torsion spring 42e, and the tip of the upper guide 42a contacts the tip of the lower guide 42b, and is hung from the rotating shaft 42d.
 上側ガイド42aが回転シャフト42dから垂れ下がった状態においては、上側ガイド42aと下側ガイド42bとで、結束スタッカ4における搬送方向前側の壁を構成する。このとき、上側ガイド42aの櫛歯と下側ガイド42bの櫛歯とによって、上下に延びる3本のスリットが形成される。このうち両端の2つのスリットは、ステージ41の2本の櫛歯が進入可能な位置に配置されている。前述の如く、上側ガイド42a及び下側ガイド42bは、フレーム42c,42cの移動に伴って紙幣Bの搬送方向の前後に移動する。このとき、ステージ41の櫛歯が上側ガイド42aの櫛歯と下側ガイド42bの櫛歯とによって形成されるスリットに進入することによって、ステージ41と上側ガイド42a及び下側ガイド42bとの干渉が回避される。また、スリットは上下に延びているので、ステージ41が上下に移動する場合であっても、ステージ41の櫛歯と上側ガイド42a及び下側ガイド42bとの干渉が回避される。 When the upper guide 42a is hung from the rotating shaft 42d, the upper guide 42a and the lower guide 42b form a wall on the front side in the transport direction of the binding stacker 4. At this time, three slits extending vertically are formed by the comb teeth of the upper guide 42a and the comb teeth of the lower guide 42b. Among these, the two slits at both ends are arranged at positions where the two comb teeth of the stage 41 can enter. As described above, the upper guide 42a and the lower guide 42b move back and forth in the conveyance direction of the bill B as the frames 42c and 42c move. At this time, when the comb teeth of the stage 41 enter a slit formed by the comb teeth of the upper guide 42a and the comb teeth of the lower guide 42b, interference between the stage 41 and the upper guide 42a and the lower guide 42b occurs. Avoided. Since the slit extends vertically, interference between the comb teeth of the stage 41 and the upper guide 42a and the lower guide 42b is avoided even when the stage 41 moves up and down.
 上側ガイド42aは、ネジリバネ42eの付勢力に抗して搬送方向前側へ回転することができ、結束スタッカ4を搬送方向前側に開口させる。 The upper guide 42a can rotate forward in the transport direction against the biasing force of the torsion spring 42e, and opens the binding stacker 4 to the front in the transport direction.
 後壁43は、結束スタッカ4において固定的に配設されている。図8に示すように、後壁43の上端部には、複数の第2係止溝44,44,…が形成されている。第2係止溝44は、ステージ41上に集積される紙幣Bの第4辺b4に沿って延びている。すなわち、第2係止溝44は、ステージ41の表面41bと平行に延びている。複数の第2係止溝44,44,…は、紙幣Bの重なり方向、即ち、上下方向に配列されている。詳しくは後述するが、第2係止溝44は、結束スタッカ4に搬入された紙幣Bがステージ41上に落下する際に、紙幣Bがステージ41上の紙幣束と後壁43との間の隙間(ステージ41上に紙幣束が形成されていない場合には、ステージ41と後壁43との間の隙間)に入り込まないようにするための部分である。 The rear wall 43 is fixedly arranged in the binding stacker 4. As shown in FIG. 8, a plurality of second locking grooves 44, 44,... Are formed at the upper end portion of the rear wall 43. The second locking groove 44 extends along the fourth side b <b> 4 of the banknote B stacked on the stage 41. That is, the second locking groove 44 extends in parallel with the surface 41 b of the stage 41. The plurality of second locking grooves 44, 44,... Are arranged in the overlapping direction of the banknotes B, that is, in the vertical direction. As will be described in detail later, the second locking groove 44 is formed between the banknote bundle on the stage 41 and the rear wall 43 when the banknote B carried into the binding stacker 4 falls on the stage 41. This is a portion for preventing entry into a gap (a gap between the stage 41 and the rear wall 43 when no banknote bundle is formed on the stage 41).
 結束スタッカ4において紙幣Bの搬送方向及び紙幣Bの集積方向の両方に直交する方向(以下、「幅方向」という)の端部には、概ね方形のフレーム46aが設けられている。フレーム46aには、概ね方形の第1取出口413が形成されている。 In the binding stacker 4, a substantially rectangular frame 46 a is provided at an end portion in a direction (hereinafter referred to as “width direction”) orthogonal to both the conveyance direction of the bills B and the stacking direction of the bills B. A substantially square first outlet 413 is formed in the frame 46a.
 扉46は、フレーム46aの一辺に設けられた回転軸回りに回転自在に取り付けられている。扉46は、第1取出口413を開放する開状態と第1取出口413を閉鎖する閉状態との間で回転する。扉46は、回転軸に設けられたコイルバネ(図示省略)によって、開状態となる方向に付勢されている。扉46は、外部から内部を目視可能な材料で構成されている。例えば、扉46は、透明又は半透明な材料(例えば、ガラスや樹脂)で構成されている。 The door 46 is attached so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis provided on one side of the frame 46a. The door 46 rotates between an open state in which the first outlet 413 is opened and a closed state in which the first outlet 413 is closed. The door 46 is urged in a direction of opening by a coil spring (not shown) provided on the rotating shaft. The door 46 is made of a material that allows the inside to be visually observed from the outside. For example, the door 46 is made of a transparent or translucent material (for example, glass or resin).
 また、扉46には、図9に示すように、ロック機構46cが設けられている。ロック機構46cは、扉46を閉状態に拘束する拘束状態と、扉46を開閉自在にする解除状態との間で切換可能に構成されている。具体的には、ロック機構46cは、フレーム46aに設けられたピン46dと、ピン46dを駆動するソレノイド等を含む駆動機構46eと、扉46に設けられ、ピン46dが係合する被係合部46fとを有している。ロック機構46cは、制御部120により、結束スタッカ4ごとに個別に制御される。つまり、扉46は、個別に開閉可能となる。 The door 46 is provided with a lock mechanism 46c as shown in FIG. The lock mechanism 46c is configured to be switchable between a constrained state in which the door 46 is constrained to a closed state and a release state in which the door 46 can be freely opened and closed. Specifically, the lock mechanism 46c includes a pin 46d provided on the frame 46a, a drive mechanism 46e including a solenoid or the like for driving the pin 46d, and an engaged portion provided on the door 46 and engaged with the pin 46d. 46f. The lock mechanism 46 c is individually controlled by the control unit 120 for each binding stacker 4. That is, the door 46 can be opened and closed individually.
 扉46の内側には、位置決め部47が設けられている。位置決め部47は、紙幣Bの第1辺b1と接触することによって、第1辺b1を所定の位置決め位置Pに位置決めする。位置決め部47は、外部から内部を目視可能な材料で構成されている。例えば、位置決め部47は、透明又は半透明な材料(例えば、ガラスや樹脂)で構成されている。詳しくは後述するが、位置決め部47には、複数の種類があり、図7~9では、第2位置決め部47Bが取り付けられた状態が図示されている。尚、位置決め部47の種類を区別しないときには、単に「位置決め部47」と称する。 A positioning portion 47 is provided inside the door 46. The positioning part 47 positions the first side b1 at a predetermined positioning position P by contacting the first side b1 of the bill B. The positioning portion 47 is made of a material that allows the inside to be visually observed from the outside. For example, the positioning portion 47 is made of a transparent or translucent material (for example, glass or resin). As will be described in detail later, there are a plurality of types of positioning portions 47, and FIGS. 7 to 9 show a state where the second positioning portion 47B is attached. In addition, when not distinguishing the kind of the positioning part 47, it only calls the "positioning part 47".
 位置決め部47の一部には、図7,8に示すように、複数の第1係止溝48,48,…が形成されている。第1係止溝48は、ステージ41上に集積される紙幣Bの第1辺b1に沿って延びている。すなわち、第1係止溝48は、ステージ41の表面41bと平行に延びている。複数の第1係止溝48,48,…は、紙幣Bの重なり方向、即ち、上下方向に配列されている。第1係止溝48,48,…は、位置決め部47のうち比較的上側の部分に形成されている。詳しくは後述するが、第1係止溝48は、紙幣Bが位置決め部47に寄りかかって集積された際に、ステージ41を移動させることによって紙幣Bの第1辺b1を引っ掛けさせる係止部として機能する。 A plurality of first locking grooves 48, 48,... Are formed in a part of the positioning portion 47 as shown in FIGS. The first locking groove 48 extends along the first side b <b> 1 of the bills B stacked on the stage 41. That is, the first locking groove 48 extends in parallel with the surface 41 b of the stage 41. The plurality of first locking grooves 48, 48,... Are arranged in the overlapping direction of the banknotes B, that is, in the vertical direction. The first locking grooves 48, 48,... Are formed in a relatively upper part of the positioning portion 47. As will be described in detail later, the first locking groove 48 is a locking portion for hooking the first side b1 of the bill B by moving the stage 41 when the bill B leans against the positioning portion 47 and is accumulated. Function as.
 整列機構49は、図9に示すように、結束スタッカ4において、扉46とは反対側に設けられている。つまり、整列機構49は、結束スタッカ4内の紙幣Bのうち第3辺b3と対向する位置に設けられている。整列機構49は、幅方向の紙幣の端部を揃える。本実施形態では、紙幣が短手方向に搬送されるので、幅方向は紙幣の長手方向に相当する。すなわち、整列機構49は、紙幣の短辺を揃える。整列機構49は、紙幣Bの集積方向に延びる回転軸回りに回転自在に設けられたアーム49aと、アーム49aを回転させるステッピングモータ49bとを有している。整列機構49は、紙幣Bの第3辺b3を扉46に向けてアーム49aにより押圧することによって紙幣Bの第1辺b1を位置決め部47に接触させる。つまり、整列機構49は、扉46と協働して、紙幣Bの両短辺を揃える。こうすることによって、結束スタッカ4内の紙幣Bは、位置決め部47に接触した状態に整列させられる。整列機構49は、押し当て部の一例である。 The alignment mechanism 49 is provided on the side opposite to the door 46 in the binding stacker 4 as shown in FIG. That is, the alignment mechanism 49 is provided at a position facing the third side b <b> 3 of the banknotes B in the binding stacker 4. The alignment mechanism 49 aligns the edges of the banknotes in the width direction. In this embodiment, since a banknote is conveyed in a transversal direction, the width direction is equivalent to the longitudinal direction of a banknote. That is, the alignment mechanism 49 aligns the short sides of the banknotes. The alignment mechanism 49 includes an arm 49a that is rotatably provided around a rotation axis that extends in the stacking direction of the bills B, and a stepping motor 49b that rotates the arm 49a. The alignment mechanism 49 brings the first side b1 of the bill B into contact with the positioning portion 47 by pressing the third side b3 of the bill B toward the door 46 by the arm 49a. That is, the alignment mechanism 49 aligns both short sides of the bills B in cooperation with the door 46. By doing so, the banknotes B in the bundling stacker 4 are aligned in a state of being in contact with the positioning portion 47. The alignment mechanism 49 is an example of a pressing unit.
 アーム49aは、紙幣Bを位置決め部47の方へ押し動かした後は、紙幣Bを移動させた後の場所(即ち、アーム49aと位置決め部47との距離が、紙幣Bの長手方向寸法と略一致する位置)に留まり、紙幣Bの、長手方向における整列機構49の方への移動を規制する規制部として機能する。 After the arm 49a pushes and moves the bill B toward the positioning portion 47, the position after the bill B is moved (that is, the distance between the arm 49a and the positioning portion 47 is substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the bill B). It functions as a restricting portion that restricts movement of the bill B toward the alignment mechanism 49 in the longitudinal direction.
 整列機構49は、アーム49aの移動量を調整可能に構成されており、紙幣Bの種類及び位置決め部47の種類に応じてアーム49aの移動量を調整する。具体的には、アーム49aと位置決め部47との距離が集積対象となる紙幣Bの長手方向寸法と略一致する位置までアーム49aが回転するように、アーム49aの移動量が調整される。こうして、紙幣Bの第3辺b3を押すときの整列機構49の移動量は、紙幣Bの長手方向寸法及び位置決め部47の位置決め位置Pに応じて調整される。 Alignment mechanism 49 is configured to be able to adjust the amount of movement of arm 49a, and adjusts the amount of movement of arm 49a according to the type of bill B and the type of positioning portion 47. Specifically, the movement amount of the arm 49a is adjusted such that the arm 49a rotates to a position where the distance between the arm 49a and the positioning portion 47 substantially matches the longitudinal dimension of the bill B to be stacked. Thus, the movement amount of the alignment mechanism 49 when the third side b3 of the banknote B is pressed is adjusted according to the longitudinal dimension of the banknote B and the positioning position P of the positioning portion 47.
 また、ステージ41には、図8に示すように、第1紙幣センサ411が送受信する光が通過する第1孔41c及び第2孔41dが貫通形成されている。詳しくは、結束スタッカ4には、2つの第1紙幣センサ411が設けられている。2つの第1紙幣センサ411は、紙幣Bの長手方向に並んで配置されている。そのため、ステージ41には、第1孔41c及び第2孔41dが2組形成されている。各第1紙幣センサ411は、図5に示すように、光を送信する送信部411aと、光を受信する受信部411bと、送信部411aからの光を受信部411bの方へ案内するプリズム411cとを有する。送信部411a及び受信部411bは、天井45において紙幣Bの搬送方向に並んで配置されている。送信部411aは、光を下向きに送信するように配置され、受信部411bは、下からの光を受信するように配置されている。プリズム411cは、結束スタッカ4の底に配置されている。プリズム411cは、入射部411dと、出射部411eと、2つの反射面とを有し、略U字状に形成されている。入射部411dは、送信部411aと対向し、出射部411eは、受信部411bと対向している。すなわち、入射部411d及び出射部411eは、紙幣の搬送方向に並び且つ上向きに配置されている。入射部411dから入射した光は、2つの反射面で反射され、出射部411eから上向きに出射される。ステージ41には、送信部411aから入射部411dへ向かう光は、ステージ41の第1孔41cを通過し、出射部411eから受信部411bへ向かう光は、ステージ41の第2孔41dを通過する。尚、ステージ41が最も低い位置まで下降したときには、入射部411dが第1孔41cに挿通され、出射部411eが第2孔41dに挿通される。 Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the stage 41 is formed with a first hole 41c and a second hole 41d through which light transmitted and received by the first banknote sensor 411 passes. Specifically, the binding stacker 4 is provided with two first banknote sensors 411. The two first banknote sensors 411 are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B. For this reason, the stage 41 is formed with two sets of first holes 41c and second holes 41d. As shown in FIG. 5, each first banknote sensor 411 includes a transmission unit 411a that transmits light, a reception unit 411b that receives light, and a prism 411c that guides light from the transmission unit 411a toward the reception unit 411b. And have. The transmission unit 411a and the reception unit 411b are arranged side by side in the conveyance direction of the bills B on the ceiling 45. The transmission unit 411a is arranged to transmit light downward, and the reception unit 411b is arranged to receive light from below. The prism 411c is disposed on the bottom of the bundling stacker 4. The prism 411c has an incident portion 411d, an emission portion 411e, and two reflecting surfaces, and is formed in a substantially U shape. The incident portion 411d faces the transmission portion 411a, and the emission portion 411e faces the reception portion 411b. That is, the incident part 411d and the emission part 411e are arranged in the banknote transport direction and upward. The light incident from the incident portion 411d is reflected by the two reflecting surfaces and emitted upward from the emitting portion 411e. In the stage 41, light traveling from the transmitting unit 411a toward the incident unit 411d passes through the first hole 41c of the stage 41, and light traveling from the emitting unit 411e toward the receiving unit 411b passes through the second hole 41d of the stage 41. . When the stage 41 is lowered to the lowest position, the incident portion 411d is inserted through the first hole 41c, and the emission portion 411e is inserted through the second hole 41d.
 このような構成においては、送信部411aから入射部411dへ向かう光及び出射部411eから受信部411bへ向かう光の進行方向とステージ41の移動方向とが上下方向で一致するので、ステージ41が上下方向に移動しても、送信部411aから送信された光は、第1孔41cを通過して入射部411dへ入射し、出射部411eから出射された光は、第2孔41dを通過して受信部411bへ入射する。つまり、ステージ41が上下動しても、送信部411aから受信部411bへの光路が確保される。 In such a configuration, the traveling direction of the light traveling from the transmitting unit 411a to the incident unit 411d and the light traveling from the emitting unit 411e to the receiving unit 411b coincides with the moving direction of the stage 41. Even if it moves in the direction, the light transmitted from the transmitting unit 411a passes through the first hole 41c and enters the incident unit 411d, and the light emitted from the emitting unit 411e passes through the second hole 41d. The light enters the receiver 411b. That is, even if the stage 41 moves up and down, an optical path from the transmission unit 411a to the reception unit 411b is secured.
 ただし、ステージ41上に紙幣Bが存在する場合には、送信部411aから受信部411bへ向かう光が遮断される。このことによって、結束スタッカ4内に紙幣Bが存在することが検出される。このとき、紙幣Bの搬送方向において異なる2箇所を光が通過している。また、紙幣Bの長手方向に2つの第1紙幣センサ411が並設されている。そのため、紙幣Bの長手方向及び短手方向の異なる位置において4本の光が通過している。これにより、紙幣Bの位置にばらつきがあったとしても、何れかの光が遮断され、紙幣Bの存在を精度よく検知することができる。それに加えて、ステージ41が上下動しても送信部411a、受信部411b及びプリズム411cの位置は固定されているので、第1紙幣センサ411の光軸が変動せず、紙幣Bの有無を正確に検知することができる。 However, when the banknote B exists on the stage 41, the light which goes to the receiving part 411b from the transmission part 411a is interrupted | blocked. By this, it is detected that the banknote B exists in the binding stacker 4. At this time, light passes through two different locations in the bill B conveyance direction. Two first banknote sensors 411 are arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B. For this reason, four lights pass at different positions in the longitudinal direction and the short direction of the bill B. Thereby, even if there is variation in the position of the banknote B, any light is blocked and the presence of the banknote B can be detected with high accuracy. In addition, even if the stage 41 moves up and down, the positions of the transmitting unit 411a, the receiving unit 411b, and the prism 411c are fixed, so that the optical axis of the first banknote sensor 411 does not fluctuate and the presence or absence of the banknote B is accurately determined. Can be detected.
 続いて、制御部120による結束スタッカ4の制御について説明する。 Subsequently, control of the binding stacker 4 by the control unit 120 will be described.
 まず、制御部120は、紙幣Bが結束スタッカ4に搬送されてくる前に、ステージ41を初期位置に移動させる。ステージ41の初期位置は、比較的上方であって、羽根車410に接近した位置である。これにより、結束スタッカ4内に落下する紙幣Bの落下距離を比較的短くすることができ、紙幣Bの落下位置を安定させることができる。ただし、ステージ41の初期位置は、第2紙幣センサ412の高さよりも低い位置である。 First, the control unit 120 moves the stage 41 to the initial position before the banknote B is conveyed to the bundling stacker 4. The initial position of the stage 41 is a position relatively above and close to the impeller 410. Thereby, the fall distance of the banknote B falling in the binding stacker 4 can be made comparatively short, and the fall position of the banknote B can be stabilized. However, the initial position of the stage 41 is a position lower than the height of the second banknote sensor 412.
 また、制御部120は、結束スタッカ4に搬送されてくる紙幣Bの種類に応じた位置にガイド42を移動させる。紙幣Bは、その短手方向が搬送方向と一致する姿勢で搬送されてくるため、ガイド42の位置は紙幣Bの短手方向寸法に応じて調整される。具体的には、ガイド42と後壁43との間隔が、結束スタッカ4に搬入される紙幣Bの短手方向寸法よりも僅かに大きくなる位置にガイド42が配置される。 Further, the control unit 120 moves the guide 42 to a position corresponding to the type of the bill B conveyed to the binding stacker 4. Since the bill B is transported in a posture in which the short side direction coincides with the transport direction, the position of the guide 42 is adjusted according to the short direction dimension of the bill B. Specifically, the guide 42 is disposed at a position where the distance between the guide 42 and the rear wall 43 is slightly larger than the short dimension of the bills B carried into the bundling stacker 4.
 この状態を初期状態として、紙幣Bが結束スタッカ4に搬送されてくる。結束スタッカ4内に搬入された紙幣Bは搬送方向への運動量をもっているので、紙幣Bの搬送方向前側の第2辺b2がガイド42に当たり、そのままステージ41上に落下する。 The banknote B is conveyed to the binding stacker 4 with this state as an initial state. Since the bill B carried into the binding stacker 4 has a momentum in the transport direction, the second side b2 on the front side in the transport direction of the bill B hits the guide 42 and falls onto the stage 41 as it is.
 このとき、羽根車410により、紙幣Bの落下が促進される。詳しくは、結束スタッカ4に搬入される紙幣Bの搬送方向の後端部が羽根車410により下方に叩かれる。これにより、落下していく紙幣Bは、後端部の方が先端部よりも低い状態となる傾向にある。それに加え、羽根車410により後端部を叩かれる際に、紙幣Bは羽根車410の方へ、即ち、搬送方向後側へ引き込まれる場合もある。その結果、紙幣Bの後端部が、ステージ41上の紙幣束と後壁43との間の隙間(ステージ41上に紙幣束が形成されていない場合には、ステージ41と後壁43との間の隙間)に入り込む虞がある。それに対し、後壁43の上端部には、第2係止溝44,44,…が設けられている。紙幣束と後壁43との間の隙間に入り込もうとする紙幣Bの第4辺b4は、第2係止溝44に引っ掛かり、該隙間への進入が抑制される。こうして、結束スタッカ4へ搬入される紙幣Bは、ステージ41上へ適切に落下していく。 At this time, the drop of the bill B is promoted by the impeller 410. Specifically, the rear end portion in the transport direction of the bills B carried into the bundling stacker 4 is hit downward by the impeller 410. Thereby, the falling bill B tends to be in a state where the rear end portion is lower than the front end portion. In addition, when the rear end is hit by the impeller 410, the bill B may be drawn toward the impeller 410, that is, to the rear side in the transport direction. As a result, the rear end of the bill B is a gap between the bill bundle on the stage 41 and the rear wall 43 (if no bill bundle is formed on the stage 41, the stage 41 and the rear wall 43 There is a risk of entering the gap. On the other hand, second locking grooves 44, 44,... Are provided at the upper end portion of the rear wall 43. The fourth side b4 of the bill B that is about to enter the gap between the bill bundle and the rear wall 43 is caught by the second locking groove 44, and the entry into the gap is suppressed. In this way, the bill B carried into the bundling stacker 4 appropriately falls onto the stage 41.
 ステージ41上においては、紙幣Bの第2辺b2は、ガイド42に略接触した状態となっている。また、紙幣Bの第4辺b4は、後壁43との間に微小な隙間を有する状態で該後壁43と対向している。ステージ41上に落下したときの状態によっては、紙幣Bの第4辺b4は、後壁43と接触している場合もある。 On the stage 41, the second side b2 of the bill B is substantially in contact with the guide 42. Further, the fourth side b <b> 4 of the banknote B faces the rear wall 43 with a minute gap between the fourth side b <b> 4 and the rear wall 43. Depending on the state when falling on the stage 41, the fourth side b4 of the bill B may be in contact with the rear wall 43.
 制御部120は、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣が所定枚数(例えば10枚)増えるごとにステージ41を該所定枚数の厚みに相当する量だけ下降させる。これを繰り返すことによって、ステージ41上の最も上の紙幣(以下、「最上紙幣」という)Bの高さ位置(ステージ41上に紙幣Bが存在しない場合にはステージ41の高さ位置)を所定の範囲に収めることができる。これにより、結束スタッカ4内に落下する紙幣の落下距離を概ね一定の範囲に保つことができるので、自然落下する紙幣の落下位置及び落下したときの姿勢を略一定にすることができる。 The control unit 120 lowers the stage 41 by an amount corresponding to the thickness of the predetermined number of sheets each time the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 increase by a predetermined number (for example, ten sheets). By repeating this, the height position of the top banknote (hereinafter referred to as “the top banknote”) B on the stage 41 (the height position of the stage 41 when the banknote B does not exist on the stage 41) is predetermined. Can fall within the range. Thereby, since the fall distance of the banknote which falls in the binding stacker 4 can be kept in a substantially constant range, the falling position of the banknote that falls naturally and the posture when dropped can be made substantially constant.
 ただし、最上紙幣Bの高さは、第2紙幣センサ412によって監視されている。制御部120は、紙幣Bが結束スタッカ4に搬入されるごとに第2紙幣センサ412が紙幣Bを検知しているか否かを判定する。通常は、第2紙幣センサ412は、紙幣Bを検知していない。しかし、第2紙幣センサ412が紙幣Bを検知した場合には、制御部120は、ステージ41を所定量だけ下降させる。このときの下降量は、前述の所定枚数の紙幣Bの厚みに相当する量か、それよりも少しだけ多い量である。これにより、第2紙幣センサ412が紙幣を検知していない状態となる。つまり、制御部120は、集積枚数が所定枚数増えるごとにステージ41を下降させる制御を基本としつつ、最上紙幣Bが第2紙幣センサ412に検知される高さを超えたときにはステージ41を基本の制御とは別に下降させる。紙幣Bの状態によっては、同じ枚数の紙幣束であってもその厚みが異なるので、紙幣Bの枚数に応じたステージ41の制御と、最上紙幣Bの高さの監視によるステージ41の制御とを併用することによって、結束スタッカ4内に落下する紙幣の落下距離を略一定の範囲に保つことができる。 However, the height of the top banknote B is monitored by the second banknote sensor 412. The control unit 120 determines whether or not the second banknote sensor 412 detects the banknote B every time the banknote B is carried into the binding stacker 4. Normally, the second banknote sensor 412 does not detect the banknote B. However, when the second banknote sensor 412 detects the banknote B, the control unit 120 lowers the stage 41 by a predetermined amount. The descending amount at this time is an amount corresponding to the thickness of the predetermined number of banknotes B or an amount slightly larger than that. Thereby, the 2nd banknote sensor 412 will be in the state which is not detecting a banknote. That is, the control unit 120 basically controls the stage 41 to be lowered every time the number of stacked sheets increases by a predetermined number, while the stage 41 is basically set when the uppermost banknote B exceeds the height detected by the second banknote sensor 412. Lower separately from control. Depending on the state of the banknote B, even the same number of banknote bundles have different thicknesses. Therefore, the control of the stage 41 according to the number of banknotes B and the control of the stage 41 by monitoring the height of the uppermost banknote B are performed. By using together, the fall distance of the banknote which falls in the binding stacker 4 can be maintained in a substantially constant range.
 また、制御部120は、結束スタッカ4に紙幣Bが1枚搬入されるごとに、整列機構49のアーム49aを作動させる。これにより、紙幣Bは、その長手方向において扉46の位置決め部47の方へ押圧され、紙幣Bの第1辺b1が扉46の位置決め部47に接触するようになる。こうして、集積された紙幣Bの両短辺が揃えられる。 The control unit 120 operates the arm 49a of the alignment mechanism 49 every time one bill B is carried into the binding stacker 4. Thereby, the banknote B is pressed toward the positioning part 47 of the door 46 in the longitudinal direction, and the first side b1 of the banknote B comes into contact with the positioning part 47 of the door 46. In this way, both short sides of the accumulated bills B are aligned.
 結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣Bの枚数が所定枚数に達すると、制御部120は、ステージ41を上昇させ、集積された紙幣Bをステージ41と天井45とで所定の厚みとなるように圧縮する。尚、紙幣Bが新札である場合など、ステージ41上に自由落下して集積された紙幣Bの厚みが該所定の厚みに達していない場合には、ステージ41が上昇しても、紙幣Bは圧縮されない。 When the number of banknotes B stacked on the binding stacker 4 reaches a predetermined number, the control unit 120 raises the stage 41 and compresses the stacked banknotes B to have a predetermined thickness between the stage 41 and the ceiling 45. To do. If the thickness of the banknote B that is freely dropped and accumulated on the stage 41 does not reach the predetermined thickness, such as when the banknote B is a new bill, the banknote B Is not compressed.
 その後、制御部120は、第2搬送部8の把持ユニット81に紙幣Bを把持させる。把持ユニット81は、ガイド42の櫛歯間の隙間及びステージ41の櫛歯間の隙間に挿通可能な形状をしているので、ステージ41上の紙幣Bをガイド42及びステージ41に干渉することなく把持することができる。第2搬送部8は、把持ユニット81が紙幣Bを把持した状態で紙幣Bを搬送方向前側へ引き出す。ここで、ガイド42の上側ガイド42aは、ネジリバネ42eの付勢力により結束スタッカ4を閉じる方向(先端部が下側ガイド42bの先端部と接触する方向)に付勢されている。それに対し、把持ユニット81に引き出される紙幣Bがネジリバネ42eの付勢力に抗して上側ガイド42aを押し動かし、搬送方向前側に回転させる。これにより、結束スタッカ4が搬送方向前側へ開口し、紙幣Bが結束スタッカ4から抜き出される。第2搬送部8は、紙幣Bを結束部9へ搬送する。その後、結束処理が行われる。 Thereafter, the control unit 120 causes the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 to grip the bill B. Since the gripping unit 81 has a shape that can be inserted into the gap between the comb teeth of the guide 42 and the gap between the comb teeth of the stage 41, the banknote B on the stage 41 does not interfere with the guide 42 and the stage 41. It can be gripped. The 2nd conveyance part 8 draws out bill B to the conveyance direction front side in the state where grasping unit 81 grasped bill B. Here, the upper guide 42a of the guide 42 is urged in the direction of closing the bundling stacker 4 by the urging force of the torsion spring 42e (the direction in which the tip portion contacts the tip portion of the lower guide 42b). On the other hand, the bill B drawn out to the gripping unit 81 pushes and moves the upper guide 42a against the biasing force of the torsion spring 42e and rotates it forward in the transport direction. Thereby, the binding stacker 4 opens to the front side in the transport direction, and the bill B is extracted from the binding stacker 4. The second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B to the binding unit 9. Thereafter, a bundling process is performed.
 ここで、結束スタッカ4に紙幣Bを集積させる際に、紙幣Bが位置決め部47に寄りかかった状態となる場合がある。例えば、紙幣Bがステージ41上に自然落下する際に紙幣Bが位置決め部47に寄りかかる場合がある。あるいは、紙幣Bがアーム49aにより長手方向に移動させられる際に紙幣Bがばたつき、その拍子で紙幣Bの一端部が位置決め部47に寄りかかった状態となる場合がある。制御部120は、紙幣Bの位置決め部47への寄りかかりを監視し、紙幣Bの寄りかかりが生じた場合には紙幣Bの寄りかかりを解消させる制御を行う。 Here, when the banknotes B are stacked on the bundling stacker 4, the banknotes B may lean against the positioning portion 47. For example, the bill B may lean against the positioning unit 47 when the bill B naturally falls on the stage 41. Alternatively, when the bill B is moved in the longitudinal direction by the arm 49a, the bill B may flutter, and one end portion of the bill B may lean against the positioning portion 47 by the time signature. The control unit 120 monitors the leaning of the banknote B to the positioning unit 47, and performs control to cancel the leaning of the banknote B when the banknote B leans.
 制御部120は、第2紙幣センサ412によって紙幣Bの位置決め部47への寄りかかりを検出する。第2紙幣センサ412は、ステージ41上の最上紙幣Bを検知するように配置されているので、一端部が位置決め部47に寄りかかって反り上がった状態となった紙幣Bも検出することができる。第2紙幣センサ412が紙幣Bを検出すると、前述の如く、制御部120は、ステージ41を所定量だけ下降させることによって最上紙幣Bの高さ位置を調整する。ステージ41が下降しても、第2紙幣センサ412による紙幣Bの検出が継続している場合には、紙幣Bが位置決め部47に寄りかかっていると判定される。 The control unit 120 detects the leaning of the bill B on the positioning unit 47 by the second bill sensor 412. Since the 2nd banknote sensor 412 is arrange | positioned so that the uppermost banknote B on the stage 41 may be detected, it can also detect the banknote B from which the one end part leaned against the positioning part 47, and was in the state where it curved up. . When the second banknote sensor 412 detects the banknote B, as described above, the control unit 120 adjusts the height position of the uppermost banknote B by lowering the stage 41 by a predetermined amount. Even when the stage 41 is lowered, when the bill B is continuously detected by the second bill sensor 412, it is determined that the bill B is leaning against the positioning unit 47.
 紙幣Bの位置決め部47への寄りかかりが検出されると、制御部120は、ホッパ部2の紙幣Bの取り込みを中断し、復旧動作としてステージ41を上下に往復移動させる。本実施形態では、制御部120は、まずステージ41を下方へ移動させた後、上方へ移動させる。これにより、位置決め部47に寄りかかった紙幣Bの第1辺b1は、何れかの第1係止溝48に引っ掛かる。制御部120は、紙幣Bの第1辺b1が第1係止溝48に引っ掛かった後もステージ41の上方への移動を継続させる。その結果、紙幣Bは、第1係止溝48からの反力を受けて、紙幣束の中へ、即ち、ステージ41上の所定の集積位置の方へ押し込まれる。紙幣Bが紙幣束の中へ十分に押し込まれる前に、紙幣Bと第1係止溝48との係止がはずれてしまう場合もあり得るが、第1係止溝48は複数設けられているので、紙幣Bの第1辺b1は、隣の第1係止溝48に引っ掛かる。こうして、紙幣Bの押し込みが複数の第1係止溝48,48,…において行われることによって、紙幣Bは、紙幣束の中へ徐々に押し込まれていく。 When the leaning of the bill B to the positioning unit 47 is detected, the control unit 120 interrupts the taking of the bill B of the hopper unit 2 and reciprocates the stage 41 up and down as a recovery operation. In the present embodiment, the control unit 120 first moves the stage 41 downward and then moves it upward. As a result, the first side b1 of the banknote B leaning against the positioning portion 47 is caught in any of the first locking grooves 48. The control unit 120 continues the upward movement of the stage 41 even after the first side b1 of the banknote B is caught in the first locking groove 48. As a result, the bill B receives the reaction force from the first locking groove 48 and is pushed into the bill bundle, that is, toward a predetermined stacking position on the stage 41. There may be a case where the banknote B and the first locking groove 48 are released before the banknote B is sufficiently pushed into the banknote bundle, but a plurality of the first locking grooves 48 are provided. Therefore, the first side b1 of the bill B is caught in the adjacent first locking groove 48. Thus, the bill B is gradually pushed into the bill bundle by pushing the bill B in the first locking grooves 48, 48,.
 ただし、第1係止溝48の個数は有限であるため、ステージ41が或る程度の高さまで上昇すると、制御部120は、ステージ41を下降させる。その後、制御部120は、ステージ41を再び上昇させ、下方の第1係止溝48から前述の紙幣Bの押し込みを再開する。こうしてステージ41を往復移動させ、ステージ41の上方への移動を複数行うことによって、1回のステージ41の上昇では紙幣Bを集積位置へ十分に押し込めない場合であっても、複数回のステージ41の上昇によって紙幣Bを集積位置まで押し込むことができる。 However, since the number of the first locking grooves 48 is limited, when the stage 41 is raised to a certain height, the control unit 120 lowers the stage 41. Thereafter, the control unit 120 raises the stage 41 again and restarts the pushing of the bill B from the first locking groove 48 below. Thus, by moving the stage 41 back and forth and performing a plurality of upward movements of the stage 41, even if the banknote B cannot be sufficiently pushed into the stacking position by raising the stage 41 once, the stage 41 is moved a plurality of times. The banknote B can be pushed to the stacking position by ascending.
 ステージ41の上下動が複数回行われた後に第2紙幣センサ412による紙幣Bの検出が解消された場合には、制御部120は、紙幣Bの位置決め部47への寄りかかりが復旧したと判定し、紙幣Bの取り込みを再開する。一方、ステージ41の上下動の後も第2紙幣センサ412による紙幣Bの検出が継続している場合には、制御部120は、紙幣Bの位置決め部47への寄りかかりが復旧しなかったと判定し、扉46のロック機構46cを解除状態として、結束スタッカ4からの紙幣Bの取り出しを許可すると共に、紙幣Bの位置決め部47への寄りかかりをタッチパネル17を介してオペレータに報知する。オペレータは、タッチパネル17の表示に促され、結束スタッカ4内の紙幣Bを取り出し、紙幣Bの取り込みからやり直す。 When the detection of the bill B by the second bill sensor 412 is canceled after the stage 41 is moved up and down a plurality of times, the control unit 120 determines that the leaning of the bill B to the positioning unit 47 has been recovered. , Resume taking in the bill B. On the other hand, if the second bill sensor 412 continues to detect the bill B after the stage 41 is moved up and down, the control unit 120 determines that the leaning of the bill B to the positioning unit 47 has not been recovered. Then, the lock mechanism 46c of the door 46 is set in the released state to allow the banknote B to be taken out from the bundling stacker 4, and the operator is notified via the touch panel 17 of the leaning of the banknote B to the positioning portion 47. The operator is prompted by the display on the touch panel 17 to take out the banknote B in the bundling stacker 4 and start over from taking in the banknote B.
 〈結束部9の詳細構成〉
 結束部9は、図5に示すように、テープTを供給するテープ供給部91と、テープTでテープ輪Lを作成するテープ輪作成部92と、第2搬送部8によってテープ輪Lの中へ搬送された紙幣Bを一時的に把持する一時把持部93(図10~12参照)と、紙幣Bを前記テープTで結束するときに該紙幣Bを集積方向に押圧するクランプ部94と、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けた状態でテープT同士を接合するヒータ95と、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けられていない位置で切断するカッタ96と、テープTに印刷する印刷部97と、テープTに押印する押印部98とを有している。
<Detailed configuration of the binding unit 9>
As shown in FIG. 5, the bundling unit 9 includes a tape supply unit 91 that supplies the tape T, a tape ring creation unit 92 that creates the tape ring L using the tape T, A temporary gripping part 93 (see FIGS. 10 to 12) for temporarily gripping the banknote B conveyed to the tape, a clamp part 94 for pressing the banknote B in the stacking direction when binding the banknote B with the tape T, A heater 95 that joins the tapes T with the tape T wrapped around the bill B, a cutter 96 that cuts the tape T at a position where the tape T is not wrapped around the bill B, a printing unit 97 that prints on the tape T, and a tape T And a stamping portion 98 for stamping.
 テープ供給部91は、テープTがリールに巻き付けられたテープリール911と、テープリール911から引き出されるテープTを搬送するテープ搬送部912とを有している。テープ搬送部912は、テープTを所定の搬送経路に沿って搬送する。テープ搬送部912は、ガイド(図示省略)と複数のローラ対とを有している。 The tape supply unit 91 includes a tape reel 911 around which the tape T is wound and a tape transport unit 912 that transports the tape T drawn from the tape reel 911. The tape transport unit 912 transports the tape T along a predetermined transport path. The tape transport unit 912 has a guide (not shown) and a plurality of roller pairs.
 テープ輪作成部92は、テープTでテープ輪Lを作成し、集積された紙幣Bが該テープ輪Lの中に配置された後に該テープTを引き戻して該テープTを該紙幣Bに巻き付ける。テープ輪作成部92は、テープTの送り出し及び引き戻しを行う送り出しローラ対920と、テープTの先端部を把持するテープ把持部921と、テープTでテープ輪Lを作成する際にテープ輪Lの形状を規定するガイド部925と、テープTの先端を検知する第1テープセンサ9210と、大テープ輪L2が作成されたことを検知する第2テープセンサ9211とを有している。テープ輪作成部92は、テープ把持部921によりテープTで小テープ輪を作成した後、送り出しローラ対920によりテープTを送り出すことによって該小テープ輪を大きくして大テープ輪L2を作成する。その際、ガイド部925は、テープTを案内して、大テープ輪L2の形を規定し、第2テープセンサ9211は、大テープ輪L2の形成を検知する。 The tape ring creating unit 92 creates a tape ring L with the tape T, and after the accumulated banknotes B are arranged in the tape ring L, the tape T is pulled back and the tape T is wound around the banknotes B. The tape ring creating unit 92 includes a feed roller pair 920 that feeds and retracts the tape T, a tape gripping unit 921 that grips the leading end of the tape T, and the tape ring L when the tape T is created with the tape T. It has a guide portion 925 that defines the shape, a first tape sensor 9210 that detects the tip of the tape T, and a second tape sensor 9211 that detects that the large tape ring L2 has been created. The tape ring creating unit 92 creates a small tape ring with the tape T by the tape gripping unit 921 and then feeds the tape T by the feed roller pair 920 to enlarge the small tape ring to create the large tape ring L2. At that time, the guide portion 925 guides the tape T to define the shape of the large tape ring L2, and the second tape sensor 9211 detects the formation of the large tape ring L2.
 送り出しローラ対920は、ステッピングモータにより駆動され、テープ輪Lを作成する際にテープTを送り出す。送り出しローラ対920は、テープ搬送部912の下流端部に位置し、テープ搬送部912の一部も構成する。 The delivery roller pair 920 is driven by a stepping motor to deliver the tape T when the tape ring L is created. The feed roller pair 920 is located at the downstream end of the tape transport unit 912 and also constitutes a part of the tape transport unit 912.
 また、テープリール911には、テープTの巻き戻し方向にテープリール911を回転させるステッピングモータが設けられており、紙幣Bがテープ輪Tの中へ配置された後にテープTを紙幣Bに巻き付ける際には、送り出しローラ対920及びテープリール911がテープTを巻き戻す方向に回転する。 The tape reel 911 is provided with a stepping motor that rotates the tape reel 911 in the rewinding direction of the tape T. When the banknote B is placed in the tape ring T, the tape T is wound around the banknote B. First, the feed roller pair 920 and the tape reel 911 rotate in the direction to rewind the tape T.
 第1テープセンサ9210は、テープTの搬送路中であって、送り出しローラ対920とテープ把持部921との間に設けられている。第1テープセンサ9210は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をしている。第1テープセンサ9210は、光が遮断されることによってテープTを検知する。例えば、送り出しローラ対920がテープTを引き戻し、第1テープセンサ9210において光が遮断された状態から光が受信される状態となったことをもってテープTの先端を検知することができる。 The first tape sensor 9210 is provided in the transport path of the tape T and is provided between the feed roller pair 920 and the tape grip portion 921. The first tape sensor 9210 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25. The first tape sensor 9210 detects the tape T when light is blocked. For example, the leading end of the tape T can be detected when the pair of delivery rollers 920 pulls back the tape T and the first tape sensor 9210 is in a state where light is received from a state where the light is blocked.
 テープ把持部921は、送り出しローラ対920から送り出されるテープTを受け取ることが可能な位置に配置されている。テープ把持部921は、詳細な図示は省略するが、送り出しローラ対920から送り出されたテープTの先端部を把持した状態で回転することによってテープ輪Lを作成する。 The tape gripping portion 921 is disposed at a position where the tape T fed from the feed roller pair 920 can be received. Although not shown in detail, the tape gripping portion 921 creates a tape loop L by rotating in a state where the tip end portion of the tape T fed from the feed roller pair 920 is gripped.
 ガイド部925は、大テープ輪L2を作成するときに、該大テープ輪L2の外周面に接触して該大テープ輪L2の形状を規定する。ガイド部925は、大テープ輪L2を略長方形状、詳しくは、角部が湾曲した長方形状に規定する。 The guide portion 925 defines the shape of the large tape ring L2 by making contact with the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 when creating the large tape ring L2. The guide part 925 defines the large tape ring L2 in a substantially rectangular shape, specifically, a rectangular shape with curved corners.
 図10に、テープ輪作成部92の斜視図を示す。ガイド部925は、大テープ輪L2の下側から大テープ輪L2の外周面に接触する下ガイド部926と、水平方向から大テープ輪L2の外周面に接触する第1側方ガイド部927及び第2側方ガイド部928と、長方形の4つの角部に対応する4つの第1~第4コーナーガイド部929a~929dとを有している。 FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the tape ring creating unit 92. The guide portion 925 includes a lower guide portion 926 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 from the lower side of the large tape ring L2, a first side guide portion 927 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the large tape ring L2 from the horizontal direction, and It has a second side guide portion 928 and four first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d corresponding to the four corner portions of the rectangle.
 図11に、テープ輪作成部92の下部を斜め上方から見た斜視図を示す。下ガイド部926は、テープTの幅方向の位置を規制する一対の側壁926a,926aと底壁926bとを有し、溝状に形成されている。底壁926bの幅は、テープ幅よりも広い。一対の側壁926a,926aは、底壁926bから開口端に向かって(即ち、上方へ向かって)溝幅が広くなるように傾斜している。底壁926bには、後述する押印部98のスタンプ981が貫通する貫通孔が設けられている。 FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the lower part of the tape ring creating unit 92 as viewed obliquely from above. The lower guide portion 926 has a pair of side walls 926a, 926a and a bottom wall 926b that regulate the position of the tape T in the width direction, and is formed in a groove shape. The width of the bottom wall 926b is wider than the tape width. The pair of side walls 926a and 926a are inclined so that the groove width increases from the bottom wall 926b toward the opening end (that is, upward). The bottom wall 926b is provided with a through hole through which a stamp 981 of a stamping portion 98 described later passes.
 底壁926bの長手方向両端部には、第1コーナーガイド部929a及び第2コーナーガイド部929bが設けられている。第1コーナーガイド部929aは、下ガイド部926と第1側方ガイド部927とで形成される角部に位置するテープTを湾曲させる。第2コーナーガイド部929bは、下ガイド部926と第2側方ガイド部928(図11では図示省略)とで形成される角部に位置するテープTを湾曲させる。第1コーナーガイド部929a及び第2コーナーガイド部929bはそれぞれ、2枚の板で構成されている。2枚の板はそれぞれ、凹状に湾曲する端縁を有し、互いに対向する状態で底壁926bに立設されている。 1st corner guide part 929a and 2nd corner guide part 929b are provided in the longitudinal direction both ends of bottom wall 926b. The first corner guide portion 929a bends the tape T located at the corner formed by the lower guide portion 926 and the first side guide portion 927. The second corner guide part 929b bends the tape T located at the corner formed by the lower guide part 926 and the second side guide part 928 (not shown in FIG. 11). Each of the first corner guide portion 929a and the second corner guide portion 929b is composed of two plates. Each of the two plates has an edge that curves in a concave shape, and is erected on the bottom wall 926b so as to face each other.
 下ガイド部926は、移動機構が設けられており、移動機構によって上下に移動可能に構成されている。この移動機構は、後述する下クランプ部943,944の移動機構と共通である。 The lower guide portion 926 is provided with a moving mechanism, and is configured to be movable up and down by the moving mechanism. This moving mechanism is common to the moving mechanism of lower clamp parts 943 and 944 described later.
 第1側方ガイド部927は、図10に示すように、下ガイド部926の長手方向の結束スタッカ4側の端部において上下方向に延びている。第1側方ガイド部927は、側壁927aと底壁927bとを有し、溝状に形成されている。側壁927aは、テープTの幅方向の位置を規制する。底壁927bの幅は、テープ幅よりも広い。底壁927bには、第1コーナーガイド部929aが通過する2本のスリットが形成されている。 As shown in FIG. 10, the first side guide portion 927 extends in the vertical direction at the end of the lower guide portion 926 on the binding stacker 4 side in the longitudinal direction. The 1st side guide part 927 has the side wall 927a and the bottom wall 927b, and is formed in groove shape. The side wall 927a regulates the position of the tape T in the width direction. The width of the bottom wall 927b is wider than the tape width. Two slits through which the first corner guide portion 929a passes are formed in the bottom wall 927b.
 第2側方ガイド部928は、下ガイド部926の長手方向の投出部11側の端部において上下方向に延びている。第2側方ガイド部928は、略平板状に形成されている。第2側方ガイド部928は、支持部によって上下に移動可能に支持されると共に、リンクを介して下ガイド部926に連結されている。これにより、第2側方ガイド部928は、下ガイド部926の上昇に連動して上昇し、下ガイド部926の下降に連動して下降する。尚、第2側方ガイド部928の移動量は、リンクにより増幅されている。第2側方ガイド部928は、結束紙幣Bを搬送するときに、該結束紙幣Bの搬送を阻害しないように上方へ退避するように構成されている。 2nd side guide part 928 is extended in the up-down direction in the edge part by the side of the projection part 11 of the longitudinal direction of the lower guide part 926. As shown in FIG. The second side guide portion 928 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape. The second side guide portion 928 is supported by the support portion so as to be vertically movable, and is connected to the lower guide portion 926 via a link. As a result, the second side guide portion 928 rises in conjunction with the rise of the lower guide portion 926 and descends in conjunction with the fall of the lower guide portion 926. Note that the amount of movement of the second side guide portion 928 is amplified by the link. The second side guide portion 928 is configured to retract upward so as not to hinder the conveyance of the bundled banknote B when the bundled banknote B is conveyed.
 また、第1コーナーガイド部929a及び第2コーナーガイド部929bの上方であって、テープ把持部921と略同じ高さには、第3コーナーガイド部929c及び第4コーナーガイド部929dが設けられている。第3コーナーガイド部929cは、第1側方ガイド部927に隣接して設けられている。第3コーナーガイド部929cは、2枚の板を有している。2枚の板は、凹状に湾曲する端縁を有し、互いに対向する状態で底壁927bに立設されている。第4コーナーガイド部929dは、第2側方ガイド部928に隣接して設けられている。第4コーナーガイド部929dは、凹状に湾曲した湾曲面を有するブロックで形成されている。以下、第1~第4コーナーガイド部929a~929dを特に区別しないときには、単にコーナーガイド部929と称する場合がある。 In addition, a third corner guide portion 929c and a fourth corner guide portion 929d are provided above the first corner guide portion 929a and the second corner guide portion 929b and at substantially the same height as the tape grip portion 921. Yes. The third corner guide part 929c is provided adjacent to the first side guide part 927. The third corner guide portion 929c has two plates. The two plates have end edges that curve in a concave shape, and stand on the bottom wall 927b so as to face each other. The fourth corner guide portion 929d is provided adjacent to the second side guide portion 928. The fourth corner guide portion 929d is formed of a block having a curved surface that is curved in a concave shape. Hereinafter, when the first to fourth corner guide portions 929a to 929d are not particularly distinguished, they may be simply referred to as corner guide portions 929.
 第2テープセンサ9211は、紙幣センサ25と同様の構成をし、光が遮断されることによってテープTを検知する。第2テープセンサ9211の受信部は、図5に概念的に示すように、第4コーナーガイド部929dに取り付けられている。第2テープセンサ9211の送信部は、該送信部からの光が第4コーナーガイド部929dに案内されているテープTによって遮断される位置に配置されている。つまり、第2テープセンサ9211は、送信部が光を送信しても受信部が光を受信しないことをもって、第4コーナーガイド部929dがテープTを案内していること、即ち、テープ輪Lが所定の大きさになったことを検知する。 The second tape sensor 9211 has the same configuration as the banknote sensor 25 and detects the tape T when light is blocked. The receiving portion of the second tape sensor 9211 is attached to the fourth corner guide portion 929d as conceptually shown in FIG. The transmission unit of the second tape sensor 9211 is disposed at a position where light from the transmission unit is blocked by the tape T guided by the fourth corner guide unit 929d. In other words, the second tape sensor 9211 is configured such that the fourth corner guide portion 929d guides the tape T when the transmitting portion transmits light and the receiving portion does not receive light. Detects that it has reached a predetermined size.
 一時把持部93は、第2搬送部8によってテープ輪Lの中へ搬送された紙幣Bを一時的に把持する。一時把持部93は、第2水平方向、即ち、テープ幅方向においてテープ輪Lに対して第2搬送部8とは反対側に設けられている。一時把持部93は、紙幣Bのうち、テープ輪Lに対して第2搬送部8とは反対側の部分を把持する。一時把持部93は、上把持部931と、下把持部932と、上把持部931及び下把持部932を上下方向へ移動させる上下移動機構とを有する。一時把持部93は、上把持部931と下把持部932とで紙幣Bを把持する。 The temporary gripping part 93 temporarily grips the bill B transported into the tape loop L by the second transporting part 8. The temporary holding portion 93 is provided on the opposite side to the second conveying portion 8 with respect to the tape loop L in the second horizontal direction, that is, the tape width direction. The temporary gripping portion 93 grips a portion of the banknote B on the side opposite to the second transport portion 8 with respect to the tape loop L. The temporary gripping portion 93 includes an upper gripping portion 931, a lower gripping portion 932, and a vertical movement mechanism that moves the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932 in the vertical direction. The temporary gripping portion 93 grips the bill B with the upper gripping portion 931 and the lower gripping portion 932.
 図12に、テープ輪作成部92の上部を斜め下方から見た斜視図を示す。上把持部931は、上ベースプレート933と、上可動プレート934と、上可動プレート934に設けられた第1及び第2接触部931a,931bとを有している。第1及び第2接触部931a,931bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1接触部931aと第2接触部931bとは、同じ高さに位置している。第1及び第2接触部931a,931bは、ウレタンゴムで構成されている。尚、第1及び第2接触部931a,931bは、ウレタンゴム以外のゴム又は樹脂で構成されていてもよい。第1接触部931aと第2接触部931bとの間には、テープ把持部921が配置されている。上可動プレート934は、テープTの幅方向へ移動可能な状態で上ベースプレート933に支持されている。 FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the upper part of the tape loop creating unit 92 as viewed from obliquely below. The upper grip 931 includes an upper base plate 933, an upper movable plate 934, and first and second contact portions 931a and 931b provided on the upper movable plate 934. The first and second contact portions 931 a and 931 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The first contact portion 931a and the second contact portion 931b are located at the same height. The first and second contact portions 931a and 931b are made of urethane rubber. In addition, the 1st and 2nd contact parts 931a and 931b may be comprised with rubber | gum or resin other than urethane rubber. A tape grip portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 931a and the second contact portion 931b. The upper movable plate 934 is supported by the upper base plate 933 so as to be movable in the width direction of the tape T.
 下把持部932は、図11に示すように、下ベースプレート935と、下可動プレート936と、下可動プレート936に設けられた第1及び第2接触部932a,932bとを有している。第1及び第2接触部932a,932bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1接触部932aと第2接触部932bとは、同じ高さに位置している。第1及び第2接触部932a,932bはそれぞれ、上把持部931の第1及び第2接触部931a,931bと対向している。第1及び第2接触部932a,932bは、ウレタンゴムで構成されている。尚、第1及び第2接触部932a,932bは、ウレタンゴム以外のゴム又は樹脂で構成されていてもよい。下可動プレート936は、テープTの幅方向へ移動可能な状態で下ベースプレート935に支持されている。 As shown in FIG. 11, the lower grip 932 includes a lower base plate 935, a lower movable plate 936, and first and second contact portions 932 a and 932 b provided on the lower movable plate 936. The first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The first contact portion 932a and the second contact portion 932b are located at the same height. The first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 931a and 931b of the upper grip portion 931, respectively. The first and second contact portions 932a and 932b are made of urethane rubber. The first and second contact portions 932a and 932b may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber. The lower movable plate 936 is supported by the lower base plate 935 so as to be movable in the width direction of the tape T.
 ここで、上可動プレート934及び下可動プレート936は、紙幣が大テープ輪L2の中へ搬送される際の第2搬送部8の動きに連動して第2水平方向へ移動するように構成されている。 Here, the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 are configured to move in the second horizontal direction in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8 when the bill is transported into the large tape ring L2. ing.
 具体的には、上可動プレート934は、上ベースプレート933だけでなく、上下に延びるシャフトにも支持されている。同様に、下可動プレート936は、下ベースプレート935だけでなく、上下に延びるシャフトにも支持されている。これらのシャフトは上下方向に延びており、上把持部931及び下把持部932が上下動する際には、上可動プレート934及び下可動プレート936は、シャフトに沿って上下動するので、シャフトが上把持部931及び下把持部932の上下動を阻害することはない。これら2本のシャフトは、フレームによって一体的に構成されている。該フレーム及びシャフトは、移動機構によって第2水平方向に移動可能に構成されている。該フレーム及びシャフトは、紙幣が大テープ輪L2の中へ搬送される際の第2搬送部8の動きに連動して、該移動機構によって第2水平方向へ移動する。詳しくは、第2搬送部8が紙幣を大テープ輪L2の中へ搬送すると、第2搬送部8の移動に連動して、移動機構が前記フレームを第2水平方向へ移動させる。該フレームが第2水平方向へ移動すると、該フレームのシャフトに支持された上可動プレート934及び下可動プレート936も第2水平方向へ移動する。 Specifically, the upper movable plate 934 is supported not only by the upper base plate 933 but also by a shaft extending vertically. Similarly, the lower movable plate 936 is supported not only by the lower base plate 935 but also by a shaft extending vertically. These shafts extend in the vertical direction. When the upper grip portion 931 and the lower grip portion 932 move up and down, the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 move up and down along the shaft. The vertical movement of the upper grip 931 and the lower grip 932 is not hindered. These two shafts are integrally formed by a frame. The frame and the shaft are configured to be movable in the second horizontal direction by a moving mechanism. The frame and the shaft are moved in the second horizontal direction by the moving mechanism in conjunction with the movement of the second conveying unit 8 when the bill is conveyed into the large tape ring L2. Specifically, when the second transport unit 8 transports the bill into the large tape loop L2, the moving mechanism moves the frame in the second horizontal direction in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8. When the frame moves in the second horizontal direction, the upper movable plate 934 and the lower movable plate 936 supported by the shaft of the frame also move in the second horizontal direction.
 こうして、上把持部931の第1及び第2接触部931a,931b並びに下把持部932の第1及び第2接触部932a,932bは、第2搬送部8による紙幣の大テープ輪L2内への挿入量に応じて第2水平方向の位置が変更される。 Thus, the first and second contact portions 931a and 931b of the upper grip portion 931 and the first and second contact portions 932a and 932b of the lower grip portion 932 are fed into the large tape loop L2 of the bill by the second transport portion 8. The position in the second horizontal direction is changed according to the amount of insertion.
 クランプ部94は、紙幣Bを前記テープTで結束するときに該紙幣Bを集積方向に押圧する。クランプ部94は、紙幣Bのうち、テープTで結束される結束予定部分の近傍部分を押圧する。クランプ部94は、図10~12に示すように、テープ輪Lの中へ搬送された紙幣Bの上方に設けられた一対の上クランプ部941,942と、該紙幣Bの下方に設けられた一対の下クランプ部943,944と、一方の上クランプ部942及び下クランプ部943,944を上下に移動させる移動機構とを有している。 The clamp part 94 presses the banknote B in the stacking direction when binding the banknote B with the tape T. The clamp portion 94 presses a portion in the vicinity of the portion to be bound bound by the tape T in the bill B. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the clamp portion 94 is provided below the bill B and a pair of upper clamp portions 941 and 942 provided above the bill B conveyed into the tape loop L. It has a pair of lower clamp parts 943, 944, and a moving mechanism for moving one upper clamp part 942 and lower clamp parts 943, 944 up and down.
 上クランプ部941,942は、テープ幅方向において、テープTの両側に設けられている。第2搬送部8から遠い方の上クランプ部941は、固定されており、上下に移動不能である。一方、第2搬送部8に近い方の上クランプ部942は、上下に移動可能に構成されている。両者を区別する場合には、前者を固定上クランプ部941と称し、後者を可動上クランプ部942と称する。 The upper clamp portions 941 and 942 are provided on both sides of the tape T in the tape width direction. The upper clamp part 941 far from the second transport part 8 is fixed and cannot move up and down. On the other hand, the upper clamp part 942 closer to the second transport part 8 is configured to be movable up and down. In distinguishing the two, the former is referred to as a fixed upper clamp portion 941 and the latter is referred to as a movable upper clamp portion 942.
 固定上クランプ部941は、第1及び第2接触部941a,941bを有している。第1及び第2接触部941a,941bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1接触部941aと第2接触部941bとは、同じ高さに位置している。第1及び第2接触部941a,941bは、ウレタンゴムで構成されている。尚、第1及び第2接触部941a,941bは、ウレタンゴム以外のゴム又は樹脂で構成されていてもよい。第1接触部941aと第2接触部941bとの間には、テープ把持部921の一部が配置されている。テープ把持部921は、第1及び第2接触部941a,941bよりも低い位置に位置している。 The fixed upper clamp portion 941 has first and second contact portions 941a and 941b. The first and second contact portions 941a and 941b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b are located at the same height. The first and second contact portions 941a and 941b are made of urethane rubber. The first and second contact portions 941a and 941b may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber. A part of the tape gripping portion 921 is disposed between the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b. The tape grip portion 921 is located at a position lower than the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b.
 一方、可動上クランプ部942は、第1~第3接触部942a~942cを有している。第1~第3接触部942a~942cは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第3接触部942cは、該短手方向において第1接触部942aと第2接触部942bとの間に位置している。第1接触部942aと第2接触部942bとは、同じ高さに位置している。第3接触部942cは、第1接触部942a及び第2接触部942bよりも低い位置に位置している。第1~第3接触部942a~942cは、ウレタンゴムで構成されている。尚、第1~第3接触部942a~942cは、ウレタンゴム以外のゴム又は樹脂で構成されていてもよい。可動上クランプ部942は、第1接触部942a及び第2接触部942bが固定上クランプ部941の第1接触部941a及び第2接触部941bと同じ高さになるクランプ位置と、第3接触部942cが固定上クランプ部941の第1接触部941a及び第2接触部941bよりも高くなる退避位置との間で上下に移動する。尚、可動上クランプ部942がクランプ位置に位置するときには、第3接触部942cは、テープ把持部921と略同じ高さに位置している。 On the other hand, the movable upper clamp portion 942 has first to third contact portions 942a to 942c. The first to third contact portions 942a to 942c are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The third contact portion 942c is located between the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b in the short direction. The first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b are located at the same height. The third contact portion 942c is located at a lower position than the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b. The first to third contact portions 942a to 942c are made of urethane rubber. The first to third contact portions 942a to 942c may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber. The movable upper clamp portion 942 includes a clamp position where the first contact portion 942a and the second contact portion 942b are the same height as the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941, and a third contact portion. 942c moves up and down between a retracted position that is higher than the first contact portion 941a and the second contact portion 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941. When the movable upper clamp portion 942 is located at the clamp position, the third contact portion 942c is located at substantially the same height as the tape grip portion 921.
 下クランプ部943,944は、テープ幅方向において、テープTの両側に設けられている。第2搬送部8から遠い方の下クランプ部943と第2搬送部8に近い方の下クランプ部944とは、同じ構成をしている。下クランプ部943は、第1及び第2接触部943a,943bを有している。第1及び第2接触部943a,943bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1接触部943aと第2接触部943bとは、同じ高さに位置している。第1及び第2接触部943a,943bは、ウレタンゴムで構成されている。尚、第1及び第2接触部943a,943bは、ウレタンゴム以外のゴム又は樹脂で構成されていてもよい。第1及び第2接触部943a,943bはそれぞれ、固定上クランプ部941の第1及び第2接触部941a,941bと対向している。下クランプ部944は、第1及び第2接触部944a,944bを有している。第1及び第2接触部944a,944bは、紙幣Bの短手方向に並んでいる。第1接触部944aと第2接触部944bとは、同じ高さに位置し且つ、下クランプ部943の第1接触部943aと第2接触部943bとも同じ高さに位置している。第1及び第2接触部944a,944bは、ウレタンゴムで構成されている。尚、第1及び第2接触部944a,944bは、ウレタンゴム以外のゴム又は樹脂で構成されていてもよい。第1及び第2接触部944a,944bはそれぞれ、可動上クランプ部942の第1及び第2接触部942a,942bと対向している。 The lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are provided on both sides of the tape T in the tape width direction. The lower clamp part 943 far from the second transport part 8 and the lower clamp part 944 closer to the second transport part 8 have the same configuration. The lower clamp portion 943 has first and second contact portions 943a and 943b. The first and second contact portions 943 a and 943 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The first contact portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b are located at the same height. The first and second contact portions 943a and 943b are made of urethane rubber. The first and second contact portions 943a and 943b may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber. The first and second contact portions 943a and 943b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 941a and 941b of the fixed upper clamp portion 941, respectively. The lower clamp portion 944 has first and second contact portions 944a and 944b. The first and second contact portions 944 a and 944 b are arranged in the short direction of the bill B. The first contact portion 944a and the second contact portion 944b are located at the same height, and the first contact portion 943a and the second contact portion 943b of the lower clamp portion 943 are located at the same height. The first and second contact portions 944a and 944b are made of urethane rubber. The first and second contact portions 944a and 944b may be made of rubber or resin other than urethane rubber. The first and second contact portions 944a and 944b are opposed to the first and second contact portions 942a and 942b of the movable upper clamp portion 942, respectively.
 ここで、下クランプ部943,944は、ガイド部925の下ガイド部926と一体的に構成されている。つまり、下クランプ部943,944及び下ガイド部926は、一体的に上下に移動する。つまり、下クランプ部943,944を上下に移動させる移動機構は、下ガイド部926の移動機構と共通である。 Here, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are formed integrally with the lower guide portion 926 of the guide portion 925. That is, the lower clamp parts 943, 944 and the lower guide part 926 move up and down integrally. That is, the moving mechanism that moves the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 up and down is the same as the moving mechanism of the lower guide portion 926.
 ヒータ95は、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けた状態でテープT同士を接合する。ヒータ95は、テープT同士を熱溶着する。 The heater 95 joins the tapes T with the tape T wound around the bill B. The heater 95 thermally welds the tapes T to each other.
 カッタ96は、テープTを紙幣Bに巻き付けられていない部分、即ち、テープTのうち紙幣Bを結束して余った部分を切断する。カッタ96の先端は、鋸歯状の切断刃が設けられている。 The cutter 96 cuts a portion where the tape T is not wrapped around the bill B, that is, a portion of the tape T where the bill B is bound and left over. The tip of the cutter 96 is provided with a sawtooth cutting blade.
 ヒータ95及びカッタ96は、ユニット化されて、テープ輪Lの中へ配置される紙幣Bに対して押印部98とは反対側、具体的には、紙幣Bの集積方向において押印部98とは反対側に配置されている。より詳しくは、ヒータ95及びカッタ96は、テープ把持部921の上方に配置されている。ヒータ95は、テープ把持部921上でテープTを接合する。カッタ96は、テープ把持部921上でテープTを切断する。 The heater 95 and the cutter 96 are unitized and are opposite to the stamp portion 98 with respect to the bill B arranged in the tape ring L, specifically, the stamp portion 98 in the stacking direction of the bill B. Located on the opposite side. More specifically, the heater 95 and the cutter 96 are disposed above the tape grip portion 921. The heater 95 joins the tape T on the tape grip portion 921. The cutter 96 cuts the tape T on the tape grip portion 921.
 印刷部97は、図5に示すように、テープ搬送部912に設けられている。印刷部97は、テープ搬送部912により搬送されるテープTに印字を行う印刷ヘッドを有している。印刷部97は、例えば、結束される紙幣Bに関連する情報(例えば、金種、日時、連続番号等)をテープTに印字する。印刷部97の印字位置は、印字が押印部98による押印と重ならないように、押印部98による押印予定部分に対してテープ幅方向にずれている。 The printing unit 97 is provided in the tape transport unit 912 as shown in FIG. The printing unit 97 includes a print head that performs printing on the tape T conveyed by the tape conveyance unit 912. The printing unit 97 prints information (for example, denomination, date and time, serial number, etc.) related to the banknotes B to be bound on the tape T, for example. The printing position of the printing unit 97 is shifted in the tape width direction with respect to the portion to be imprinted by the imprinting portion 98 so that the printing does not overlap with the imprinting by the imprinting portion 98.
 押印部98は、前記クランプ部94で紙幣Bを圧縮し且つ該紙幣BにテープTを巻き付けた状態で該テープTに押印する。押印部98は、例えば、結束される紙幣Bに関連する印(例えば、金融機関印、正券又は損券等の紙幣の種類を表す印等)をテープTに押印する。押印部98は、テープ輪Lの中へ配置される紙幣Bに対してヒータ95及びカッタ96とは反対側、具体的には、紙幣Bの集積方向においてヒータ95及びカッタ96とは反対側に配置されている。押印部98は、スタンプ981と、スタンプ981を上下方向に移動させる移動機構(図示省略)とを有している。移動機構がスタンプ981を上方へ移動させることによって、スタンプ981は、紙幣Bに巻き付けられたテープTに紙幣Bの集積方向から押印する。押印部98は、下ガイド部926と一体的に設けられており、下ガイド部926が上下方向に移動するときに下ガイド部926と一体的に上下方向に移動する。 The stamp portion 98 compresses the bill B with the clamp portion 94 and stamps the tape T with the tape T wound around the bill B. The stamping part 98 stamps, for example, a mark related to the banknotes B to be bound (for example, a financial institution mark, a mark indicating the type of banknotes such as a correct note or a non-performing bill) on the tape T. The stamp portion 98 is on the opposite side of the heater 95 and the cutter 96 with respect to the bill B arranged in the tape ring L, specifically, on the opposite side of the heater 95 and the cutter 96 in the stacking direction of the bill B. Has been placed. The stamp unit 98 includes a stamp 981 and a moving mechanism (not shown) that moves the stamp 981 in the vertical direction. When the moving mechanism moves the stamp 981 upward, the stamp 981 impresses the tape T wound around the banknote B from the stacking direction of the banknote B. The stamp portion 98 is provided integrally with the lower guide portion 926, and moves in the vertical direction integrally with the lower guide portion 926 when the lower guide portion 926 moves in the vertical direction.
 続いて、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣が結束され、投出されるまでの流れを詳細に説明する。図13A~13Cに、紙幣Bの厚み方向を向いて見たときの、紙幣Bが大テープ輪L2へ搬送されて一時把持部93に把持されるまでの各部の動作説明図を示し、図13Aは、紙幣Bが結束スタッカ4から抜き出される直前の状態であり、図13Bは、紙幣Bが大テープ輪L2へ搬送される直前の状態であり、図13Cは、紙幣Bが一時把持部93により把持された状態である。図14A~14Cに、紙幣Bの厚み方向を向いて見たときの、把持ユニット81が紙幣Bを持ち直し、紙幣BにテープTが巻き付けられるまでの各部の動作説明図を示し、図14Aは、把持ユニット81が紙幣Bを持ち直した状態であり、図14Bは、クランプ部94が紙幣Bを押圧した状態であり、図14Cは、紙幣BにテープTが巻き付けられた状態である。図15A~15Cに、紙幣Bの厚み方向を向いて見たときの、結束紙幣Bが投出部11へ搬送されるまでの各部の動作説明図を示し、図15Aは、結束紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ抜き出した状態であり、図15Bは、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを把持した状態であり、図15Cは、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを投出部11まで搬送した状態である。図16に、第2処理部127を上方から見た概略配置図を示す。尚、図13~15においては、上把持部931、固定上クランプ部941及び可動上クランプ部942の図示を省略している。また、図13~15においては、下把持部932及び下クランプ部943,944のうち紙幣Bに接触している部分をハッチングで示している。 Subsequently, the flow from when the banknotes accumulated in the binding stacker 4 are bundled and thrown out will be described in detail. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating the operation of each part until the bill B is transported to the large tape ring L2 and gripped by the temporary gripping portion 93 when viewed in the thickness direction of the bill B. FIG. Is a state immediately before the bill B is pulled out from the bundling stacker 4, FIG. 13B is a state immediately before the bill B is conveyed to the large tape ring L2, and FIG. It is the state gripped by. FIGS. 14A to 14C show operation explanatory diagrams of respective parts until the gripping unit 81 picks up the banknote B and the tape T is wound around the banknote B when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote B. FIG. 14B is a state in which the clamp unit 94 presses the bill B, and FIG. 14C is a state in which the tape T is wound around the bill B. 15A to 15C show operation explanatory views of respective parts until the bundled banknote B is conveyed to the dispensing unit 11 when viewed in the thickness direction of the banknote B. FIG. FIG. 15B shows a state in which the third transport unit 10 grips the bundled bill B, and FIG. 15C shows a state in which the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled bill B to the dispensing unit 11. It is in the state. FIG. 16 is a schematic layout view of the second processing unit 127 as viewed from above. 13 to 15, the upper gripping portion 931, the fixed upper clamping portion 941, and the movable upper clamping portion 942 are not shown. 13 to 15, the portions of the lower grip portion 932 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 that are in contact with the bill B are indicated by hatching.
 紙幣Bの集積が完了すると、第2搬送部8は、紙幣Bを結束スタッカ4から結束部9へ搬送する。ここでは、第1結束スタッカ4Aにおいて紙幣Bの集積が完了したとする。第2搬送部8の把持ユニット81は、第1結束スタッカ4A内の紙幣Bを把持する。第2搬送部8は、図13Aに示すように、把持した紙幣Bを第1水平方向へ第1結束スタッカ4Aから抜き出し、第1水平方向の位置がテープ輪Lと一致する位置までそのまま第1水平方向へ搬送する。この第1水平方向が第1搬送方向に相当する。続いて、第2搬送部8は、紙幣Bをテープ輪L内へ搬入する高さ位置まで上下方向へ移動させる。 When the accumulation of the bills B is completed, the second transport unit 8 transports the bills B from the binding stacker 4 to the binding unit 9. Here, it is assumed that the accumulation of the bills B is completed in the first binding stacker 4A. The gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 grips the bill B in the first binding stacker 4A. As shown in FIG. 13A, the second transport unit 8 extracts the gripped banknote B from the first bundling stacker 4A in the first horizontal direction, and continues to the first position until the position in the first horizontal direction matches the tape ring L. Transport horizontally. This first horizontal direction corresponds to the first transport direction. Then, the 2nd conveyance part 8 moves to the up-down direction to the height position which carries in the banknote B in the tape ring L. FIG.
 制御部120は、第2搬送部8が紙幣Bを結束スタッカ4から第2位置まで搬送する間にテープ輪Lを作成する。 The control unit 120 creates the tape loop L while the second transport unit 8 transports the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 to the second position.
 第2搬送部8は、図13Bに示すように、紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ移動させ、大テープ輪L2の中へ進入させる。このとき、第2搬送部8の移動に連動して、一時把持部93も第2水平方向へ移動する。具体的には、一時把持部93は、第2水平方向において第2搬送部8と同じ向きに移動する。このときの移動量は、第2搬送部8の移動量に対応している。この第2水平方向が第2搬送方向に相当する。 The 2nd conveyance part 8 moves the banknote B to a 2nd horizontal direction, as shown to FIG. 13B, and makes it approach in the large tape ring L2. At this time, in conjunction with the movement of the second transport unit 8, the temporary gripping unit 93 also moves in the second horizontal direction. Specifically, the temporary holding unit 93 moves in the same direction as the second transport unit 8 in the second horizontal direction. The amount of movement at this time corresponds to the amount of movement of the second transport unit 8. This second horizontal direction corresponds to the second transport direction.
 第2搬送部8の把持ユニット81が、紙幣Bを第2水平方向の所定の位置まで移動させると、図13Cに示すように、一時把持部93が紙幣Bを把持する。一時把持部93が紙幣Bを把持すると、第2搬送部8の把持ユニット81は、紙幣Bを放し、第2水平方向へ、紙幣Bを大テープ輪L2へ進入させたときとは反対向きに移動する。そして、図14Aに示すように、把持ユニット81は紙幣Bの結束予定部分(後の処理でテープTが巻き付けられる部分)以外の部分を把持し直す。 When the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 moves the bill B to a predetermined position in the second horizontal direction, the temporary gripping portion 93 grips the bill B as shown in FIG. 13C. When the temporary gripping part 93 grips the banknote B, the gripping unit 81 of the second transport unit 8 releases the banknote B, in the second horizontal direction, in the direction opposite to that when the banknote B enters the large tape ring L2. Moving. And as shown to FIG. 14A, the holding | grip unit 81 hold | grips a part other than the binding plan part (part where the tape T is wound by subsequent process) of the banknote B again.
 続いて、図14Bに示すように、クランプ部94が紙幣Bを集積方向へ、即ち、上下方向へ両側から押圧する。紙幣Bは、上クランプ部941,942と下クランプ部943,944とで上下方向から圧縮される。尚、上クランプ部941,942と下クランプ部943,944とが紙幣Bを押圧するときには、把持ユニット81及び一時把持部93による把持は解除されている。 Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 14B, the clamp portion 94 presses the banknote B in the stacking direction, that is, in the vertical direction from both sides. The bill B is compressed from above and below by the upper clamp portions 941 and 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944. When the upper clamp portions 941 and 942 and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 press the bill B, the gripping by the gripping unit 81 and the temporary gripping portion 93 is released.
 ここで、下クランプ部943,944の上昇に連動して、下ガイド部926が上方へ移動すると共に、送り出しローラ対920がテープTを引き戻す。その結果、下ガイド部926の上昇に伴って、テープ輪Lが小さくなる。やがて、下ガイド部926の上昇が停止する一方、テープTの引き戻しは継続される。最終的に、図14Cに示すように、テープTが紙幣Bに巻き付けられる。 Here, the lower guide portion 926 moves upward in conjunction with the rise of the lower clamp portions 943, 944, and the feed roller pair 920 pulls back the tape T. As a result, as the lower guide portion 926 rises, the tape ring L becomes smaller. Eventually, the lower guide 926 stops rising, while the tape T continues to be pulled back. Finally, the tape T is wound around the banknote B as shown in FIG.
 続いて、ヒータ95がテープT同士を接合すると共に、カッタ96がテープTを切断する。それに加えて、押印部98がテープTに押印する。 Subsequently, the heater 95 joins the tapes T, and the cutter 96 cuts the tapes T. In addition, the stamp portion 98 stamps the tape T.
 テープTの接合、切断及び押印が完了すると、把持ユニット81が結束紙幣Bを把持する。続いて、下クランプ部943,944が下降して、クランプ部94による押圧が解除される。尚、一時把持部93の下把持部932も少し下降する。それに加えて、可動上クランプ部942が上昇する。その後、第2搬送部8は、図15Aに示すように、結束紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ、紙幣を大テープ輪L2へ搬送したときとは反対側へ所定量だけ搬送する。詳しくは、テープTにより紙幣Bを結束する際にテープ把持部921がテープTの先端部を把持しているので、テープ把持部921は、テープTと紙幣Bとの間に入り込んだ状態となっている。そのため、第2搬送部8は、テープ把持部921がテープTと紙幣Bとの間から抜け出るまで、結束紙幣Bを第2水平方向へ移動させる。 When the joining, cutting and stamping of the tape T are completed, the gripping unit 81 grips the bundled banknote B. Subsequently, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are lowered, and the pressing by the clamp portion 94 is released. Note that the lower grip 932 of the temporary grip 93 is also slightly lowered. In addition, the movable upper clamp portion 942 rises. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15A, the second transport unit 8 transports the bundled banknotes B in the second horizontal direction, and transports the banknotes by a predetermined amount to the opposite side from when the banknotes are transported to the large tape loop L2. Specifically, since the tape gripping portion 921 grips the tip end portion of the tape T when binding the bill B with the tape T, the tape gripping portion 921 enters a state between the tape T and the bill B. ing. Therefore, the second transport unit 8 moves the bundled bills B in the second horizontal direction until the tape gripping unit 921 comes out from between the tape T and the bills B.
 次に、把持ユニット81は、結束紙幣Bの把持を解除する。代わりに、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを把持する。詳しくは、下クランプ部943,944が所定の高さ位置まで下降する。この高さ位置は、投出部11の高さに対応している。それと共に、下把持部932も、下クランプ部943,944と同じ高さまで下降する。第2搬送部8は、結束紙幣Bを下クランプ部943,944の高さまで移動させ、把持ユニット81の把持を解除する。このとき、下アーム部81bの高さは、下クランプ部943,944の高さと一致している。つまり、結束紙幣Bは、下アーム部81b及び下クランプ部943,944上に載置された状態となる。この把持ユニット81及び下クランプ部943,944の動作と連動して、図15Bに示すように、第3搬送部10が結束スタッカ4側から結束紙幣Bの方へ第1水平方向に移動してくる。第3搬送部10の上把持部101と下把持部102との間隔は、前述の如く、結束紙幣Bに近づくにつれて小さくなり、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bに到達したときには、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを把持した状態となる。 Next, the holding unit 81 releases the holding of the bundled banknote B. Instead, the third transport unit 10 grips the bundled banknote B. Specifically, the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 are lowered to a predetermined height position. This height position corresponds to the height of the dispensing unit 11. At the same time, the lower grip portion 932 is lowered to the same height as the lower clamp portions 943 and 944. The second transport unit 8 moves the bundled banknote B to the height of the lower clamp units 943 and 944 and releases the grip of the grip unit 81. At this time, the height of the lower arm portion 81b matches the height of the lower clamp portions 943, 944. That is, the bundled banknote B is placed on the lower arm part 81b and the lower clamp parts 943, 944. In conjunction with the operations of the gripping unit 81 and the lower clamp parts 943, 944, the third transport unit 10 moves in the first horizontal direction from the binding stacker 4 side to the binding banknote B as shown in FIG. 15B. come. As described above, the distance between the upper gripping portion 101 and the lower gripping portion 102 of the third transport unit 10 becomes smaller as it approaches the bundled banknote B, and when the third transporter 10 reaches the bound banknote B, the third transport is performed. The part 10 is in a state of holding the bundled banknote B.
 続いて、第3搬送部10が、結束紙幣Bを第1水平方向へ投出部11に向かって搬送する。このとき、第2搬送部8の下アーム部81b及び下クランプ部943,944が結束紙幣Bを下方から支えており、結束紙幣Bが投出部11まで搬送される際のガイドとして機能する。第3搬送部10は、結束紙幣Bが投出部11に近づくと、該結束紙幣Bの把持を徐々に解除する。最終的に、図15Cに示すように、結束紙幣Bは、第3搬送部10により投出部11へ押し出される。 Subsequently, the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknote B toward the dispensing unit 11 in the first horizontal direction. At this time, the lower arm portion 81 b and the lower clamp portions 943 and 944 of the second transport unit 8 support the bundled bill B from below, and function as a guide when the bundled bill B is transported to the dispensing unit 11. When the bundled banknote B approaches the dispensing unit 11, the third transport unit 10 gradually releases the grip of the bundled banknote B. Finally, as shown in FIG. 15C, the bundled banknotes B are pushed out to the dispensing unit 11 by the third transport unit 10.
 このように、筐体12内においては、結束部9は、水平面に直交する方向を向いて見た場合において、第2搬送部8により結束スタッカ4から紙幣Bが抜き出される第1水平方向に対しオフセットした位置に配置されている。すなわち、結束部9は、結束スタッカ4から第1水平方向に延びる直線に対してオフセットした位置に配置されている。そして、第2搬送部8及び第3搬送部10は、結束スタッカ4から紙幣Bを第1水平方向に抜き出した後、該第1水平方向と交差する第2水平方向へ紙幣Bを搬送することによって紙幣Bを結束部9へ搬入し、結束後の紙幣Bを第2水平方向において結束部9へ搬入したときとは反対向きに搬出し、その後、第1水平方向において結束スタッカ4から抜き出したときと同じ向きに搬送する。その後、第3搬送部10は、結束紙幣Bを投出部11へ搬送する。 Thus, in the housing | casing 12, when the bundling part 9 looks in the direction orthogonal to a horizontal surface, the 1st horizontal direction by which the banknote B is extracted from the bundling stacker 4 by the 2nd conveyance part 8 is shown. It is arranged at an offset position. That is, the binding unit 9 is disposed at a position offset from a straight line extending from the binding stacker 4 in the first horizontal direction. And after the 2nd conveyance part 8 and the 3rd conveyance part 10 extract the banknote B from the binding stacker 4 to the 1st horizontal direction, they convey the banknote B to the 2nd horizontal direction which cross | intersects this 1st horizontal direction. The bill B is carried into the bundling portion 9 by means of the above, and the bundled bill B is carried out in the direction opposite to that when it is carried into the bundling portion 9 in the second horizontal direction, and then removed from the bundling stacker 4 in the first horizontal direction. Transport in the same direction as when. Thereafter, the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled banknote B to the dispensing unit 11.
 この構成によれば、筐体12内には、図16に示すように、結束スタッカ4から第1水平方向に延びた後、第2水平方向へ屈曲し、さらに、第2水平方向へ戻り、再び、第1水平方向へ屈曲して延びる略T字状の搬送経路が確保されるような搬送スペースが設けられている。結束スタッカ4、結束部9及び投出部11をこのような配置とし、搬送スペースを確保することによって、メンテナンス時にはこの搬送スペースを利用してメンテナンス作業を効率良く行うことができる。 According to this configuration, as shown in FIG. 16, the housing 12 extends from the bundling stacker 4 in the first horizontal direction, then bends in the second horizontal direction, and further returns to the second horizontal direction. Again, a transport space is provided so that a substantially T-shaped transport path that is bent and extended in the first horizontal direction is secured. By arranging the bundling stacker 4, the bundling unit 9, and the dispensing unit 11 in such a manner and securing a conveyance space, maintenance work can be efficiently performed using the conveyance space during maintenance.
 〈投出部11の詳細構成〉
 図17は、筐体の一部を切断した、投出部の斜視図であり、結束紙幣Bを受け取る受取状態を示している。図18は、筐体の一部を切断した、投出部の斜視図であり、結束紙幣Bを投出する投出状態を示している。図19は、投出部の主要部品を抜き出した斜視図であり、受取状態を示している。図20は、投出部の主要部品を抜き出した斜視図であり、投出状態を示している。図21は、投出部の主要部品を抜き出した正面図であり、受取状態を示している。図22は、投出部の主要部品を抜き出した正面図であり、投出状態を示している。
<Detailed Configuration of Throwing Unit 11>
FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit with a part of the housing cut, and shows a receiving state in which the bundled banknotes B are received. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit with a part of the housing cut, and shows a dispensing state in which the bundled banknote B is dispensed. FIG. 19 is a perspective view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, and shows a receiving state. FIG. 20 is a perspective view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, showing a state of dispensing. FIG. 21 is a front view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted and shows a receiving state. FIG. 22 is a front view in which main components of the dispensing unit are extracted, and shows a state of dispensing.
 投出部11は、結束紙幣Bを受取位置において受け取って、該結束紙幣Bを側方へスライドさせて投出位置において投出するスライド部112と、スライド部112をスライド可能に支持するベース部113と、スライド部112を駆動する駆動部114と、受取位置においてスライド部112上の紙幣Bの有無を検出する第1センサ117(図19,20参照)と、投出位置においてスライド部112上の紙幣Bの有無を検出する第2センサ118(図19,20参照)とを有している。受取位置は、第3搬送部10から紙幣Bを受け取る位置であり、第2水平方向において第3搬送部10の位置と一致している。受取位置は、ホッパ部2の上方に位置している。投出位置は、紙幣Bを投出口111へ投出する位置であり、第2水平方向において投出口111の位置と一致している。投出位置は、ホッパ部2の上方から側方へずれている。 The throwing unit 11 receives the bundled banknote B at the receiving position, slides the bundled banknote B to the side, and throws it out at the throwing position, and a base part that supports the slide part 112 so as to be slidable. 113, a drive unit 114 that drives the slide unit 112, a first sensor 117 (see FIGS. 19 and 20) that detects the presence or absence of the bill B on the slide unit 112 at the receiving position, and the slide unit 112 at the dispensing position. And a second sensor 118 (see FIGS. 19 and 20) for detecting the presence or absence of the bill B. The receiving position is a position where the bill B is received from the third transport unit 10 and coincides with the position of the third transport unit 10 in the second horizontal direction. The receiving position is located above the hopper unit 2. The throwing position is a position where the bill B is thrown into the throwing port 111, and coincides with the position of the throwing port 111 in the second horizontal direction. The throwing position is shifted from the upper side of the hopper 2 to the side.
 ベース部113は、板金で形成されている。ベース部113には、スライド部112を案内するガイドポール113a(図18,20参照)と、スライド部112を案内するカムプレート113bとを有している。ガイドポール113aは、第2水平方向に沿って延びている。カムプレート113bは、第2水平方向に沿って延びるプレートであり、直進溝113c及びカム溝113dが形成されている。直進溝113cは、第2水平方向に沿って延びている。カム溝113dは、その大部分が第2水平方向に沿って延びており、投出位置側の端部が斜め下向きに延びている。 The base portion 113 is made of sheet metal. The base portion 113 includes a guide pole 113a (see FIGS. 18 and 20) for guiding the slide portion 112 and a cam plate 113b for guiding the slide portion 112. The guide pole 113a extends along the second horizontal direction. The cam plate 113b is a plate extending along the second horizontal direction, and is formed with a rectilinear groove 113c and a cam groove 113d. The rectilinear groove 113c extends along the second horizontal direction. Most of the cam groove 113d extends along the second horizontal direction, and an end portion on the ejection position side extends obliquely downward.
 ベース部113には、駆動部114が設けられている。駆動部114は、駆動モータ114aと、駆動モータ114aに連結された第1ギア114bと、第1ギア114bと噛合する第2ギア114cと、第2ギア114cと一体的に回転する第3ギア114dとを有している。 The base unit 113 is provided with a drive unit 114. The drive unit 114 includes a drive motor 114a, a first gear 114b coupled to the drive motor 114a, a second gear 114c that meshes with the first gear 114b, and a third gear 114d that rotates integrally with the second gear 114c. And have.
 また、ベース部113には、図19,20に示すように、第1センサ117の送信部及び第2センサ118の送信部が設けられている。第1センサ117の送信部と第2センサ118の送信部とは、第2水平方向において異なる位置に配置されている。第1センサ117の送信部は、スライド部112が受取位置に位置するときに、スライド部112上の紙幣Bにより遮光される位置に配置されている。一方、第2センサ118の送信部は、スライド部112が投出位置に位置するときに、スライド部112上の紙幣Bにより遮光される位置に配置されている。 Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the base unit 113 is provided with a transmission unit of the first sensor 117 and a transmission unit of the second sensor 118. The transmission unit of the first sensor 117 and the transmission unit of the second sensor 118 are arranged at different positions in the second horizontal direction. The transmission part of the first sensor 117 is disposed at a position where the bill 112 on the slide part 112 is shielded from light when the slide part 112 is located at the receiving position. On the other hand, the transmission unit of the second sensor 118 is disposed at a position where the bill 112 on the slide unit 112 is shielded from light when the slide unit 112 is positioned at the dispensing position.
 スライド部112は、紙幣Bを搬送する搬送部115と、紙幣Bを受け止めて、紙幣Bの落下を規制する受け止め部116とを有している。 The slide unit 112 includes a transport unit 115 that transports the banknote B, and a receiving unit 116 that receives the banknote B and regulates the falling of the banknote B.
 搬送部115は、紙幣Bを支持する支持部115aと、支持部115aから屈曲して垂れ下がる垂下部115b(図19,20参照)と、紙幣Bを搬送する際に一方の短辺と接触する係止部115cと、ガイドポール113aが挿通される軸受部115dと、垂下部115bに設けられ、駆動部114と係合するラック115eと、垂下部115bに設けられ、直進溝113cに係合する第1ベアリング115fとを有している。 The transport unit 115 includes a support unit 115a that supports the banknote B, a hanging part 115b (see FIGS. 19 and 20) that bends and hangs from the support unit 115a, and a contact that contacts one short side when the banknote B is transported. A stop 115c, a bearing 115d through which the guide pole 113a is inserted, a rack 115e provided on the hanging portion 115b and engaged with the driving portion 114, and a rack 115e provided on the hanging portion 115b and engaged with the rectilinear groove 113c. 1 bearing 115f.
 支持部115aは、実質的に長方形状の板金で形成され、水平面に対して傾斜し、第3搬送部10側の長辺が高くなっている。支持部115aの低い側の長辺に垂下部115bが設けられている。また、受取位置側の短辺に係止部115cが設けられている。 The support part 115a is formed of a substantially rectangular sheet metal, is inclined with respect to a horizontal plane, and has a long side on the third transport part 10 side. A hanging portion 115b is provided on the long side of the lower side of the support portion 115a. Further, a locking portion 115c is provided on the short side on the receiving position side.
 支持部115aには、第1センサ117の送信部から送信される光が通過する第1孔115gと、第2センサ118の送信部から送信される光が通過する第2孔115hとが形成されている。第1孔115gは、搬送部115が受取位置に位置するときに、第1センサ117の送信部からの光が通過する位置に配置されている。第2孔115hは、搬送部115が投出位置に位置するときに、第2センサ118の送信部からの光が通過する位置に配置されている。 The support 115a is formed with a first hole 115g through which light transmitted from the transmitter of the first sensor 117 passes and a second hole 115h through which light transmitted from the transmitter of the second sensor 118 passes. ing. 115 g of 1st holes are arrange | positioned in the position through which the light from the transmission part of the 1st sensor 117 passes, when the conveyance part 115 is located in a receiving position. The second hole 115h is arranged at a position where light from the transmission unit of the second sensor 118 passes when the transport unit 115 is located at the projection position.
 垂下部115bは、カムプレート113bと対向して配置されている。垂下部115bのうちカムプレート113bと対向する表面に第1ベアリング115fが設けられている。一方、垂下部115bのうちカムプレート113bと反対側の表面にラック115eが設けられている。ラック115eは、第2水平方向に沿って延びている。ラック115eには、駆動部114の第3ギア114dが噛合している。また、垂下部115bには、第2水平方向に直交する方向に延び、受け止め部116が係合する係合溝115i(図19,20,22参照)が形成されている。係合溝115iは、概ね上下方向に延びている。 The hanging portion 115b is disposed to face the cam plate 113b. A first bearing 115f is provided on the surface of the hanging portion 115b that faces the cam plate 113b. On the other hand, a rack 115e is provided on the surface of the hanging portion 115b opposite to the cam plate 113b. The rack 115e extends along the second horizontal direction. A third gear 114d of the drive unit 114 is engaged with the rack 115e. The hanging portion 115b is formed with an engaging groove 115i (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 22) that extends in a direction orthogonal to the second horizontal direction and engages the receiving portion 116. The engagement groove 115i extends substantially in the vertical direction.
 受け止め部116は、板金で形成されている。受け止め部116は、カム溝113dに係合する第2ベアリング116aと、係合溝115iに係合する係合ピン(図示省略)とを有する。 The receiving portion 116 is made of sheet metal. The receiving portion 116 includes a second bearing 116a that engages with the cam groove 113d, and an engagement pin (not shown) that engages with the engagement groove 115i.
 受け止め部116は、係合ピンが係合溝115iに係合することによって、搬送部115の垂下部115bに取り付けられている。これにより、受け止め部116は、搬送部115と共に移動する。ここで、受け止め部116は、係合溝115iに沿って搬送部115に対して相対的に移動可能となっている。 The receiving part 116 is attached to the hanging part 115b of the conveying part 115 by engaging the engaging pin with the engaging groove 115i. As a result, the receiving unit 116 moves together with the transport unit 115. Here, the receiving part 116 is movable relative to the conveying part 115 along the engagement groove 115i.
 また、第2ベアリング116aは、受け止め部116のうち係合ピンとは反対側の表面に設けられている。 Further, the second bearing 116a is provided on the surface of the receiving portion 116 opposite to the engaging pin.
 続いて、このように構成された投出部11の動作について説明する。 Subsequently, the operation of the dispensing unit 11 configured as described above will be described.
 前述の如く、投出部11へは、第3搬送部10が結束紙幣Bを搬送してくる。このとき、スライド部112は、図17に示すように、受取位置に位置している。このとき、図19,21に示すように、第2ベアリング116aは、カム溝113dのうち受取位置側の端部に位置しているので、受け止め部116は、支持部115aの表面から突出した状態(受け止め状態)となっている。この状態において、第3搬送部10は、結束紙幣Bをスライド部112へ押し出す。結束紙幣Bは、支持部115aが傾斜しているので、支持部115aの表面を滑り落ち、受け止め部116により受け止められる。 As described above, the third transport unit 10 transports the bundled bills B to the dispensing unit 11. At this time, the slide portion 112 is located at the receiving position as shown in FIG. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 21, since the second bearing 116a is located at the end on the receiving position side of the cam groove 113d, the receiving portion 116 protrudes from the surface of the support portion 115a. (Receiving state). In this state, the third transport unit 10 pushes the bundled banknotes B to the slide unit 112. Since the support portion 115 a is inclined, the bundled banknote B slides down the surface of the support portion 115 a and is received by the receiving portion 116.
 続いて、駆動モータ114aが作動し、ギア列及びラック115eを介して、搬送部115が駆動される。搬送部115は、ガイドポール113a及び直進溝113cに案内されて、投出位置へ向かって第2水平方向へ移動する。 Subsequently, the drive motor 114a is operated, and the transport unit 115 is driven via the gear train and the rack 115e. The conveyance unit 115 is guided by the guide pole 113a and the rectilinear groove 113c and moves in the second horizontal direction toward the ejection position.
 このとき、受け止め部116も搬送部115と共に第2水平方向へ移動する。ただし、受け止め部116は、第2ベアリング116aを介してカム溝113dに案内される。カム溝113dのうち投出位置側の端部が斜め下方に向かって延びていると共に、受け止め部116が係合溝115iに沿って搬送部115に対して相対的に移動可能であるので、受け止め部116は、投出位置へ近づくにつれて下方へ移動する。つまり、支持部115aからの受け止め部116の突出量は、スライド部112が投出位置へ近づくと減少し始める。投出位置においては、図20,22に示すように、受け止め部116は、支持部115aの表面から突出していない状態(解除状態)となる。 At this time, the receiving unit 116 also moves in the second horizontal direction together with the transport unit 115. However, the receiving portion 116 is guided to the cam groove 113d through the second bearing 116a. The end of the cam groove 113d on the ejection position side extends obliquely downward, and the receiving part 116 is movable relative to the conveying part 115 along the engaging groove 115i. The part 116 moves downward as it approaches the throwing position. That is, the protrusion amount of the receiving portion 116 from the support portion 115a starts to decrease when the slide portion 112 approaches the throwing position. As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, the receiving portion 116 is not projected from the surface of the support portion 115 a (released state) at the throwing position.
 その結果、投出位置においては結束紙幣Bの支えが無くなり、結束紙幣Bは、図18に示すように、支持部115aの表面に沿って滑り落ち、投出口111から投出される。 As a result, the bundled banknotes B are not supported at the dispensing position, and the bundled banknotes B slide down along the surface of the support portion 115a as shown in FIG.
 その後、次の結束紙幣Bの受け渡しに備えて、搬送部115が受取位置へ戻ると、受け止め部116は、カム溝113dに案内されて再び受け止め状態となる。 After that, when the transport unit 115 returns to the receiving position in preparation for the delivery of the next bundled banknote B, the receiving unit 116 is guided to the cam groove 113d and becomes in the receiving state again.
 こうして、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣Bは、結束部9において結束された後、投出口111から投出される。 Thus, the bills B accumulated in the bundling stacker 4 are bundled in the bundling portion 9 and then thrown out from the outlet 111.
 〈取込完了後の処理〉
 このような紙幣Bの集積、結束及び投出は、ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣Bが全て取り込まれるまで継続する。ホッパ部2に載置された紙幣Bの取込及びリジェクト紙幣の再取込が全て完了すると、紙幣処理装置100は、投出口111から投出されずに紙幣処理装置100内に集積された紙幣Bの取出をオペレータに促す。図23に、紙幣Bの取込完了後の紙幣処理装置100の斜視図を示す。
<Processing after import completion>
Such stacking, bundling, and dispensing of the bills B are continued until all the bills B placed on the hopper unit 2 are taken in. When the taking-in of the banknote B placed on the hopper unit 2 and the re-taking-in of the reject banknote are all completed, the banknote handling apparatus 100 is stacked in the banknote handling apparatus 100 without being thrown out from the outlet 111. The operator is prompted to take out B. In FIG. 23, the perspective view of the banknote processing apparatus 100 after completion of taking in of the banknote B is shown.
 具体的には、紙幣Bの取込が完了すると、結束スタッカ4には結束枚数に達しなかった紙幣Bが残留しており、非結束スタッカ5及びリジェクトスタッカ6には、それぞれの集積対象となる紙幣Bが集積されている。そこで、紙幣Bの取込が完了すると、制御部120は、紙幣Bを取り出す旨の表示をタッチパネル17に表示させる。それと共に、紙幣Bが結束スタッカ4に集積されている場合には、制御部120は、該結束スタッカ4の扉46のロックを解除して、扉46を開くと共に、該結束スタッカ4内の照明を点灯させる。尚、紙幣Bの取込完了後に紙幣Bが残留しているのは一方の集積スタッカ4だけなので、他方の集積スタッカ4は、扉46が開かず、照明の点灯もない。また、紙幣Bが非結束スタッカ5に集積されている場合には、制御部120は、該非結束スタッカ5の押出機構54を作動させて、紙幣Bを押し出すと共に、該非結束スタッカ5内の照明を点灯させる。図23では、リジェクトスタッカ6に紙幣Bが集積されていないが、紙幣Bがリジェクトスタッカ6に集積されている場合には、制御部120は、リジェクトスタッカ6内の照明を点灯させる。このように、結束スタッカ4においては、扉46が自動で開くと共に照明が点灯することによって、紙幣Bの存在がオペレータに報知される。また、非結束スタッカ5においては、紙幣Bが押し出されると共に照明が点灯することによって、紙幣Bの存在がオペレータに報知される。さらに、リジェクトスタッカ6においては、照明が点灯することによって、紙幣Bの存在がオペレータに報知される。 Specifically, when the loading of the bills B is completed, the bills B that have not reached the number of bundles remain in the bundling stacker 4, and the non-bundling stacker 5 and the reject stacker 6 are to be stacked. Banknotes B are accumulated. Therefore, when the taking-in of the bill B is completed, the control unit 120 causes the touch panel 17 to display a display indicating that the bill B is taken out. At the same time, when the bills B are accumulated in the binding stacker 4, the control unit 120 unlocks the door 46 of the binding stacker 4, opens the door 46, and illuminates the binding stacker 4. Lights up. In addition, since the banknote B remains only after one stacking stacker 4 after the completion of taking in the banknote B, the other stacking stacker 4 does not open the door 46 and does not light up. In addition, when the bills B are accumulated in the non-bundling stacker 5, the control unit 120 operates the push-out mechanism 54 of the non-bundling stacker 5 to push out the bills B and to illuminate the non-bundling stacker 5. Light up. In FIG. 23, the bill B is not stacked on the reject stacker 6, but when the bill B is stacked on the reject stacker 6, the control unit 120 turns on the illumination in the reject stacker 6. As described above, in the binding stacker 4, the door 46 is automatically opened and the illumination is turned on to notify the operator of the presence of the bill B. Further, in the non-bundling stacker 5, the presence of the bill B is notified to the operator by pushing out the bill B and turning on the illumination. Furthermore, in the reject stacker 6, the presence of the banknote B is notified to the operator when the illumination is turned on.
 このように、結束スタッカ4の扉46を開いたり、非結束スタッカ5の紙幣を押し出したり、スタッカの照明を点灯させたりすることによって、紙幣Bの取り出しを視覚的に促すことができる。 As described above, the banknote B can be taken out visually by opening the door 46 of the binding stacker 4, pushing out the banknote of the non-binding stacker 5, or lighting the stacker.
 また、結束スタッカ4においては紙幣Bの取出を容易にするために、ステージ41及びガイド42が所定の動作を行う。具体的には、制御部120は、ステージ41を最も下方の位置に移動させる。それと共に、制御部120は、ガイド42を紙幣Bの集積時の状態から搬送方向前側へ移動させる。これにより、ガイド42と紙幣Bとの間に隙間が形成される。これにより、紙幣Bの上方及び搬送方向前側にスペースが確保され、紙幣Bを容易に取り出すことができる。 In the bundling stacker 4, the stage 41 and the guide 42 perform a predetermined operation in order to make it easy to take out the bill B. Specifically, the control unit 120 moves the stage 41 to the lowest position. At the same time, the control unit 120 moves the guide 42 from the state when the banknotes B are stacked to the front side in the transport direction. Thereby, a gap is formed between the guide 42 and the banknote B. Thereby, a space is secured above the banknote B and in the transport direction front side, and the banknote B can be easily taken out.
 また、結束スタッカ4においては、オペレータへの報知後に扉46が閉じられると、内部に紙幣Bが残留していないか確認する。具体的には、扉46が開いたときには、前述の如く、ステージ41が最も下方の位置に位置しているので、制御部120は、ステージ41を上昇させ、初期位置へ移動させる。そして、制御部120は、その状態で第1紙幣センサ411及び第2紙幣センサ412が紙幣Bを検出していないか確認する。第1紙幣センサ411又は第2紙幣センサ412が紙幣Bを検出している場合には、制御部120は、結束スタッカ4内に紙幣Bが残留しているとして、ステージ41を最も下方の位置へ移動させ、扉46を再び開く。 Further, in the binding stacker 4, when the door 46 is closed after notifying the operator, it is confirmed whether or not the bill B remains inside. Specifically, when the door 46 is opened, the stage 41 is positioned at the lowest position as described above, so the control unit 120 raises the stage 41 and moves it to the initial position. And the control part 120 confirms whether the 1st banknote sensor 411 and the 2nd banknote sensor 412 have detected the banknote B in the state. When the first banknote sensor 411 or the second banknote sensor 412 detects the banknote B, the control unit 120 assumes that the banknote B remains in the binding stacker 4 and moves the stage 41 to the lowest position. Move and open door 46 again.
 これにより、結束スタッカ4内の紙幣Bの残留を防止することができる。 Thereby, it is possible to prevent the banknote B from remaining in the binding stacker 4.
 〈位置決め部47の取替〉
 この結束スタッカ4は、位置決め部47を取り替える、即ち、交換することができるように構成されている。図24~26に、3種類の位置決め部47の斜視図を示す。図24~26では、扉46を開いて位置決め部47が外方に露出した状態を示している。
<Replacement of positioning part 47>
The bundling stacker 4 is configured so that the positioning portion 47 can be replaced, that is, replaced. 24 to 26 are perspective views of the three types of positioning portions 47. FIG. 24 to 26 show a state in which the door 46 is opened and the positioning portion 47 is exposed to the outside.
 ここでは、3種類の位置決め部47が用意されており、それらは、第1位置決め部47A、第2位置決め部47B及び第3位置決め部47Cである。 Here, three types of positioning portions 47 are prepared, which are a first positioning portion 47A, a second positioning portion 47B, and a third positioning portion 47C.
 第1位置決め部47Aは、図24に示すように、扉46の内側の表面に取り付けられている。第2位置決め部47Bは、図25に示すように、第1位置決め部47Aに取り付けられている。第3位置決め部47Cは、図26に示すように、第1位置決め部47Aに取り付けられている。 The first positioning portion 47A is attached to the inner surface of the door 46 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the second positioning part 47B is attached to the first positioning part 47A. As shown in FIG. 26, the third positioning portion 47C is attached to the first positioning portion 47A.
 図27に、第1位置決め部47Aを取り付けた場合の結束スタッカの概略平面図を示す。図28に、第3位置決め部47Cを取り付けた場合の結束スタッカの概略平面図を示す。図27,28では、結束スタッカの一部の要素の図示を省略している。尚、第2位置決め部47Bを取り付けた場合の結束スタッカの概略平面図は、図9に示している。 FIG. 27 shows a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the first positioning portion 47A is attached. FIG. 28 is a schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the third positioning portion 47C is attached. 27 and 28, illustration of some elements of the binding stacker is omitted. A schematic plan view of the binding stacker when the second positioning portion 47B is attached is shown in FIG.
 図9,27,28からわかるように、紙幣Bの短辺b1を位置決めする位置決め位置Pが、位置決め部47を取り替えることによって変わる。すなわち、第1位置決め部47Aは扉46に直接取り付けられているので、位置決め位置Pが、紙幣Bの長手方向において扉46に最も近く、即ち、整列機構49から最も離れている。第2位置決め部47Bは、第1位置決め部47Aに取り付けられているので、位置決め位置Pが、紙幣Bの長手方向において、第1位置決め部47Aによる位置決め位置Pよりは扉46から離れ、整列機構49に近づく。第3位置決め部47Cは、第1位置決め部47Aに取り付けられ且つ第2位置決め部47Bよりも厚いので、位置決め位置Pが、紙幣Bの長手方向において、扉46から最も離れ、整列機構49に最も近づく。 As can be seen from FIGS. 9, 27, and 28, the positioning position P for positioning the short side b <b> 1 of the bill B is changed by replacing the positioning portion 47. That is, since the first positioning portion 47A is directly attached to the door 46, the positioning position P is closest to the door 46 in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B, that is, farthest from the alignment mechanism 49. Since the second positioning portion 47B is attached to the first positioning portion 47A, the positioning position P is farther from the door 46 than the positioning position P by the first positioning portion 47A in the longitudinal direction of the bill B, and the alignment mechanism 49 Get closer to. Since the third positioning portion 47C is attached to the first positioning portion 47A and is thicker than the second positioning portion 47B, the positioning position P is farthest from the door 46 in the longitudinal direction of the banknote B and is closest to the alignment mechanism 49. .
 位置決め部47は、紙幣Bの長手方向寸法に応じて取り替えられる。例えば、紙幣Bの種類によってその長手方向寸法は異なる。紙幣Bの長手方向寸法が変わっても、アーム49aの移動量を調整することによって、紙幣Bの短辺b1を位置決め部47に押し当てることは可能である。しかしながら、アーム49aの移動量を調整するだけでは、長手方向寸法が小さい紙幣Bについては、ステージ41上に落下してから短辺b1が位置決め部47に接触するまでの紙幣Bの移動距離が長くなってしまう。紙幣Bの移動距離が長いと、移動中に紙幣Bがばたつく可能性が高くなる。紙幣Bがばたつくと、前述の如く、紙幣Bが位置決め部47に寄りかかってしまったりして、紙幣Bが整然と整列しない虞がある。また、アーム49aの移動量を調整するだけでは、アーム49aの移動可能範囲が大きな整列機構49が必要となる。 The positioning part 47 is replaced according to the longitudinal dimension of the bill B. For example, the longitudinal dimension differs depending on the type of the bill B. Even if the longitudinal dimension of the banknote B changes, it is possible to press the short side b1 of the banknote B against the positioning portion 47 by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a. However, only by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a, for the bill B having a small longitudinal dimension, the moving distance of the bill B from dropping on the stage 41 until the short side b1 contacts the positioning portion 47 is long. turn into. If the movement distance of the bill B is long, the possibility that the bill B flutters during movement increases. If the bill B flutters, as described above, the bill B may lean against the positioning portion 47, and the bill B may not be neatly aligned. Moreover, the alignment mechanism 49 having a large movable range of the arm 49a is required only by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a.
 それに対し、紙幣Bの長手方向寸法に応じて位置決め部47を取り替えることによって、短辺b1が位置決め部47に接触するまでの紙幣Bの移動距離を低減することができる。また、アーム49aの移動量も低減することができる。詳しくは、長手方向寸法がX1以下で且つX2以上の第1範囲内の紙幣Bを集積対象とする場合には、第1位置決め部47Aが取り付けられ、第1範囲内での寸法の変動についてはアーム49aの移動量の調整で対応する。長手方向寸法がX2未満で且つX3以上の第2範囲内の紙幣Bを集積対象とする場合には、第2位置決め部47Bが取り付けられ、第2範囲内での寸法の変動についてはアーム49aの移動量の調整で対応する。長手方向寸法がX3未満で且つX4より長い第3範囲内の紙幣Bを集積対象とする場合には、第3位置決め部47Cが取り付けられ、第3範囲内での寸法の変動についてはアーム49aの移動量の調整で対応する。 On the other hand, by moving the positioning portion 47 according to the longitudinal dimension of the bill B, the moving distance of the bill B until the short side b1 contacts the positioning portion 47 can be reduced. In addition, the amount of movement of the arm 49a can be reduced. Specifically, when the bills B in the first range whose longitudinal direction dimension is X1 or less and X2 or more are to be stacked, the first positioning portion 47A is attached, and the variation in the dimension within the first range is as follows. This can be done by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a. When the bill B within the second range whose longitudinal dimension is less than X2 and equal to or greater than X3 is to be stacked, the second positioning portion 47B is attached, and the variation of the dimension within the second range is determined by the arm 49a. This can be done by adjusting the amount of movement. When the bill B in the third range whose longitudinal dimension is less than X3 and longer than X4 is to be stacked, the third positioning portion 47C is attached, and the variation in the dimension within the third range is that of the arm 49a. This can be done by adjusting the amount of movement.
 制御部120には、結束スタッカ4の集積対象となる紙幣Bの寸法及び取り付けられている位置決め部47の種類が予め入力されている。制御部120は、結束スタッカ4に集積される紙幣Bの長手方向寸法及び取り付けられている位置決め部47の位置決め位置Pに応じて、アーム49aの移動量を調整する。 In the control unit 120, the dimensions of the bills B to be stacked in the bundling stacker 4 and the type of the positioning unit 47 attached are input in advance. The control unit 120 adjusts the amount of movement of the arm 49a according to the longitudinal dimension of the bills B stacked on the binding stacker 4 and the positioning position P of the positioning unit 47 attached.
 例えば、国によって紙幣Bの長手方向寸法は大きく異なる。同一国内での紙幣Bの長手方向寸法の変化にはアーム49aの移動範囲の調整だけで対応できるとしても、国が変われば、紙幣Bの長手方向寸法の変化が大きく、アーム49aの移動範囲の調整だけでは対応できない場合もある。つまり、取替可能な位置決め部47の使い方の1つとして、紙幣処理装置100を使う国に応じて、位置決め部47の種類を変更することが考えられる。こうすることで、様々な国ごとに異なる紙幣処理装置100を準備する必要がなく、位置決め部47を変更することによって共通の紙幣処理装置100で様々な国に容易に対応することができる。 For example, the longitudinal dimension of the bill B varies greatly depending on the country. Even if the change in the longitudinal dimension of the bill B within the same country can be dealt with only by adjusting the movement range of the arm 49a, if the country changes, the change in the longitudinal dimension of the bill B is large, and the movement range of the arm 49a In some cases, adjustment alone is not enough. That is, it is conceivable to change the type of the positioning unit 47 according to the country in which the banknote handling apparatus 100 is used as one of the usages of the replaceable positioning unit 47. By carrying out like this, it is not necessary to prepare the banknote processing apparatus 100 which differs for every country, and it can respond easily to various countries with the common banknote processing apparatus 100 by changing the positioning part 47.
 尚、位置決め部47の取替は、国に応じた取替に限られるものではない。例えば、紙幣処理装置100の使用時に、結束スタッカ4の集積対象となる紙幣Bの長手方向寸法に応じて位置決め部47を取り替えてもよい。 The replacement of the positioning unit 47 is not limited to replacement according to the country. For example, when using the banknote handling apparatus 100, the positioning unit 47 may be replaced according to the longitudinal dimension of the banknote B to be stacked on the binding stacker 4.
 このように、結束スタッカ4に集積される紙幣Bの長手方向寸法に応じて適切な位置決め部47を取り付けておくことによって、様々な寸法の紙幣Bに対して、紙幣Bをきれいに整列させることができる。 Thus, by attaching the appropriate positioning part 47 according to the longitudinal direction dimension of the banknote B accumulated on the binding stacker 4, the banknote B can be neatly aligned with respect to the banknote B of various dimensions. it can.
 また、位置決め部47の取替だけでなく、紙幣Bの長手方向寸法に応じて整列機構49のアーム49aの移動量を調整することによって、位置決め部47の種類を低減しつつ、より多くの種類の紙幣Bに対応することができる。つまり、長手方向寸法が所定の範囲内の紙幣Bについては、位置決め部47を取り替えることなく、アーム49aの移動量の調整によって対応することができる。つまり、1種類の位置決め部47でより多くの種類の紙幣Bの位置決めを行うことができる。 Further, not only replacement of the positioning portion 47 but also adjustment of the amount of movement of the arm 49a of the alignment mechanism 49 according to the longitudinal dimension of the banknote B allows more types of positioning portions 47 to be reduced. It is possible to correspond to the bill B. That is, banknotes B having a longitudinal dimension within a predetermined range can be dealt with by adjusting the movement amount of the arm 49a without replacing the positioning portion 47. That is, more types of banknotes B can be positioned with one type of positioning portion 47.
 さらに、位置決め部47は、扉46に設けられており、扉46は、フレーム46aの一辺に回転自在に開閉するように取り付けられている。扉46を開くことによって、位置決め部47が結束スタッカ4の外部に露出する。つまり、位置決め部47の取替時には、扉46を開くことによって取替作業を容易に行うことができる。 Further, the positioning portion 47 is provided on the door 46, and the door 46 is attached to one side of the frame 46a so as to open and close freely. By opening the door 46, the positioning portion 47 is exposed to the outside of the binding stacker 4. That is, when the positioning portion 47 is replaced, the replacement work can be easily performed by opening the door 46.
 尚、第2位置決め部47Bは、第1位置決め部47Aに取り付けられ、第3位置決め部47Cは、第1位置決め部47Aに取り付けられているが、この構成に限られるものではない。つまり、第2位置決め部47B及び第3位置決め部47Cは、扉46に直接取り付けられる構成であってもよい。その場合、第2位置決め部47B及び第3位置決め部47Cは、それぞれの位置決め位置Pに応じた厚みを有する。 The second positioning portion 47B is attached to the first positioning portion 47A, and the third positioning portion 47C is attached to the first positioning portion 47A, but is not limited to this configuration. In other words, the second positioning portion 47B and the third positioning portion 47C may be configured to be directly attached to the door 46. In that case, the 2nd positioning part 47B and the 3rd positioning part 47C have thickness according to each positioning position P.
 以上のように、紙幣処理装置100は、紙幣Bを重ねて集積する結束スタッカ4を備え、結束スタッカ4は、集積された紙幣Bの一辺である第1辺b1と対向し、第1辺b1を所定の位置決め位置Pに位置決めする位置決め部47と、紙幣Bのうち第1辺b1に対向する一辺である第3辺b3を押して、第1辺b1を位置決め部47に接触させる押し当て部49とを有し、位置決め部47は、取替可能に構成され、取り替えられることによって位置決め位置Pを変更する。 As described above, the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes the binding stacker 4 that stacks and stacks the banknotes B. The binding stacker 4 faces the first side b1 that is one side of the stacked banknotes B, and the first side b1. The pressing portion 49 that presses the positioning portion 47 that positions the first side b1 of the banknote B and the third side b3 that is opposite to the first side b1 to contact the first side b1 with the positioning unit 47. The positioning unit 47 is configured to be replaceable, and changes the positioning position P by being replaced.
 この構成によれば、紙幣処理装置100そのものを変更しなくても、位置決め部47さえ取り替えれば、様々な寸法の紙幣Bを結束スタッカ4内できれいに整列させることができる。 According to this configuration, even if the banknote processing apparatus 100 itself is not changed, the banknotes B having various dimensions can be neatly arranged in the binding stacker 4 as long as the positioning unit 47 is replaced.
 〈装置のコンパクト化〉
 また、紙幣処理装置100は、投出部11の構成を工夫することによって、紙幣処理装置100のコンパクト化を図っている。
<Compact equipment>
Moreover, the banknote processing apparatus 100 is trying to make the banknote processing apparatus 100 compact by devising the structure of the throwing-out part 11. FIG.
 詳しくは、従来より、紙葉類処理装置として、バラ状態の紙葉類を取り込んで、結束して投出するものが知られている。(例えば、特開2002-197509号公報)。 Specifically, conventionally, as a paper sheet processing apparatus, one that takes in paper sheets in a loose state, binds them, and throws them out is known. (For example, JP 2002-197509 A).
 ところで、紙葉類処理装置の内部のレイアウトは様々であり、レイアウトの関係上、紙葉類を取込部から筐体内に取り込み、筐体内で結束した後、結束した紙葉類を取込部の上方に投出する場合がある。例えば、紙葉類処理装置をコンパクトに構成する結果、そのようなレイアウトとなる場合がある。 By the way, the internal layout of the paper sheet processing apparatus is various, and due to the layout, the paper sheet is taken into the housing from the take-in unit, bundled in the housing, and then bundled paper take-in unit It may be thrown above. For example, such a layout may be obtained as a result of the compact configuration of the paper sheet processing apparatus.
 しかしながら、取込部には取込前の紙葉類が載置されるため、ある程度のスペースが必要である。そのため、取込部の上方に紙葉類を投出すると、紙葉類をそのまま下方に落下させるスペースがなく、その場に紙葉類を貯めるとすると、紙葉類処理装置の寸法が上下に拡大されてしまう。 However, a certain amount of space is required because the paper before loading is placed on the take-in portion. Therefore, when a paper sheet is thrown out above the take-in portion, there is no space for dropping the paper sheet as it is, and if the paper sheet is stored on the spot, the size of the paper sheet processing device is increased vertically. It will be enlarged.
 ここに開示された技術は、かかる点に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的とするところは、結束後の紙葉類が取込部の上方に搬送されてくる構成において、紙葉類処理装置をコンパクトに形成することにある。 The technology disclosed herein has been made in view of the above points, and the object of the technique is to process the paper sheets in a configuration in which the paper sheets after being bundled are conveyed above the take-in portion. The object is to make the device compact.
 この目的を達成するために、ここに開示された紙葉類処理装置は、以下のような構成となっている。 In order to achieve this object, the paper sheet processing apparatus disclosed herein has the following configuration.
 [1-1]紙葉類を取り込んで結束した後、該紙葉類を投出する紙葉類処理装置であって、
  筐体(筐体12)と、
  紙葉類を前記筐体内に取り込む取込部(ホッパ部2)と、
  結束された紙葉類を前記筐体外に投出する投出部(投出部11)とを備え、
  前記投出部は、結束された紙葉類を前記取込部の上方の受取位置において受け取って、該紙葉類を前記取込部の上方から側方へずれた投出位置へスライドさせて投出するスライド部(スライド部112)を有していることを特徴とする。
[1-1] A paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in and binds paper sheets and then throws out the paper sheets,
A housing (housing 12);
A take-in part (hopper part 2) for taking paper sheets into the housing;
A throwing unit (throwing unit 11) for throwing the bound paper sheets out of the housing;
The throwing-out unit receives the bound paper sheets at a receiving position above the take-in part, and slides the paper sheets to a throw-out position shifted laterally from above the take-in part. It has the slide part (slide part 112) to throw out, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.
 この構成によれば、取込部の上方へ搬送されてきた、結束後の紙葉類(以下、「結束紙葉類」と称する)をスライド部が受け取り、スライド部がそこから側方へずれた投出位置までスライドし、投出位置において結束紙葉類を投出する。つまり、結束紙葉類は、取込部から側方にずれた位置で投出される。 According to this configuration, the slide unit receives the bound paper sheets (hereinafter referred to as “bundled paper sheets”) that have been conveyed above the take-in unit, and the slide unit is shifted laterally therefrom. And slides the bound paper sheets at the throwing position. That is, the bound paper sheets are thrown out at a position shifted laterally from the take-in portion.
 こうすることにより、結束紙葉類を取込部へ落下させることが回避される。また、取込部の上方に結束紙葉類を貯めておくスペースを確保する必要がないので、紙葉類処理装置をコンパクトにすることができる。 By doing this, it is possible to avoid dropping the bound paper sheets into the take-in part. In addition, since it is not necessary to secure a space for storing the bound paper sheets above the take-in portion, the paper sheet processing apparatus can be made compact.
 [1-2]
  [1-1]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  前記取込部及び前記投出部は、前記筐体の同じ側面(第1側面123)に設けられていることを特徴とする。
[1-2]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [1-1],
The take-in part and the dispensing part are provided on the same side surface (first side surface 123) of the housing.
 [1-3]
  [1-1]又は[1-2]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  前記スライド部は、紙葉類を受け止めて紙葉類の落下を規制する受け止め状態と、紙葉類の受け止めを解除して紙葉類を落下させる解除状態とに切り替えられる受け止め部(受け止め部116)を有し、
  前記受け止め部は、前記受取位置では前記受け止め状態となり、前記投出位置へスライドすることによって前記解除状態となることを特徴とする。
[1-3]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [1-1] or [1-2],
The slide portion receives a paper sheet and controls a receiving state (reception unit 116) that can be switched between a receiving state that restricts the falling of the paper sheet and a released state that releases the paper sheet and drops the paper sheet. )
The receiving portion is in the receiving state at the receiving position, and is in the released state by sliding to the dispensing position.
 この構成によれば、受取位置においては、結束紙葉類が受け止め部により受け止められ、落下が規制される。そして、投出位置においては、受け止め部が解除状態になることによって、受け止め部による結束紙葉類の落下の規制が解除され、結束紙葉類が落下する。 According to this configuration, at the receiving position, the bound paper sheets are received by the receiving portion, and dropping is restricted. And in a throwing-out position, when a receiving part will be in a cancellation | release state, the restriction | limiting of the fall of binding paper sheets by a receiving part will be cancelled | released, and binding paper sheets will fall.
 [1-4]
  [1-3]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  前記受け止め部は、前記受取位置と前記投出位置の間をカム機構によって案内され、該カム機構の案内により該受取位置においては前記受け止め状態となる一方、該投出位置においては前記解除状態となることを特徴とする。
[1-4]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [1-3],
The receiving portion is guided between the receiving position and the throwing position by a cam mechanism, and is in the receiving state at the receiving position by the guide of the cam mechanism, while at the releasing position is in the released state. It is characterized by becoming.
 この構成によれば、受け止め部は、受取位置へ移動することによって自動的に受け止め状態となる一方、投出位置へ移動することによって自動的に解除状態となる。つまり、受け止め部を受け止め状態と解除状態とに切り替えるためだけの特段の駆動源及び駆動機構を設ける必要がなく、スライド部の構成を簡便にすることができる。 According to this configuration, the receiving unit automatically enters the receiving state by moving to the receiving position, and automatically enters the released state by moving to the dispensing position. That is, it is not necessary to provide a special drive source and drive mechanism only for switching the receiving portion between the receiving state and the release state, and the configuration of the slide portion can be simplified.
 [1-5]
  [1-3]又は[1-4]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  前記スライド部は、前記受取位置と前記投出位置との間でスライドするように構成され、紙葉類を搬送する搬送部(搬送部115)を有し、
  前記受け止め部は、前記搬送部と共にスライドすることを特徴とする。
[1-5]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [1-3] or [1-4],
The slide unit is configured to slide between the receiving position and the dispensing position, and includes a transport unit (a transport unit 115) that transports paper sheets,
The receiving part slides with the conveying part.
 この構成によれば、結束紙葉類は、受け止め部により落下が規制された状態で、搬送部によって受取位置から投出位置へ搬送される。 According to this configuration, the bundled paper sheets are transported from the receiving position to the dispensing position by the transport section in a state where dropping is regulated by the receiving section.
 [1-6]
  [1-5]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  前記投出部は、前記受取位置において前記搬送部上の紙葉類の有無を光を送受信することによって検出する第1センサ(第1センサ117)と、前記投出位置において前記搬送部上の紙葉類の有無を光を送受信することによって検出する第2センサ(第2センサ118)とを有し、
  前記搬送部には、前記受取位置において前記第1センサからの光を通過させる第1孔(第1孔115g)と、前記投出位置において前記第2センサからの光を通過させる第2孔(第2孔115h)とが設けられていることを特徴とする。
[1-6]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [1-5],
The ejection unit includes a first sensor (first sensor 117) that detects the presence or absence of paper sheets on the transport unit at the receiving position by transmitting and receiving light; and A second sensor (second sensor 118) for detecting the presence or absence of paper sheets by transmitting and receiving light;
The transport unit includes a first hole (first hole 115g) through which light from the first sensor passes at the receiving position, and a second hole (through the light from the second sensor at the discharge position). The second hole 115h) is provided.
 この構成によれば、受取位置において紙葉類の有無を検出する第1センサと、投出位置において紙葉類の有無を検出する第2センサとが別々に設けられている。かかる構成では、該センサは搬送部を通過して送受信される光を用いて紙葉類の有無を検出するため、搬送部には光が通過する開口部を設ける必要がある。ここで、搬送部に開口部を1つだけ設ける場合には、第1センサは、受取位置に位置する搬送部の開口部を光が通過するように配置され、第2センサは、投出位置に位置する搬送部の開口部が光を通過するように配置される必要がある。つまり、第1センサ及び第2センサの配置が開口部の位置に拘束されてしまう。それに対し、前記の構成によれば、受取位置において第1センサからの光を通過させる第1開口部と、投出位置において第2センサからの光を通過させる第2開口部とが搬送部に別々に設けられているので、第1センサ及び第2センサの位置は、それぞれ第1開口部及び第2開口部との関係で適宜設定すればよい。つまり、第1センサの位置は、第2センサ及び第2開口部とは無関係に、第1開口部との関係で決めればよい。また、第2センサの位置は、第1センサ及び第1開口部とは無関係に、第2開口部との関係で決めればよい。 According to this configuration, the first sensor that detects the presence or absence of paper sheets at the receiving position and the second sensor that detects the presence or absence of paper sheets at the dispensing position are separately provided. In such a configuration, since the sensor detects the presence or absence of paper sheets using light transmitted and received through the transport unit, it is necessary to provide an opening through which the light passes in the transport unit. Here, when only one opening is provided in the transport unit, the first sensor is disposed so that light passes through the opening of the transport unit located at the receiving position, and the second sensor is disposed at the ejection position. It is necessary to arrange so that the opening of the transport unit located at the position passes through the light. That is, the arrangement of the first sensor and the second sensor is restricted by the position of the opening. On the other hand, according to the above-described configuration, the first opening that allows the light from the first sensor to pass at the receiving position and the second opening that allows the light from the second sensor to pass at the ejection position are provided in the transport unit. Since they are provided separately, the positions of the first sensor and the second sensor may be appropriately set in relation to the first opening and the second opening, respectively. That is, the position of the first sensor may be determined based on the relationship with the first opening regardless of the second sensor and the second opening. Further, the position of the second sensor may be determined in relation to the second opening regardless of the first sensor and the first opening.
 〈紙葉類の散乱防止〉
 また、紙葉類処理装置100は、搬送部のうち紙幣Bと接触する部分をゴムで構成することによって搬送中の紙幣Bの散乱を防止している。
<Preventing scattering of paper sheets>
Moreover, the paper sheet processing apparatus 100 is preventing the scattering of the banknote B in conveyance by comprising the part which contacts the banknote B among rubber | gum in rubber | gum.
 詳しくは、従来より、紙葉類を取り込んで所定の処理を施す紙葉類処理装置が知られている。例えば、特開2002-197509号公報に記載された紙葉類処理装置は、取り込んだ紙葉類を計数し、計数した紙葉類を集積部に一時的に集積し、集積した紙葉類を一定枚数ごとに結束部において結束する。このとき、集積部に集積された紙葉類は、搬送部によって結束部まで搬送される。 Specifically, conventionally, a paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in paper sheets and performs a predetermined process is known. For example, a paper sheet processing apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-197509 counts captured paper sheets, temporarily accumulates the counted paper sheets in a stacking unit, and collects the accumulated paper sheets. Bundling is performed at a bundling portion every fixed number of sheets. At this time, the paper sheets accumulated in the accumulation unit are conveyed to the bundling unit by the conveyance unit.
 ところで、前記紙葉類処理装置のように、搬送部によって紙葉類を搬送する構成においては、搬送中に紙葉類がばらけてしまうと、装置内に紙葉類が散乱してしまい、その後の復旧作業が繁雑になってしまう。 By the way, in the configuration in which the paper sheet is transported by the transport unit like the paper sheet processing apparatus, if the paper sheet is scattered during transport, the paper sheet is scattered in the apparatus, Subsequent recovery work becomes complicated.
 ここに開示された技術は、かかる点に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的とするとこ ろは、搬送中の紙葉類が散乱することを防止することにある。 The technique disclosed here has been made in view of the above points, and the purpose of the technique is to prevent scattering of paper sheets being conveyed.
 この目的を達成するために、ここに開示された紙葉類処理装置は、以下のような構成となっている。 In order to achieve this object, the paper sheet processing apparatus disclosed herein has the following configuration.
 [2-1]
  紙葉類を取り込んで所定の処理を施す紙葉類処理装置であって、
  取り込まれた紙葉類を所定の場所へ搬送する搬送部(第2搬送部8及び第3搬送部10)を備え、
  前記搬送部のうち紙葉類と接触する部分は、ゴム又は樹脂で構成されていることを特徴とする。
[2-1]
A paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in paper sheets and performs predetermined processing,
A transport unit (second transport unit 8 and third transport unit 10) for transporting the captured paper sheets to a predetermined place;
The portion of the transport unit that contacts the paper sheet is made of rubber or resin.
 この構成によれば、搬送部のうち紙葉類と接触する部分(以下、「接触部」という)がゴム又は樹脂で構成されているので、接触部が金属で構成されている場合と比較して摩擦力を高めることができ、搬送中の紙葉類の散乱を防止することができる。 According to this configuration, since the portion of the transport unit that contacts the paper sheet (hereinafter referred to as “contact portion”) is made of rubber or resin, it is compared with the case where the contact portion is made of metal. Thus, the frictional force can be increased and scattering of paper sheets being conveyed can be prevented.
 [2-2]
  [2-1]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  紙葉類を集積する集積部(結束スタッカ4)と、
  紙葉類を結束する結束部(結束部9)とを備え、
  前記搬送部は、前記集積部に集積された紙葉類を前記結束部へ搬送する結束前搬送部(第2搬送部8)を含み、
  前記結束前搬送部のうち紙葉類と接触する部分(接触部81c,81d)の少なくとも一部は、ゴム又は樹脂で構成されていることを特徴とする。
[2-2]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [2-1],
A stacking unit (bundling stacker 4) for stacking paper sheets;
A bundling portion (bundling portion 9) for bundling paper sheets,
The transport unit includes a pre-bundling transport unit (second transport unit 8) that transports the paper sheets accumulated in the stacking unit to the binding unit,
At least a part of a portion ( contact portion 81c, 81d) in contact with the paper sheet in the pre-bundling conveyance portion is made of rubber or resin.
 この構成によれば、結束前搬送部が搬送する紙葉類は結束前の状態であるので、搬送中に紙葉類がばらけてしまうと、紙葉類が散乱してしまう。また、結束前搬送部による搬送中に紙葉類がずれてしまうと、その後の結束をうまく行えないか、又は、結束された紙葉類の品質が悪化してしまう。それに対し、結束前搬送部のうち紙葉類と接触する部分(以下、「接触部」という)の少なくとも一部をゴム又は樹脂で構成することによって、接触部と紙葉類との間の摩擦力を向上させ、紙葉類の散乱、ずれ等を防止することができる。 According to this configuration, since the paper sheets conveyed by the pre-bundling conveyance unit are in a state before bundling, if the paper sheets are scattered during conveyance, the paper sheets are scattered. Further, if the paper sheets are displaced during conveyance by the pre-bundling conveyance unit, the subsequent bundling cannot be performed well, or the quality of the bundled paper sheets is deteriorated. On the other hand, the friction between the contact portion and the paper sheet is configured by forming at least a part of the pre-bundling conveyance portion in contact with the paper sheet (hereinafter referred to as “contact portion”) with rubber or resin. It is possible to improve the force and prevent paper sheets from being scattered or displaced.
 [2-3]
  [2-2]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  前記搬送部は、前記結束部において結束された紙葉類を搬送する結束後搬送部(第3搬送部10)を含み、
  前記結束後搬送部のうち紙葉類と接触する部分(接触部101a,102a)の少なくとも一部は、ゴム又は樹脂で構成されていることを特徴とする。
[2-3]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [2-2],
The transport unit includes a post-bundling transport unit (third transport unit 10) that transports the paper sheets bound in the binding unit,
At least a part of a portion ( contact portion 101a, 102a) in contact with the paper sheet in the post-bundling conveyance portion is made of rubber or resin.
 この構成によれば、結束後搬送部の接触部の少なくとも一部がゴム又は樹脂で構成されているので、結束後の紙葉類の搬送中に、検束後搬送部から紙葉類が落下することが防止される。 According to this configuration, since at least a part of the contact portion of the post-bundling conveyance unit is made of rubber or resin, the paper sheets fall from the post-bundling conveyance unit during conveyance of the paper sheets after bundling. It is prevented.
 [2-4]
  [2-2]又は[2-3]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  前記結束部は、紙葉類を挟んで圧縮するクランプ部(上クランプ部941,942及び下クランプ部943,944)を有し、該クランプ部により圧縮した紙葉類を結束するように構成されており、
  前記クランプ部のうち紙葉類と接触する部分の少なくとも一部(第1及び第2接触部941a,941b、第1~第3接触部942a~942c、第1及び第2接触部943a,943b及び第1及び第2接触部944a,944b)は、ゴム又は樹脂で構成されていることを特徴とする。
[2-4]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [2-2] or [2-3],
The bundling portion includes clamp portions ( upper clamp portions 941, 942 and lower clamp portions 943, 944) that compress the paper sheets with the paper sheets interposed therebetween, and is configured to bind the paper sheets compressed by the clamp portions. And
At least a part of the clamp portion that contacts the paper sheet (first and second contact portions 941a and 941b, first to third contact portions 942a to 942c, first and second contact portions 943a and 943b, and The first and second contact portions 944a and 944b) are made of rubber or resin.
 この構成によれば、搬送部に加えて、クランプ部の接触部の少なくとも一部もゴム又は樹脂で構成されている。そのため、結束時においても紙葉類が散乱することを防止することができる。 According to this configuration, in addition to the conveyance unit, at least a part of the contact portion of the clamp unit is also formed of rubber or resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the paper sheets from being scattered even during binding.
 〈メンテナンス性の向上〉
 また、紙幣処理装置100は、結束スタッカ4、結束部9及び投出部11の配置及びそれらの要素間の紙幣Bの搬送経路を工夫することによって、紙幣処理装置100のメンテナンス性を向上させている。
<Improvement of maintainability>
Moreover, the banknote processing apparatus 100 improves the maintainability of the banknote processing apparatus 100 by devising arrangement | positioning of the binding stacker 4, the binding part 9, and the throwing-out part 11, and the conveyance path | route of the banknote B between those elements. Yes.
 詳しくは、従来より、紙葉類を取り込んで結束する紙葉類処理装置が知られている。例えば、特開2002-197509号公報には、バラ状態の紙葉類を取り込んで、結束して投出する紙葉類処理装置が開示されている。この紙葉類処理装置では、バラ状態の紙葉類が装置の上部から投入され、結束後の紙葉類が装置の下部から投出される。投入部に載置された紙葉類は、その短手方向へ取り込まれる。その後、紙葉類は、その短手方向と進行方向とが一致した状態で、集積部、結束部、放出口へと順次搬送される。 Specifically, conventionally, a paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in and binds paper sheets is known. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-197509 discloses a paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in paper sheets in a loose state, binds them, and throws them out. In this paper sheet processing apparatus, loose paper sheets are input from the upper part of the apparatus, and the bound paper sheets are discharged from the lower part of the apparatus. The paper sheets placed on the input unit are taken in the short direction. Thereafter, the paper sheets are sequentially conveyed to the stacking unit, the binding unit, and the discharge port in a state where the short side direction and the traveling direction coincide with each other.
 ところで、どのような装置であってもメンテナンスは必要であり、その際には装置を開けて、装置内部に対して作業を行う必要がある。このようなメンテナンスを考慮すると、装置内部にはある程度の空間が存在することが好ましいが、そのような空間を設けることは、装置のコンパクト化の観点から難しい場合が多い。前述の紙葉類処理装置においても、装置内には、紙葉類を投入部から集積部まで搬送する搬送路や、紙葉類を集積部から結束部まで搬送する移送機構や、紙葉類を結束部から放出口まで搬送する搬送手段等が密集しており、メンテナンス用の空間がほとんどない。 By the way, maintenance is necessary for any device, and in that case, it is necessary to open the device and perform work on the inside of the device. Considering such maintenance, it is preferable that a certain amount of space exists in the apparatus, but it is often difficult to provide such a space from the viewpoint of making the apparatus compact. Also in the paper sheet processing apparatus described above, the apparatus includes a transport path for transporting paper sheets from the input unit to the stacking unit, a transport mechanism for transporting paper sheets from the stacking unit to the bundling unit, and paper sheets. Conveying means and the like for conveying the gas from the bundling portion to the discharge port are dense and there is almost no space for maintenance.
 ここに開示された技術は、かかる点に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的とするところは、装置内部にメンテナンス用のスペースを確保することにある。 The technology disclosed herein has been made in view of the above points, and the object is to secure a space for maintenance inside the apparatus.
 この目的を達成するために、ここに開示された紙葉類処理装置は、以下のような構成となっている。 In order to achieve this object, the paper sheet processing apparatus disclosed herein has the following configuration.
 [3-1]
  紙葉類を取り込んで結束する紙葉類処理装置であって、
  紙葉類を集積する集積部(結束スタッカ4)と、
  紙葉類を結束する結束部(結束部9)と、
  前記集積部に集積された紙葉類を前記結束部へ搬送する搬送部(第2搬送部8及び第3搬送部10)とを備え、
  前記結束部は、水平面に直交する方向を向いて見た場合において、前記搬送部により前記集積部から紙葉類が抜き出される所定の第1搬送方向(第1水平方向)に対しオフセットした位置に配置されており、
  前記搬送部は、
   前記集積部から紙葉類を前記第1搬送方向に抜き出した後、該第1搬送方向と交差する第2搬送方向(第2水平方向)へ紙葉類を搬送することによって紙葉類を前記結束部へ搬入し、
   結束後の紙葉類を前記第2搬送方向において該結束部へ搬入したときとは反対向きに搬出し、その後、前記第1搬送方向において前記集積部から抜き出したときと同じ向きに搬送することを特徴とする。
[3-1]
A paper sheet processing apparatus that takes in and binds paper sheets,
A stacking unit (bundling stacker 4) for stacking paper sheets;
A binding unit (binding unit 9) for binding paper sheets;
A transport unit (second transport unit 8 and third transport unit 10) that transports the paper sheets stacked in the stacking unit to the binding unit;
The binding unit is a position that is offset with respect to a predetermined first transport direction (first horizontal direction) in which sheets are extracted from the stacking unit by the transport unit when viewed in a direction orthogonal to a horizontal plane. Are located in
The transport unit is
After the paper sheets are extracted from the stacking unit in the first transport direction, the paper sheets are transported in a second transport direction (second horizontal direction) that intersects the first transport direction. Bring it into the bundling section,
The paper sheets after being bundled are unloaded in the direction opposite to when they are carried into the bundling section in the second transport direction, and then transported in the same direction as when they are extracted from the stacking section in the first transport direction. It is characterized by.
 この構成によれば、集積部から第1搬送方向に抜き出された紙葉類は、そのまま第1搬送方向へ搬送されて結束部へ搬入されるのではなく、第1搬送方向から第2搬送方向へ屈曲して結束部へ搬入される。つまり、結束部は、平面視(水平面に直交する方向を向いて見た場合)において、集積部に対して第1搬送方向に並んで配置されるのではなく、第1搬送方向に対して側方にオフセットした位置に配置されている。そして、結束後の紙葉類は、第2搬送方向において結束部へ搬入したときとは反対向きに搬出された後、第1搬送方向において集積部から抜き出したときと同じ向きに搬送される。そのため、集積部に対して第1搬送方向には、紙葉類が搬送されるスペースが設けられることになる。その結果、メンテナンス時にはこの搬送スペースを利用してメンテナンスを行うことができる。 According to this configuration, the paper sheets extracted from the stacking unit in the first conveyance direction are not directly conveyed in the first conveyance direction and carried into the bundling unit, but are conveyed from the first conveyance direction to the second conveyance direction. It is bent in the direction and carried into the binding part. That is, the binding unit is not arranged side by side in the first transport direction with respect to the stacking unit in a plan view (when viewed in a direction orthogonal to the horizontal plane), but on the side of the first transport direction. It is arranged at a position offset toward Then, after being bundled, the paper sheets are conveyed in the opposite direction to that when they are carried into the bundling portion in the second conveyance direction, and then conveyed in the same direction as when they are extracted from the stacking portion in the first conveyance direction. Therefore, a space for transporting paper sheets is provided in the first transport direction with respect to the stacking unit. As a result, maintenance can be performed using this conveyance space during maintenance.
 [3-2]
  [3-1]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  前記搬送部は、紙葉類を把持した状態で移動させることを特徴とする。
[3-2]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [3-1],
The transport unit is moved in a state where a paper sheet is held.
 この構成によれば、紙葉類は、ローラ対などによって搬送されるのではなく、搬送部によって把持された状態で搬送される。つまり、ローラ対によって紙葉類を搬送する構成においては、ローラ対を含む搬送機構を配置する必要があり、装置内部にスペースを確保することが難しくなる。それに対し、搬送部によって紙葉類を把持した状態で紙葉類を移動させる構成においては、搬送部自体が移動するので、その移動スペースが設けられることになる。つまり、搬送部の移動スペースが、メンテナンススペースとなる。 According to this configuration, the paper sheet is not transported by a roller pair or the like, but is transported while being gripped by the transport unit. That is, in a configuration in which paper sheets are conveyed by a roller pair, it is necessary to arrange a conveyance mechanism including the roller pair, and it is difficult to secure a space inside the apparatus. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the paper sheet is moved in a state where the paper sheet is gripped by the transport unit, the transport unit itself moves, so that the movement space is provided. That is, the moving space of the transport unit becomes a maintenance space.
 [3-3]
  [3-1]又は[3-2]に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  紙葉類を投出する投出部(投出部11)を備え、
  前記搬送部は、結束後の紙葉類を前記第2搬送方向において該結束部へ搬入したときとは反対向きに搬出した後、前記第1搬送方向において前記集積部から抜き出したときと同じ向きに搬送して前記投出部へ搬送することを特徴とする。
[3-3]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to [3-1] or [3-2],
Equipped with a throwing section (throwing section 11) for throwing out paper sheets,
The transport unit has the same orientation as when the bundled paper sheets are unloaded from the stacking unit in the first transport direction after being transported in the second transport direction in the direction opposite to that when transported to the binding unit And transported to the dispensing unit.
 この構成によれば、集積部と投出部との間に、第1搬送方向に延びる搬送スペースが確保される。 According to this configuration, a conveyance space extending in the first conveyance direction is ensured between the stacking unit and the dispensing unit.
 [3-4]
  [3-1]乃至[3-3]の何れか1つに記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  紙葉類を取り込む取込部(ホッパ部)を備え、
  前記投出部は、前記搬送部が前記第1搬送方向へ搬送してきた結束後の紙葉類を前記取込部の上方の受取位置において受け取って、該紙葉類を前記第2搬送方向へ前記結束部と同じ側へスライドさせて、所定の投出位置において該紙葉類を投出するスライド部(スライド部112)を有していることを特徴とする。
[3-4]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to any one of [3-1] to [3-3],
It has a take-in part (hopper part) that takes in paper sheets,
The dispensing unit receives the bundled paper sheets that the transport unit has transported in the first transport direction at a receiving position above the take-in unit, and the paper sheets are transported in the second transport direction. It has a slide part (slide part 112) which slides to the same side as the said bundling part, and throws out this paper sheet in a predetermined throwing position.
 この構成によれば、結束後の紙葉類は、搬送部によって取込部の上方の受取位置に一旦放出される。この受取位置は取込部の上方なので、紙葉類をそのまま下方に落下させるスペースがなく、その場に紙葉類を貯めるとすると、紙葉類処理装置の寸法が上下に拡大されてしまう。それに対し、受取位置で受け取った紙葉類をスライド部によりスライドさせることによって、紙葉類を取込部へ落下させることが回避される。また、取込部の上方に紙葉類を貯めておくスペースを確保する必要がないので、紙葉類処理装置をコンパクトにすることができる。さらに、紙葉類を第2搬送方向において、紙葉類を結束部へ搬入するのと同じ側へスライドさせるので、紙葉類を受取位置からスライドさせて投出する構成であっても、紙葉類処理装置の大型化を抑制することができる。つまり、結束部は、第1搬送方向に対してオフセットした位置に設けられており、紙葉類処理装置は、結束部をオフセットした分だけ拡大されている。そして、投出位置は、第1搬送方向に対して結束部と同じ側にオフセットされている。このように、結束部のオフセットにより紙葉類処理装置が拡大されていることを利用して、投出位置も受取位置から側方へオフセットさせた位置に設けることができる。 According to this configuration, the bound paper sheets are once discharged to the receiving position above the take-in section by the transport section. Since this receiving position is above the take-in portion, there is no space for dropping the paper sheets as they are, and if the paper sheets are stored on the spot, the size of the paper sheet processing device is increased vertically. On the other hand, the paper sheet received at the receiving position is slid by the slide part, so that the paper sheet is prevented from dropping to the take-in part. Further, since it is not necessary to secure a space for storing paper sheets above the take-in portion, the paper sheet processing apparatus can be made compact. Further, since the paper sheets are slid in the second transport direction to the same side as the paper sheets are carried into the bundling portion, the paper sheets are slid out of the receiving position and thrown out. An increase in the size of the leaf processing apparatus can be suppressed. In other words, the binding unit is provided at a position offset with respect to the first transport direction, and the paper sheet processing apparatus is enlarged by an amount corresponding to the offset of the binding unit. The throwing position is offset to the same side as the binding unit with respect to the first transport direction. In this way, by utilizing the fact that the sheet processing apparatus is enlarged due to the offset of the bundling portion, it is also possible to provide the dispensing position at a position offset laterally from the receiving position.
 [3-5]
  [3-1]乃至[3-4]の何れか1つに記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
  結束部は、テープ(テープT)でテープ輪(テープ輪L)を作成し、該テープ輪内に紙葉類が搬入された後に、該テープを引き締めて該紙葉類を結束するように構成されており、
  前記第2搬送方向は、紙葉類を前記テープ輪内へ搬入する方向と一致することを特徴とする。
[3-5]
In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to any one of [3-1] to [3-4],
The bundling portion is configured to create a tape ring (tape ring L) with tape (tape T), and after the paper sheets are carried into the tape ring, the tape is tightened to bind the paper sheets. Has been
The second transport direction is the same as a direction in which a paper sheet is carried into the tape ring.
 この構成によれば、紙葉類は、結束部においてテープ輪の中へ搬入される。そして、このように紙葉類をテープ輪の中へ搬入する構成と、紙葉類を第1搬送方向から第2搬送方向へ方向転換して結束部へ搬入し、第2搬送方向へ引き返して、第1搬送方向へ再び搬送するという搬送形態は、非常によく適合する。特に、第1搬送方向とテープを巻き付ける方向とが一致する場合(例えば、紙葉類を短手方向に搬送し、テープを紙葉類の短手方向に巻き付ける場合)には、前述のような搬送形態とすることによって、紙葉類の搬送及び、テープの巻き付けをスムーズに行うことができる。それに加えて、集積部に対して第1搬送方向には、結束部を配置することなく、搬送スペースを確保することができる。 According to this configuration, the paper sheet is carried into the tape loop at the binding portion. In this way, the paper sheet is transported into the tape loop, and the paper sheet is changed from the first transport direction to the second transport direction, transported to the binding unit, and returned to the second transport direction. The transport mode of transporting again in the first transport direction is very well suited. In particular, when the first transport direction coincides with the tape winding direction (for example, when the paper sheet is transported in the short direction and the tape is wound in the short direction of the paper sheet), as described above. By setting it as a conveyance form, conveyance of paper sheets and winding of a tape can be performed smoothly. In addition, a transport space can be secured in the first transport direction with respect to the stacking unit without disposing a binding unit.
 《その他の実施形態》
 以上のように、本出願において開示する技術の例示として、前記実施形態を説明した。しかしながら、本開示における技術は、これに限定されず、適宜、変更、置き換え、付加、省略などを行った実施の形態にも適用可能である。また、前記実施形態で説明した各構成要素を組み合わせて、新たな実施の形態とすることも可能である。また、添付図面および詳細な説明に記載された構成要素の中には、課題解決のために必須な構成要素だけでなく、前記技術を例示するために、課題解決のためには必須でない構成要素も含まれ得る。そのため、それらの必須ではない構成要素が添付図面や詳細な説明に記載されていることをもって、直ちに、それらの必須ではない構成要素が必須であるとの認定をするべきではない。
<< Other Embodiments >>
As described above, the embodiment has been described as an example of the technique disclosed in the present application. However, the technology in the present disclosure is not limited to this, and can also be applied to an embodiment in which changes, replacements, additions, omissions, and the like are appropriately performed. Moreover, it is also possible to combine each component demonstrated by the said embodiment and it can also be set as a new embodiment. In addition, among the components described in the attached drawings and detailed description, not only the components essential for solving the problem, but also the components not essential for solving the problem in order to illustrate the technology. May also be included. Therefore, it should not be immediately recognized that these non-essential components are essential as those non-essential components are described in the accompanying drawings and detailed description.
 前記実施形態について、以下のような構成としてもよい。 The above-described embodiment may be configured as follows.
 前記実施形態では、紙葉類処理装置の例として紙幣処理装置100について説明したが、紙葉類処理装置はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、紙葉類の識別、分配、集積は別の装置で行い、紙葉類処理装置は、バラ状態の紙葉類を搬送して集積部に集積し、該集積部に集積された紙葉類を搬送部によって別の場所へ搬送する処理のみを行う装置であってもよい。また、紙葉類の例として紙幣について説明したが、紙葉類は紙幣に限られず、商品券等の金券であってもよい。 In the embodiment, the banknote processing apparatus 100 has been described as an example of the paper sheet processing apparatus, but the paper sheet processing apparatus is not limited to this. For example, paper sheets are identified, distributed, and collected by another device, and the paper sheet processing apparatus conveys the paper sheets in a rose state and accumulates them in the accumulating unit, and the paper sheets accumulated in the accumulating unit. The apparatus which performs only the process which conveys a kind to another place by a conveyance part may be sufficient. Moreover, although the banknote was demonstrated as an example of paper sheets, paper sheets are not restricted to a banknote, A cash voucher, such as a gift certificate, may be sufficient.
 前記紙幣処理装置100の構成は、一例であって、これに限られるものではない。例えば、紙幣処理装置100は、結束スタッカ4が2つ設けられ、非結束スタッカ5が2つ設けられ、リジェクトスタッカ6が1つ設けられているが、これらの個数はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、結束スタッカ4は、1つ又は3つ以上であってもよい。非結束スタッカ5は、1つ又は3つ以上であってもよい。リジェクトスタッカ6は、2以上であってもよい。あるいは、非結束スタッカ5及びリジェクトスタッカ6を省略してもよい。 The configuration of the banknote handling apparatus 100 is an example and is not limited thereto. For example, the banknote handling apparatus 100 includes two binding stackers 4, two non-binding stackers 5, and one reject stacker 6, but the number of these is not limited to this. . For example, the number of binding stackers 4 may be one or three or more. The number of non-binding stackers 5 may be one or three or more. The number of reject stackers 6 may be two or more. Alternatively, the non-binding stacker 5 and the reject stacker 6 may be omitted.
 また、実施形態では、取込口24、投出口111及びリジェクト取出口63が第1側面123に設けられ、第1取出口413、第2取出口53及びタッチパネル17が第2側面124に設けられているが、これは例示に過ぎない。 In the embodiment, the intake port 24, the outlet 111, and the reject outlet 63 are provided on the first side surface 123, and the first outlet 413, the second outlet 53, and the touch panel 17 are provided on the second side surface 124. However, this is only an example.
 さらに、紙幣処理装置100の各要素の配置も一例に過ぎず、様々な配置を採用し得る。例えば、図29に示すように、投出部11が筐体12のうち第1側面123と反対側の側面に設けられ、結束スタッカ4が第1側面123寄りに設けられてもよい。 Furthermore, the arrangement of each element of the banknote handling apparatus 100 is only an example, and various arrangements can be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the throwing portion 11 may be provided on the side surface of the housing 12 opposite to the first side surface 123, and the binding stacker 4 may be provided closer to the first side surface 123.
 また、前記紙幣処理装置100は、同一種類結束処理を行っているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、紙幣処理装置100は、複数の種類の紙幣を結束対象として、異なる種類の紙幣を2つの結束スタッカ4に分けて集積し、結束スタッカ4ごとに該所定枚数集積された紙幣を結束部9により結束する複数種類結束処理を行ってもよい。つまり、第1結束スタッカ4Aに集積される紙幣と、第2結束スタッカ4Bに集積される紙幣とは種類が異なる。 Moreover, although the said banknote processing apparatus 100 is performing the same kind bundling process, it is not restricted to this. For example, the banknote processing apparatus 100 divides and stacks different types of banknotes into two binding stackers 4 for a plurality of types of banknotes as a binding target, and stacks the predetermined number of banknotes for each binding stacker 4. A plurality of types of bundling processes for bundling may be performed. That is, the banknotes stacked on the first binding stacker 4A and the banknotes stacked on the second binding stacker 4B are different in type.
 あるいは、紙幣処理装置100は、紙幣Bを結束することなく、所定の枚数ずつに分割する分割処理を行うものであってもよい。つまり、紙幣処理装置100は、結束部9を備えていなくてもよい。分割処理においては、同一種類結束処理と同様に、バラ状態の紙幣Bがホッパ部2に載置される。その後、紙幣Bが取込口24から取り込まれ、識別部3により識別され、適切なスタッカに搬送される点は、同一種類結束処理と同様である。そして、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣Bが所定枚数に達すると、制御部120は、該結束スタッカ4のロック機構44cを解除状態とし、タッチパネル17に該結束スタッカ4の紙幣Bが所定枚数に達した旨を表示させる。すると、オペレータは、扉44を開いて、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣Bを取り出す。尚、一方の結束スタッカ4の紙幣Bが所定枚数に達すると、制御部120は、それ以降の紙幣Bを他方の結束スタッカ4に搬送する。その後、他方の結束スタッカ4の紙幣Bが所定枚数に達すると、先程と同様に、制御部120は、他方の結束スタッカ4のロック機構44cを解除状態とし、タッチパネル17に該結束スタッカ4の紙幣Bが所定枚数に達した旨を表示させる。オペレータは、扉44を開いて、結束スタッカ4に集積された紙幣Bを取り出す。 Alternatively, the banknote handling apparatus 100 may perform a division process of dividing the banknotes B into a predetermined number without binding them. That is, the banknote handling apparatus 100 may not include the binding unit 9. In the division process, the banknote B in a loose state is placed on the hopper unit 2 as in the same-type bundling process. Thereafter, the bill B is taken in from the take-in port 24, identified by the identification unit 3, and conveyed to an appropriate stacker in the same manner as in the same type bundling process. When the number of banknotes B stacked on the binding stacker 4 reaches a predetermined number, the control unit 120 releases the lock mechanism 44c of the binding stacker 4 so that the banknotes B of the binding stacker 4 reach the predetermined number on the touch panel 17. Display that it has been reached. Then, the operator opens the door 44 and takes out the bills B accumulated in the binding stacker 4. In addition, when the banknote B of one binding stacker 4 reaches a predetermined number, the control unit 120 conveys the subsequent banknotes B to the other binding stacker 4. Thereafter, when the banknotes B of the other binding stacker 4 reach a predetermined number, the control unit 120 releases the lock mechanism 44c of the other binding stacker 4 and releases the banknotes of the binding stacker 4 on the touch panel 17 as before. The fact that B has reached the predetermined number is displayed. The operator opens the door 44 and takes out the bills B accumulated in the binding stacker 4.
 また、前記紙幣処理装置100は、複数の金種の紙幣が混在していたバラ状態の紙幣を処理しているが、これに限られるものではない。紙幣処理装置100は、所定の1種類の金種の紙幣を処理する構成であってもよい。 Moreover, although the said banknote processing apparatus 100 processes the banknote of the rose state in which the banknote of several denominations was mixed, it is not restricted to this. The banknote processing apparatus 100 may be configured to process banknotes of a predetermined one type of denomination.
 また、各スタッカに集積される紙幣の種類は、予め設定されているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、紙幣処理装置100への紙幣の取り込みが開始されてから識別部3により識別された順に紙幣の種類を各スタッカに割り当ててもよい。例えば、第1結束スタッカ4Aは、最初に識別部3に識別された種類の紙幣Bを集積し、第2結束スタッカ4Bは、2番目に識別部3に識別された種類の紙幣Bを集積し、第1非結束スタッカ5Aは、3番目に識別部3に識別された種類の紙幣Bを集積し、第2非結束スタッカ5Bは、4番目に識別部3に識別された種類の紙幣Bを集積するようにしてもよい。 Also, the types of banknotes accumulated in each stacker are set in advance, but are not limited to this. For example, the types of banknotes may be assigned to each stacker in the order identified by the identification unit 3 after the banknotes are taken into the banknote handling apparatus 100. For example, the first binding stacker 4A stacks the types of banknotes B first identified by the identification unit 3, and the second binding stacker 4B stacks the types of banknotes B identified second by the identification unit 3. The first non-bundling stacker 5A accumulates the types of banknotes B identified third by the identification unit 3, and the second non-bundling stacker 5B collects the types of banknotes B identified fourth by the identification unit 3. You may make it accumulate.
 前記実施形態では、紙幣Bがその短手方向に搬送、即ち、その短手方向が搬送方向に一致する姿勢で搬送されているが、これに限られるものではない。つまり、紙幣Bがその長手方向に搬送、即ち、その長手方向が搬送方向に一致する姿勢で搬送されてもよい。また、搬送方向は、途中で切り替えられてもよい。 In the embodiment, the bill B is transported in the short direction, that is, transported in a posture in which the short direction coincides with the transport direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the bills B may be transported in the longitudinal direction, that is, in a posture in which the longitudinal direction coincides with the transport direction. Further, the transport direction may be switched on the way.
 また、前記実施形態では、結束スタッカ4において、紙幣Bの第1辺b1が位置決め部47に接触するように整列されているが、これに限られるものではない。紙幣Bの長辺である第2辺b2又は第4辺b4が位置決め部47に接触する構成であってもよい。その場合、紙幣Bの短手方向寸法に応じて位置決め部47が取り替えられる。 In the above embodiment, the bundling stacker 4 is aligned so that the first side b1 of the bill B is in contact with the positioning portion 47, but is not limited to this. A configuration in which the second side b <b> 2 or the fourth side b <b> 4 which is the long side of the banknote B is in contact with the positioning portion 47 may be used. In that case, the positioning part 47 is replaced according to the short direction dimension of the banknote B.
 また、前記実施形態では、結束スタッカ4において紙幣Bが上下方向に重ねられ、ステージ41は、上下方向に移動するように構成されているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、ステージ41の表面41bが鉛直方向に対して傾斜しており、紙幣Bが鉛直方向に対して傾斜した方向に重ねられ、ステージ41が同様に鉛直方向に対して傾斜した方向に移動するように構成されていてもよい。 Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the banknote B is piled up and down in the binding stacker 4, and the stage 41 is comprised so that it may move up and down, it is not restricted to this. For example, the surface 41b of the stage 41 is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the banknotes B are stacked in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, and the stage 41 similarly moves in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction. It may be configured.
 また、位置決め部47の第1係止溝48,48,…は省略してもよい。 Further, the first locking grooves 48, 48,... Of the positioning portion 47 may be omitted.
 尚、接触部81c,81d,101a,102a、第1及び第2接触部931a,931b、第1及び第2接触部932a,932b、第1及び第2接触部941a,941b、第1~第3接触部942a~942c、第1及び第2接触部943a,943b、並びに、第1及び第2接触部944a,944bは、ウレタンゴムで構成されているが、これに限られるものではない。例えば、各接触部は、ウレタンゴム以外であって、各接触部が取り付けられている本体部(例えば、金属)よりも摩擦係数が大きい材料で構成されていてもよい。 The contact portions 81c, 81d, 101a, 102a, the first and second contact portions 931a, 931b, the first and second contact portions 932a, 932b, the first and second contact portions 941a, 941b, the first to third. The contact portions 942a to 942c, the first and second contact portions 943a and 943b, and the first and second contact portions 944a and 944b are made of urethane rubber, but are not limited thereto. For example, each contact portion may be made of a material other than urethane rubber and having a larger coefficient of friction than a main body portion (for example, metal) to which each contact portion is attached.
 以上説明したように、ここに開示された技術は、紙葉類処理装置について有用である。 As described above, the technique disclosed herein is useful for a paper sheet processing apparatus.
100  紙幣処理装置(紙葉類処理装置)
11   投出部
112  スライド部
115  搬送部
115g 第1孔
115h 第2孔
116  受け止め部
117  第1センサ
118  第2センサ
12   筐体
123  第1側面
2    ホッパ部(取込部)
4A   第1結束スタッカ(集積部)
4B   第2結束スタッカ(集積部)
46   扉
47A  第1位置決め部
47B  第2位置決め部
47C  第3位置決め部
49   整列機構49(押し当て部)
8    第2搬送部(結束前搬送部)
81c  接触部
81d  接触部
9    結束部
941  固定上クランプ部(クランプ部)
941a 第1接触部
941b 第2接触部
942  可動上クランプ部(クランプ部)
942a 第1接触部
942b 第2接触部
942c 第3接触部
943  下クランプ部(クランプ部)
943a 第1接触部
943b 第2接触部
944  下クランプ部(クランプ部)
944a 第1接触部
944b 第2接触部
10   第3搬送部(結束後搬送部)
101a 接触部
102a 接触部
B    紙幣(紙葉類)
P    位置決め位置(所定位置)
T    テープ
b1   第1辺
b2   第2辺
b3   第3辺
b4   第4辺
100 banknote processing device (paper sheet processing device)
11 Throwing portion 112 Slide portion 115 Conveying portion 115g First hole 115h Second hole 116 Receiving portion 117 First sensor 118 Second sensor 12 Housing 123 First side surface 2 Hopper portion (take-in portion)
4A 1st binding stacker (stacking unit)
4B 2nd binding stacker (stacking unit)
46 Door 47A 1st positioning part 47B 2nd positioning part 47C 3rd positioning part 49 Alignment mechanism 49 (pressing part)
8 Second transport unit (transport unit before bundling)
81c Contact part 81d Contact part 9 Bundling part 941 Fixed upper clamp part (clamp part)
941a First contact portion 941b Second contact portion 942 Movable upper clamp portion (clamp portion)
942a First contact portion 942b Second contact portion 942c Third contact portion 943 Lower clamp portion (clamp portion)
943a First contact portion 943b Second contact portion 944 Lower clamp portion (clamp portion)
944a 1st contact part 944b 2nd contact part 10 3rd conveyance part (conveyance part after bundling)
101a Contact part 102a Contact part B Banknote (paper sheets)
P Positioning position (predetermined position)
T tape b1 first side b2 second side b3 third side b4 fourth side

Claims (5)

  1.  紙葉類を重ねて集積する集積部を備えた紙葉類処理装置であって、
     前記集積部は、
      集積された紙葉類の一辺である第1辺と対向し、該第1辺を所定位置に位置決めする位置決め部と、
      紙葉類のうち前記第1辺に対向する一辺である第3辺を押して、該第1辺を前記位置決め部に接触させる押し当て部とを有し、
     前記位置決め部は、取替可能に構成され、取り替えられることによって前記所定位置を変更することを特徴とする紙葉類処理装置。
    A paper sheet processing apparatus including a stacking unit that stacks and stacks paper sheets,
    The stacking unit
    A positioning unit that faces the first side that is one side of the stacked paper sheets and positions the first side at a predetermined position;
    A pressing portion that presses a third side that is one side of the paper sheet that faces the first side, and makes the first side contact the positioning unit;
    The paper sheet processing apparatus, wherein the positioning unit is configured to be replaceable and changes the predetermined position by being replaced.
  2.  請求項1に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
     紙葉類の前記第3辺を押すときの前記押し当て部の移動量は、前記位置決め部の種類及び紙葉類の寸法に応じて調整されることを特徴とする紙葉類処理装置。
    In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to claim 1,
    The paper sheet processing apparatus, wherein the amount of movement of the pressing unit when the third side of the paper sheet is pressed is adjusted according to the type of the positioning unit and the size of the paper sheet.
  3.  請求項2に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
     前記位置決め部は、前記所定位置が異なる第1位置決め部及び第2位置決め部を少なくとも含み、
     前記第1辺と第3辺との間の寸法が所定の第1範囲の紙葉類に対しては、前記第1位置決め部が用いられ、前記押し当て部の移動量が該寸法に応じて調整され、
     前記第1辺と第3辺との間の寸法が前記第1範囲と異なる第2範囲の紙葉類に対しては、前記第2位置決め部が用いられ、前記押し当て部の移動量が該寸法に応じて調整されることを特徴とする紙葉類処理装置。
    In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to claim 2,
    The positioning unit includes at least a first positioning unit and a second positioning unit having different predetermined positions,
    The first positioning unit is used for paper sheets having a first range between the first side and the third side in a predetermined first range, and the amount of movement of the pressing unit depends on the size. Adjusted,
    The second positioning unit is used for paper sheets in a second range in which the dimension between the first side and the third side is different from the first range, and the amount of movement of the pressing unit is A paper sheet processing apparatus that is adjusted according to dimensions.
  4.  請求項1乃至3の何れか1つに記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
     前記集積部は、該集積部を開閉する扉を有し、
     前記位置決め部は、前記扉に設けられていることを特徴とする紙葉類処理装置。
    In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    The accumulation part has a door for opening and closing the accumulation part,
    The paper sheet processing apparatus, wherein the positioning portion is provided on the door.
  5.  請求項4に記載の紙葉類処理装置において、
     前記扉は、所定の軸周りに回転することによって前記集積部を開閉するように構成されており、
     前記位置決め部は、前記扉が前記集積部を開放したときに該集積部の外方に露出することを特徴とする紙葉類処理装置。
    In the paper sheet processing apparatus according to claim 4,
    The door is configured to open and close the accumulation unit by rotating around a predetermined axis,
    The paper sheet processing apparatus, wherein the positioning unit is exposed to the outside of the stacking unit when the door opens the stacking unit.
PCT/JP2015/004301 2014-08-27 2015-08-26 Paper sheet processing device WO2016031248A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201580045690.5A CN106796742B (en) 2014-08-27 2015-08-26 Paper products processing unit
EP15835893.7A EP3188139B1 (en) 2014-08-27 2015-08-26 Paper sheet processing device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014-172974 2014-08-27
JP2014172974A JP2016048447A (en) 2014-08-27 2014-08-27 Sheet processing device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016031248A1 true WO2016031248A1 (en) 2016-03-03

Family

ID=55399161

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/004301 WO2016031248A1 (en) 2014-08-27 2015-08-26 Paper sheet processing device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
EP (1) EP3188139B1 (en)
JP (1) JP2016048447A (en)
CN (1) CN106796742B (en)
WO (1) WO2016031248A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106971452A (en) * 2016-08-19 2017-07-21 苏州少士电子科技有限责任公司 Adapt to mix the sorting type automatic bundling machine paper money pushing mechanism of type bank note

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6822094B2 (en) * 2016-11-24 2021-01-27 沖電気工業株式会社 Media processing equipment
EP3657449A4 (en) * 2017-07-21 2021-03-10 Fujitsu Frontech Limited Paper money handling device
CN108248231A (en) * 2018-03-19 2018-07-06 北京天川同展科技有限公司 Batch seal-affixing machine
JP6876286B2 (en) * 2020-07-03 2021-05-26 株式会社エース電研 Paper leaf collection and transportation system
KR102589921B1 (en) * 2021-11-12 2023-10-17 주식회사 에이텍에이피 Automated teller machine and automated teller machine assembly
CN114951005A (en) * 2022-06-16 2022-08-30 诸暨市天佑环保科技有限公司 A float high check out test set for metal assembly spare
CN115009577B (en) * 2022-07-20 2024-02-27 广东职业技术学院 Packing apparatus is used in production of double-deck kraft liner pad

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0896218A (en) * 1994-09-28 1996-04-12 Toshiba Corp Paper money processor
JP3178120U (en) * 2012-06-20 2012-08-30 米谷印刷工業株式会社 Paper bundle aligner
JP2013050830A (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-03-14 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Bill straightening mechanism and bill processing device

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3795273B2 (en) * 1999-10-01 2006-07-12 日立オムロンターミナルソリューションズ株式会社 Paper sheet processing apparatus and banknote processing apparatus
JP5274999B2 (en) * 2007-12-12 2013-08-28 日立オムロンターミナルソリューションズ株式会社 Banknote handling equipment
WO2010097954A1 (en) * 2009-02-27 2010-09-02 グローリー株式会社 Device for sorting- and binding-processing of banknotes
CN202369174U (en) * 2011-11-03 2012-08-08 青岛万维包装设备有限公司 Stacker
JP5983334B2 (en) * 2012-11-13 2016-08-31 沖電気工業株式会社 Position adjusting device and paper sheet processing device
CN203415033U (en) * 2013-07-31 2014-01-29 光荣株式会社 Paper sheet processing device
CN103407776B (en) * 2013-08-08 2015-08-19 深圳劲嘉彩印集团股份有限公司 A kind of printed matter pusher and method for pushing thereof
CN103625678B (en) * 2013-12-19 2015-07-01 上海龙延机械制造有限公司 Automatic paper currency stacking and binding integrated machine

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0896218A (en) * 1994-09-28 1996-04-12 Toshiba Corp Paper money processor
JP2013050830A (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-03-14 Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd Bill straightening mechanism and bill processing device
JP3178120U (en) * 2012-06-20 2012-08-30 米谷印刷工業株式会社 Paper bundle aligner

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106971452A (en) * 2016-08-19 2017-07-21 苏州少士电子科技有限责任公司 Adapt to mix the sorting type automatic bundling machine paper money pushing mechanism of type bank note

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2016048447A (en) 2016-04-07
EP3188139A1 (en) 2017-07-05
EP3188139B1 (en) 2018-11-28
EP3188139A4 (en) 2017-08-30
CN106796742A (en) 2017-05-31
CN106796742B (en) 2019-07-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2016031248A1 (en) Paper sheet processing device
RU2526748C1 (en) Stacking and wrapping device
EP2716553B1 (en) Paper sheet binding device
JP6259602B2 (en) Paper sheet bundling device
WO2015141162A1 (en) Paper sheet processing device
JP6356662B2 (en) Banknote handling equipment
EP3023336B1 (en) Paper sheet bundling device
CN101600638A (en) Sheets pressing device
WO2014148000A1 (en) Paper currency-processing device
KR101591152B1 (en) Paper sheet processing device
JP6320699B2 (en) Paper sheet bundling apparatus and error recovery method for paper sheet bundling apparatus
JP6292954B2 (en) Paper sheet processing equipment
WO2015155999A1 (en) Paper sheet processing device
JP2015203902A (en) Paper sheet processing device
WO2016031176A1 (en) Paper sheet processing apparatus
JP6472593B2 (en) Banknote handling machine
JP2020009218A (en) Paper sheet sealing mechanism and paper sheet processing apparatus
JP6301093B2 (en) Paper sheet stacking apparatus and paper sheet stacking method
JP6230936B2 (en) Paper sheet processing equipment
JP6230940B2 (en) Paper sheet processing equipment
WO2015015534A1 (en) Paper currency processing device
JP2000190914A (en) Device for binding sheets
JP2014182486A (en) Banknote handling apparatus
JP2000190913A (en) Device for binding sheets
JP2015199524A (en) Paper processing apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15835893

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2015835893

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2015835893

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE